GRAMMATICA LATINA IN USUM SCHOLARUM ADORNATA.  
Grammatices Lilianae verbis, (quantum fieri licuit,) retentis; multis ejus erroribus emendatis: minùs-necessariis amputatis; pluribus, quae deficerent, suppletis; & omnibus Methodo faciliori ad tenellae aetatis captum conformata, dispositis.  
Operâ & Studio CAROLI HOOLE, A. M. è C. L. Oxon. Scholarchae olim Rotherhamiensis in agro Ebor. jam verò privatae Scholae Grammaticae Institutoris in Aurisicum viculo, haud procul ab Alnorum & Clinicorum portis apud Londinates.  
Adjecta est insuper (nè quid huic instituto desit) in juventutis gratiam, in adversa paginâ, Anglicana interpretatio.  
FRANC. PATRI.  
Grammatica est omnium Disciplinarum Fundamentum  
LONDINI, Typis Guil. Du-Gard; veneúntque apud Joannem Clark jun. in Mercatorum Sacello, ad inferiorem partem Vici Cheapsidianis. Anno Dom. 1651.   
M. FAB. Quintil. Instit. Orat. l. 1. c. 4. 
HAec Professio— plus habet in recessu quàm in fronte promittit— Quò minùs sunt ferendi, qui hanc Artem ut tenuem ac jejunàm cavillantur: quae nisi Oratori futurò fundamenta fideliter jecerit, quicquid superstruxeris, corruet: & quae vel sola omni studiorum genere plus habet operis, quàm ostentationis. Nè quis igitur tanquam parva fastidiat Grammatices elementa; non quia magnae sit operae, consonantes à vocalibus discernere, ipsás que eas in semivocalium numerum, mutarùmque partiri: sed quia interiora velut sacri hujus adeuntibus, apparebit multa rerum subtili as, quae non modò acuere ingenia puerilia, sed exercere altissimam quoque eruditionem, ac scientiam possit.  CICERO de Oratore lib. 3. 
PRaecepta latinè loquendi puerilis doctrina tradit, & subtilior cognitio, ac ratio literarum alit; aut consuetudo sermonis quotidiani, ac domestici libri confirmant, & lectio veterum Oratorum & Poêtarum.  Desid. ERASMUS Rotterodamus. 
PRoclivius est vel in triplici jure Doctoris nomen, quàm semel boni Grammatici titulum promeruisse.   

GRAMMATICA LATINA.  
De Grammaticâ, & ejus partibus.  
Grammatica Latina rectè loquendi Latine praecepta continet. Ejus quatnor sunt partes,  
GRammatica est rectè Scribendi atque Loquendi Ars.  
Latinis Latiné.  
Grammaticae quatuor sunt partes. 1 Orthográphia. Lib. I. 2 Etymológia. Lib. II. 3 Syntaxis. Lib. III. 4 Prosódia. Lib. IU.  
Nomen Grammaticae impositum est à literis, quas grammata G●●ci vocant; sonátque idem quod literatura, quasi Artem L●erariam dicas: literae enim sunt prima hujus Artis mitia, ex quibus fiunt syllabae; ex syllabis, dictiones; & è dictionibus, ●●●tio; quae soli●● vel ligata est.  
Orthographia versatur in Literis, Prosodia in Syllabis, Etymologia in Dictionibus & Syntaxis in Oratione. Ordo igitur naturalis postulat, ut Prosodia in secundo loco collocetur. Nobis autem methodum Vulgaris Grammatices observantibus (quippe, Syllabarum quantitas ante Vocum intelligentiam non tam facilè pe●●●pi queat) ultimum Prosodia locum assignare, visum est.  

Lib. I. De Orthographia.  
1. Orthographia agit  
ORthographia est prima pars Grammatices, quâ docemur quibus quaeque dictio sit formanda literis; ut lectio non lexio.  
Orthographia autem agit De Literis. Cap. I. De Syllabis. Cap. II. De Orthoëpia. Cap. III. De Sententiarum punctis. Cap. IU.  

Cap. 1. De Literis.  
1. De Literis quae sunt Vocale, & Consonantes. Minusculae & Majusculae. quae significant Vocabulum aut Numerum  
LItera est minima pars Dictionis.  
Literae Latinae sunt viginti tres. A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T V X Y Z.  
Tria accidunt unicuique literae. 1. Nomen, quo apellatur. 2. Figura, quâ notatur. 3. Potestas, quâ pronunciatur. Distinguuntur Literae secundùm sonum in Vocales, & Consonantes.  
Vocalis est litera quae per se sonat; & sunt quinque, a e i o u, & y Grae●●●: ex quibus variè dispositis totidem fiunt Dipthongi, ae au ei eu oe, & ij.  
Consonans est litera, quae non nisi cum vocali juncta sonat; ut B C D etc. J etiam & V consonantes fiunt, cùm vel sibi, vel aliis vocalibus in eâdem syllabâ praeponuntur; ut Juno, Jovis; voluntas, vultus.  
Consonantium aliae sunt 1. Mutae, quae sonum nullum à seipsis habent, & sunt novem, b c d f g k p q t, in quibus sonus vocalis sequitur. Nam f respondet φ Graecorum, & q ut sonat semper adsciscit u. 2. Semivocales, quae aliquid soni à seipsis habent, & sunt septem, l m n r s x z, in quibus sonus vocalis praecedit. Semivocalium aliae sunt Liquidae, quae post Mutam in eâdem syllaba liquescunt, sive vim suam amittunt; ut l m n r. Duplices, quae duarum literarum vim habent; ut x. z & j inter duas vocales. Nam in jejunium, primum j videtur esse consona simplex, secundum duplex, & tertium vo cale.  
S nec Liquida est, nec Muta, sed suae potestatis, (sive pronuntiationis) litera; quam idcirco nonnulli Monadicon appellârunt.  
H propriè quidem non est litera, sed asspirationis nota; ut pulcher, homo, hiatus; sed ante i e rarò pronunciatur; dicere enim solemus Hjeremias, Hjerosolyma, quasi ab J consona inciperet; sed Hierarchia, tanquam inciperet ab i vocali.  
Literae quoad formam suam sunt Minusculae, quae minusculis characteribus scribuntur, ut a b c: Majusculae, quae majusculis characteribus scribuntur, ut A B C.  
Majusculis inchoantur  
1. Sententiae; ut Deum time. Regem honora.  
2. Propria nomina; ut, Carolus, Londinum, Thamisis.  
3. Dictiones quaelibet in oratione notatu digniores; ut,  
Riligionis Christianae fundamentum est Fides.  
4. In Carminibus versus singuli; ut,  
Vtendum est aetate: cito pede praeterit aetas;  
Nec bona tam sequitur, quàm bona prima fuit.  
In reliquis locis maxima ex parte Minusculae scribuntur, è quibus istae sunt praecipuè notandae, quae duplicem obtinent characterem, ut i u and s; nam i & u vocales sunt; j verò & v sunt consonae; quas aliqui ja & va nominârunt. s Longum etiam semper in principio, vel medio dictionis pingitur, sed ● breve in fine; ut, scripsimus.  
Literae majusculae cùm solae aut paucae scribuntur, significant  
aliquando Integra vocabula; ut, M. T. C. Marcus Tullius Cicero. S. P. D. Salutem plurimam dicit. A. M. Anno Mundi. A. D. Anno Domini. R. P. Respublica. P. C. Patres Conscripti. H. S. aut LL. S. Duae librae & semis. N. B. Nota bene. Numerum; ut, I unum, V quinque, X decem, L quinquaginta, C centum, ∽ vel CC ducenti, D vel D quingenti, ∞ vel M vel M mille, ↁ quinque millia CCIↃↃ decem millia. ↇ quinquaginta millia. ↈ centena millia. {roman} 500000 quingenta millia. {roman} 1000000 decies centena millia.  
Minor numerus praepositus tantundem demit majori sequenti; postpositus verò tantundem addit: ut, IV valet quatuor, VI verò sex: IX valet novem, at XI undecim.  
Linea transversa notis numericis superposita, easdem tot millia continere innuit, quot alioqui minores numeros continerent, ut III tria millia, X decem millia, & sic de caeteris.   

Cap. 2. De Syllabis.  
2 De Syllabla: & earundem distinctione, vel connexione.  
SYllaba est comprehensio literarum uno spiritu prolata; ut, vir-tus.  
Estque Impropria, quae constat ex solâ vocali vel diphthongo; ut, Ae-a-cus. Propria, quae constat ex consonante unâ vel pluribus, cum vocali vel diphthongo comprehensis; ut, Coelestis.  
Rectè scripturo discendum est syllabas, inter seribendum, aptè distinguere, atque connectere.  
Notandum igitur quòd  
1. Syllaba apud Latinos numerum senarium literarum non excedat; ut, Stirps, Scrobs.  
2. In Polysyllabis consonans inter duas vocales posita ad posteriorem pertineat; ut, Do-mi-nus.  
3. Si consonans geminetur, prior ad praecedentem, posterior ad sequentem syllabam pertinet; ut, An-nus.  
4. Consonae, quae in initio vocis conjungi non possunt, in medio sunt distinguendae; ut, Sul-cus: Et è contrà; ut, No-ster.  
5. In simplicibus vocibus hae literae vocali sequenti semper adhaerent, viz.  
bd ut He-bdomas. quia dicitur Bdellium. cn Te-chna. Cneus. ct Do-ctus. Ctesipho. gn A-gnus. Gnatus. mn A-mnis. Mnemosyne. phth Na-phtha. Phthisis. ps Scri-psi. Psittacus. pt A-ptus. Ptolomaeus. sb Le-sbia. Sbesis. sc Pi-scis. Scamnum. sm Co-smus. Smaragdus. sp A-sper. Spero. sq Te-squa. Squalor. st Pa-stor. Sterto. tl A-tlas Tleptolemus. tm La-tmius. Tmolus. tn Ae-tna. Thnesko.  
6. In compositis quaeque pars ab alterâ separanda est; ut Abs-con-do.  
7. In compositis cum praepositione auribus & Eupboniae serviendum est; ut, Aufero, non absfero, & abstuli, non autuli: ideóque Consonantes non rarò interseruntur; ut, Redamo pro Reamo, Ambigo pro Amigo.  
8. Post X in compositis, quorum simplicia incipiunt ab S, rectissimè scribitur s; ut, Exscribo, ab ex & scribo; exsul, ab ex & solum; sed non in aliis; ut exoro, ab ex & oro; exigo, ab ex & ago.   

Cap. 3. De Orthoëpia.  
3. De Orthoëpia, & vitiis sermon it omendatia●.  
ORthoëpia est rectè Enuntiandi ratio; ut, Homo non Omo.  
Pueri nec sermonem praecipitent, nec ad singulas quasque voces censilescant. Deterrendi sunt autem à vitiis sermonis vulgò propriis, cujusmodi sunt  
1. Traulismus, qui est haesitantia vel titubantia oris; ut, Cacacanit pro canit. Cui vitio facilè succurritur, si centones quosdam affectatae difficultatis, quàm citissimè volvant; ut,  
Arx, tridens, rostris, sphinx, praester, torrida, seps, strix.  
2. Plateasmus, est justo crassior pronunciatio; ut Argò pro Ergô. Mountes pro Montes. Taibai pro tibi.  
3. Ischnotes, est justo exilior pronunciatio; ut, Nync pro Nunc. Eliquis pro Aliquis. Aut blaesior; ut, Aputh pro Apud. Amath pro Amat.   

Cap. 4. De Sententiarum Punctis.  
4: De sentententiarum punctis, quae sunt, 1. Comma, 2. Colon: 3. Semicolon; 4. Periodus. 5. Parenthesis () 6. Interrogatio? Exclamatio! 8. Hyphen-  
PUnctum sive Pausa est nota distinctionis, respirandi intervallum significans. Horum octo sunt praecipuè notanda.  
1. Comma est semi-circulus, sententiam sustinens, breviores ejus clausulas distinguendo; ut,  
Grammaticus, rhetor, geometres, pictor, aliptes,  
Graeculus esuriens, in coelum, jusseris, ibit.  
2. Colon sunt duo puncta, quae sententiam diutiùs suspendunt, medias ejus partes dirimendo; ut,  
Vtendum est aetate: cito pede praeterit aetas.  
3. Semicolon est punctum cum Commate subjecto, sententiam diutiùs paulò sustinens quàm Comma; minùs diu verò quàm Colon; ut, Tu, quid divitiae possint, consideras; quid virtus, non item.  
4 Periodus est punctum plenum post perfectam sententiam; ut, Deum time. Regem honora.  
5. Parenthesis sunt duae semilunulae sententiam includentes, quâ remotâ sermo tamen manet integer; ut.  
— Princeps (quia bella minantur  
Hostes) militibus urbes praemunit, & armis.  
6. Interrogatio signat quaestionem duobus punctis, quorum superius est caudatum; ut, Quomodo vales?  
7. Exclamatio item notatur duobus punctis, quorum superius est lineola in punctum descendens; ut, O'tempora! O mores!  
8. Hyphen est lineola interposita voci dissectae in fine lineae; ut, Humanissimé: aut in vocibus unitis, sed non compositis; ut, Res-publica.    

LIB. II. De Etymologia.  
Etymologia agit  
ETYMOLOGIA est pars Grammaticae, quae docet dictionum diserimina, singularum proprietates, sive Accidentia diligenter expendens.  
Est autem dictio sive vox, pars orationis, quae ipsa aliquid significat, sed in partes significantes dividi non potest; ut, Pi-e-tas.  

Cap. 1. De octo Partibus Orationis, & earum Accidentibus generalibus.  
De octo Partibus Orationis, quae sunt Declinabile● Indeclinabiles, Quibus accidunt, Numeri duo Singularis & Pluralis. Personae tr●s. Prima. Secunda. Tertia.  
OCto sunt vocum genera.  

1. Nomen. Cap. 2.  
2. Pronomen. Cap. 23.  
3. Verbum. Cap. 24.  
4. Participium. Cap. 39  
5. Adverbium. Cap. 40.  
6. Conjunctio. Cap. 41.  
7. Praepositio. Cap. 42.  
8. Interjectio. Cap. 43.   
Atque hae vulgò vocantur Partes Orationis, quòd ex hisce omnis oratio conficiatur.  
Harum quatuor priores sunt Declinabiles, sive variabiles, quae in fine possunt variari. posteriores Indeclinabiles, sive invariabiles, quae in fine non possunt variari.  
Accidunt cuique Parti Orationis  
1. Species, secundùm quam vox dicitur Primitiva, quae aliunde non trahitur; ut, Arbor, Amo.  Derivativa, quae aliunde formatur; ut, Arbustum, Amicus.  Simplex, ut, Amicus, Amo. 2. Figura, Composita, ut, Inimicus, Redamo.  
Accidunt vocibus Declinabilibus  
1. Analogia, cùm dictio convenit Communi Regulae; ut, Musa, Amo.  
2. Anomalia, cùm dictio recedit à Communi Regulâ; ut, Filia, Fero.  
3. Numeri Singularis loquitur de uno; ut, Lapis. duo  de pluribus; ut, Lapides. quorum. Pluralis 4. Personae tres, Prima, quae loquitur de se; ut, Ego nugans puer ludo. Secunda, ad quam loquimur; ut, Tu nugans puer ludis. Tertia, de quâ loquimur,; ut Ille nugans puer ludit.  
Ego & Nos sunt semper Primae personae.  
Tu & Vos, & omnes Vocativi Secundae.  
Caetera Nomina, Pronomina, & Participia sunt Tertiae personae, nisi ista exprimantur vel subintelligantur.   

Cap. 2. De Nomine, & ejus Accidentibus specialibus.  
Nomen rem nominat, estque Substantivum Vel Adjectivum Proprium Vel Commune. Ejus sunt  
NOmen est Pars Orationis quae rem nominat sine ulla Temporis aut Personae differentiâ; ut, Manus, Domus.  
Estque  
Substantivum, quod per se in Oratione subsistit, & nihil addi postulat ad suam significationem exprimendam; ut, Homo.  
Adjectivum quod Substantivo indiget ad suam signicationem exprimendam; ut Bonus.  
Substantivum indicat quid sit; ut, Equus.  
Adjectivum indicat quale sit; ut, Albus.  
Quorum utrunque est  
Proprium, quod rem uni individuo propriam significat; ut, Carolus, Londinum, Thamisis, Anglus, Scotus.  
Commune, sive Appellativum, quod rem multis communem significat; ut, Homo, Vrbs, Fluvius, Regio, Magnus.  
Accidunt Nomini, Pronomini, & Partieipio, Casus. Cap. 3. Genus. Cap. 4. Declinatio. Cap. 11. Comparatio. Cap. 17.   

Cap. 3. De Casu.  
Sex Casus Nominativus. Genitivus. Dativus. Accusativus. Vocativus. Ablativus.  
CAsus est specalis Nominis, Pronominis, aut Participii terminatio.  
Sunt autem Sex casus in utroque numero.  
1. Nominatiws est prima vox, quâ rem aliquam nominamus: praecedit autem Verbum, & respondet quaestioni Quis, aut Quid? ut, Magister docet.  
2. Genitivus significat cujus sit res quaepiam, & respondet quaestioni Cujus? ut, Doctrina Magistri.  
3. Dativus quid cuipiam attribuit, & respondet quaestioni Cui? ut, Do librum Magistro.  
4. Accusativus sequitur Verbum, utpote in quem actio Verbi immediatè transit, & respondet quaestioni, Quem, vel Quid? ut, Amo Magistrum.  
5. Vocativus vocandis compellandisve personis accommodatur; ut, O Magister.  
6. Ablativus conjungitur ferè Praepositioni Ablativo inservienti; & respondet quaestioni à quo; ut, Accepi librum à Magistro.  
Nominativus aliquando Rectus casus dicitur: caeteri verò Obliqui, quòd eorum terminationes flectunt à Nominativo.   

Cap. 4. De Genere.  
Genera septem Masculinum: Foemininum Neutrum, Commune duorum. Commune trium. Dubium. Epicoenum  
GEnus est Sexûs discretio ratione sermonis. Discernit enim inter ea nomina, quae tanquam mares aut foeminae construuntur, propter convenientiam Substantivi & Adjectivi cognoscendam.  
Genera Nominum sunt septem: quorum tria prima non ineptè Simplicia, quatuor verò postrema Composita dici queant.  
Dignoscuntur autem suis Articulis (sive notis) qui à Pronominibus accipiuntur, & in hunc modum variantur.  
Singulariter  Masc Foem. Neut Pluraliter Masc. Foem. Neut. Nom. Hic Haec Hoc Hi Hae Haec Gen. Hujus Hujus Hujus Horum Harum Horum Dat. Huic Huic Huic His His His Acc. Hunc Hanc Hoc Hos Has Haec        Abl. Hôc Hac Hôc His His His  
1. Masculinum genus maribus attribuitur; cujus nota est Hic; ut Hic vir.  
2. Foemininum foeminis attribuitur; cujus nota est Haec; ut, Haec mulier.  
3. Neurrum nec maribus, nec foeminis attribuitur; cujus nota est Hoc; ut, Hoc saxum.  
4. Commune duorum ex Masculino & Foeminino componitur; cujus nota est Hic & Haec; ut, Hic & Haec Parens.  
5. Cmmune trium ex omnibus simplicibus generibus componitur; cujus nota est Hic, Haec & Hoc; ut, Hic, Haec, & Hoc, Felix.  
6. Dubium aut Masculinum aut Foemininum Articulum indifferenter assumere potest; cujus nota est Hic vel Haec; ut, Hic vel Haec Dies.  
Epicoenum sub uno Articulo utrunque sexum complectitur; ut, Hic passer. Hoc autem in genere, ad vitandam ambiguitatem, sexum exprimere solemus per marem & foeminam; ut, Passer mas, Passer foemina.   

Propria quae Maribus: VELURE, GUILIELMI LILII Regulae DE GENERIBUS NOMINUM.  

CAP. 5. De Regulis Generalibus Propriorum.  
Regulae de ge●erious nominum. 1. Generales. 1. Substantivotum Propriorum. 1. Propria 1. Deorum, 2. Virorum, 3. Fluviorum 4. Mensium, 5. Ventorum, mascula sunt. 2. Propria 1. Dearum, 2. Mulierum. 3. Uibium, 4. Regionum, 5. Insulatum, Faeminina sunt,  
1. PRopria, quae maribus tribuuntur, Mascula dicas; Vt sunt 1. Divorum, Mars, Bacchus, Apollo. 2. Virorum, Vt, Cato, Virgilius. 3. Fluviorum; ut, Tiber, Orontes. 4. Mensium; ut, October. 5. Ventorum; ut, Lybs, Notus, Auster.  

PRopria foemineum referentia nomina sexum,  
Foemineo generi tribuuntur: sive 1. Dearum  
Sunt; ut, Juno, Venus: 2. Mulierum; seu, Anna, Philotis.  
3. Urbium; ut Elis, Opus. 4. Regionum; ut, Graecia, Persis.  
5. Insulae item nomen; ceu, Creta, Britannia, Cyprus.   

Excipienda tamen quaedam sunt Vrbium; ut, ista  
1. Mascula, Sulmo, Agragas: 2. quaedam neutralia; ut Argos  
Tybur, Praeneste: & genus Anxur quod dat utrumque.    

Cap. 6. De Regulis Generalibus Appellativorum.  
TWO: Generalis Appellativotum. 1. Appellati●● Arborum sunt foeminina. 2. Appellative voluerum, fotarum, & 〈◊〉 Epico●● sunt. 3. Omne i● 〈◊〉 & inva●● abile 〈…〉 Regulae speciales Appellativorum sunt tres.  

I.  
APpellativa arborum erunt muliebria; ut, alnus,  
Cupressus, cedrus. Mas pinus, mas oleaster:  
Et sunt neutra, siler, suber, thus, robur, acérquo   

II.  
SVnt etiam volucrum; ceu, passer, hirundo: ferarum,  
Vt, Tigris, Vulpes: & piscium; ut ostrea, cetus,  
Dicta Epicoena: quibus vox ipsa genus feret aptum.   

III.  
Attamen ex cunctis, quae diximus antè, notandum,  
Omne quod exit in um, (si hominum modò Propria tollas)  
Esse genus neutrum: sic invariabile nomen.   

Sed nunc de reliquis, quae Appellativa vocantur,  
Aut quae sunt tanquam Appellativa, ordine dicam:  
Nam genus his semper dignoscitur ex Genitivo:  
Infrà ut monstrabit Specialis Regula triplex.    

Cap. 3. De primâ Regulâ Speciali, & ejus Exceptionibus.  
1. Nomen non crescens, est Muliebre. Excipiuntur Masculin●. Neutra. 〈◊〉. Communia. Excipe haec Puerpep.  

NOmen non crescens genitivo, ceu caro, carnis;  
Capra, caprae; nubes, nubis; genus est muliebre.   

1.  
MAscula nomina in a dicuntur multa virorum;  
Vt, Scriba, assecla, scurra, rabula, lixa, lanista.  
2. Mascula Graecorum quot declinatio prima  
Fundit in as & in es, & ab illis quot per a fiunt;  
Vt, Satrapas, Satrapa; Athletes, Athleta. 3. Leguntur  
Mascula item verres, natalis, aqualis. 4. Ab asse  
Nata; ut, centussis. 5. Conjunge lienis, & orbis,  
Calais, caulis, follis, collis, mensis, & ensis,  
Fustis, funis, panis, penis, crinis, & ignis,  
Cassis, fascis, torris, sentis, piscis, & unguis,  
Et vermis, vectis, postis, societur & axis.  
6. Mascula in er, ceu venter; in os, vel us, ut logos, annus.   

Foeminei generissunt 1. mater, 2. humus, domus, alvus,  
Et colus, & quartae pro fructu ficus, acúsque  
Porticus, atque tribus, socrus, nurus & manus, idus;  
Huc anus addenda est, huc mystica vannus jacchi.  
3. His jungas os in us vertentia Graeca, Papyrus,  
Antidote, costus, diphthongus, byssus, abyssus,  
Crystallus, Synodus, sapphirus, eremus, & arctus,  
Cum multis allis quae nunc perscribere longum est.   

II.  
NEutrum nomen in e, si gignit is; ut, mare, rete.  
2. Et quot in on vel in um fiunt; ut, barbiton, ovum.  
Est neutrum hyppomanes genus, & neutrum cacoëthes,  
Et virus, pelagus. 4. Neutrum modò, màs modò vulgus.   

III.  
INcerti generis sunt talpa, & dama, canalis,  
Et balanus, finis, clunis, restis, penus, amnis,  
Pampinus, & corbis, linter, torquis, specus, anguis,  
Pro morbo ficus, fici, dans; atque phaselus,  
Lecythus, ac atomus, grossus, pharus, & Paradisus.   

IV.  
COmpositum à verbo dans a commune duorum est,  
Grajugena, à gigno; agricola, à colo; id advena monstrat,  
A venio: adde senex, auriga, & verna, sodalis,  
Vates, extorris, patruelis, pér que duellis,  
Affinis, juvenis, testis, civis, canis, hostis.    

Cap. 3. De secundâ Speciali Regulâ, & ejus Exceptionibus.  
II. Nomen acu●● crescens est muliebre. Excipiuntur, Masculina, Neuters. Dubia, Communi  

NOmen, crescentis penultima si genitivi  
Syllaba acuta sonat, velut haec pietas, pietatis,  
Virtus, virtutis monstrat, genus est muliebre.   

I.  
MAscula dicuntur monosyllaba nomina quaedam,  
Sal, sol, ren, & splen, Car, Ser, vir, vas-vadis, as, mas,  
Bes, Cres, praes, & pes, glis-gliris habens genitvo,  
Mos, flos, ros, & Tros, mus, dens, mons, pons, simul & fons,  
Seps pro serpente, gryps, Thrax, Rex, grex-gregis, & Phryx.  
2. Mascula sunt etiam polysyllaba in n, ut, Acarnan,  
Lichen, & delphin: 3. & in o signantia corpus,  
Vt leo, curculio, sic senio, ternio, sermo.  
4. Mascula in er, or, & os; ceu crater, conditor, heros.  
5, Sic torrens, nefrens, oriens, cum pluribus in dens,  
Quale bidens, quando pro instrumento reperitur.  
6. Adde gigas, elephas, adamas, Garamásque, tapésque,  
Atque lebes, Cures, magnes, unúmque meridi.  
Es, nomen quintae. 7. Et quae componuntur ab asse,  
Vt dodrans, semis. 8. Jungantur Mascula Samnis,  
Hydrops, nycticorax, thorax, & mascula vervex,  
Phoenix, & bombyx, pro vermiculo. Attamen ex his  
Sunt muliebre genus, Siren, nec non soror, uxor.   

II.  
SVnt neutralia & haec monosyllaba nomina, mel, fel,  
Lac, far, ver, cor, aes, vas-vasis, os-ossis, & oris,  
Rus, thus, jus, crus, pus. Et in al polysyllaba in árque,  
Vt capital, laquear. Neutrum halec, & muliebre.   

III.  
SVnt dubia haec Python, scrobs, serpens, bubo, rudens, grus.  
Perdix, lynx, lymax, stirps pro trunco, pedis & calx.  
Adde dies numero tantùm mas esto secundo.   

IV.  
SVnt Commune, parens, autórque, infans, adolescens,  
Dux, illex, haeres, exlex; à fronte creata,  
Vt bifrons, custos, bos, fur, sus, atque sacerdos.    

Cap. 9 De tertia Speciali Regulâ, & ejus exceptionibus.  
III. Nomen graviter crescens, ef● masculinum. Excipiuntur Foemiaina. Neutra, Dubia. Commnnit.  

NOmen, crescentis penultima si genitivi  
Sit gravis, ut sanguis, genitivo sanguinis, est mas.   

I.  
Foeminei generis sit hyperdissyllabon in do,  
Quod dinis; atque in go, quod dat ginis in genitivo.  
Id tibi dulcedo faciens dulcedinis, idque  
Monstrat compago, compaginis. 2. Adjice virgo,  
Grando, fides, compes, teges, & seges, arbor, hyémsque.  
Sic bacchar, sindon, Gorgon, icon, & Amazon.  
3. Graecula in as vel in is finita; ut, Lampas, jaspis.  
5. His forfex, pellex, carex, simul atque supellex,  
Appendix, histrix, coxendix, adde filixque.  
6. Halcyon, & mulier, possunt hâc classe reponi.   

II.  
ESt neutrale genus signans rem non animatam,  
Nomen in a; ut, problema; en, ut omen; ar, ut jubar; ur dans,  
Vt jecur; us, ut onus; put, ut occiput. 2. Attamen ex his  
Mascula sunt pecten, furfur. 3. Sunt neutra cadaver,  
Verber, iter, suber, pro fungo tuber, & uber,  
Gingiber, & laser, cicer, & piper, atque papaver,  
Et siser, atque siler. 4. Neutra aequor, marmor, adórque.  
5. Atque pecus, quando pecoris facit in genitivo.   

III.  
SVnt dubii generis cardo, margo, cinis, obex,  
Pulvis, adeps, forceps, pumex, ramex, anas, imbrex,  
Adde culex, natrix, & onyx cum prole, siléxque,  
Quamvis haec meliùs vult mascula dicier usus.   

IV.  
COmmunis generis sunt ista, vigil, pugil, exsul,  
Praesul, homo, nemo, martyr, Ligur, augur, & Arcas,  
Antistes, miles, pedes, interpres, comes, hospes,  
Sic ales, praeses, princeps, auceps, eques, obses,  
2. Atque alia à verbis quae nomina multa creantur;  
Vt, conjux, judex, vindex, opifex, & aruspex.     

Cap. 10. De Generibus Adjectivorum.  
1. Adjectiv● unius vocis sunt omnis generis. Adjectiva gemivae vocis in prima sunt Commune dust●, in secunda Neutra●●. Adjectiva tr●um vocum, in prima sunt Masculini, in secunda foeminini, in tertia neutrius generis. 1. Adjectiva propè Substantiva. Adjectiva quaeper er & is 〈◊〉.  

I.  
ADjectiva unam duntaxat habentia vocem,  
Vt felix, audax, retinent genus omne sub una;   

II.  
Sub gemina si voce cadant, velut omnis, & omne;  
Vox commune duûm prior est, Vox altera neutrum.  
At si tres variant voces, sacer, ut sacra, sacrum;  
Vox prima est mas, altera foemina, tertia neutrum.   

1.  
At sunt quae flexu propè Substantiva vocares;  
Adjectiva tamen naturâ usúque reperta.  
Talia sunt pauper, puber, cum degener, uber,  
Et dives, locuples, sospes, comes, atque superstes;  
Cum paucis aliis quae lectio justa docebit.   

2.  
Haec proprium quendam sibi flexum adsciscere gaudent,  
Campester, volucer, celeber, celer, atque saluber:  
Junge pedester, equester, & acer, junge paluster.  
Ac alacer, sylvester: At haec tu sic variabis,  
Hic celer, hoc celeris, neutro hoc celere; aut aliter sic,  
Hic atque haec celeris, rursum hoc celere est tibi Neutrum.    

Cap. 11. De Declinatione primâ.  
Declinationes sunt quinque. Nomina Primae variantur ut Musa,  
DEclinatio est variatio dictionis per Casus.  
Sunt antem Declinationes nominum quinque.  
Dignoscitur nomen cujus sit Declinationis ex terminatione genitivi singularis; desinit enim  
genitivus 1 mae 2 dae 3 tiae 4 tae 5 tae in ae i is ûs ei  
Genitivus fit à Nominativo, (qui est prima vox) mutatâ terminatione; alii autem casus à Genitivo formantur.  
Vocativus singularis plerunque similis est Nominativo; pluralis semper.  
Nomina neutrius generis habent nominativum, accusativum, & vocativum similes in utroque numero; qui tres casus in plurali desinunt in a.  
Dativus, & Ablativus plurales semper sunt similes.  
Genitivus pluralis in complurimis Syncopen admittit.  
Prima Declinatio est nominum Latinorum (plerunque foemininorum) non crescentium in a; quae variantur sicut Musa.  
Primae Declinationis terminationes sunt Singulariter Nominativo casu a Ejus Exemplum sive Typus est Musa Genitivo ae Musae Dativo ae Musae Accusativo am Musam Vocativo a Musa Ablativo â Musâ Pluraliter Nominativo casu ae Musae Genitivo arum Musarum Dativo is Musis Accusativo as Musas Vocativo ae Musae Ablativo is Musis  
As in Genitivo reperiturad Graecorum imitationem; ut, Paterfamilias.  
Prisci dissolvebant ae in a●,; ut, aulai pro aulae.  
Filia, nata, dea, equa, cum paucis aliis Dativum & Ablativum pluralem mittunt in abus, ut distinguantur à suis Masculinis, Filius, natus, Deus, equus, quae sequuntur formam secundae Declinationis.  
Est etiam haec Detlinatio Graecorum Masculinorum in as, & es, & Foemininorum in a, & e.  
As, & a, Accusativum am & an faciunt; ut,  
Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. Voc. Ablat. Aeneas Aeneae Aeneae Aeneam, an Aenea Aeneâ Maia Maiae Maiae Maiam, an Maia Maiâ  
Graeca in plurali declinantur ut Latina.  
Es, in Accusativo en sumit, in Vocativo vel Ablativo e, vel a; ut,  
Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. Voc. & Ablat. Anchises Anchisae Anchisae Anchisen Anchise vel Anchisâ  
E, Genitivum in es mittit, Dativum in e, Accusativum in en, Vocativum & Ablativum in e; ut,  
Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. Voc. & Abl. Penelope Penelopes Penelope Penelopen Penelope  
Sunt qui huc addunt Hebraea quaedam in am, ut, Adam, Adae; quae tamen meliùs ad secundam Declinationem reducuntur, addendo us; ut, Adamus, Adami.   

Cap. 12. De secunda Declinatione.  
Secundae; ut● Magister, Dominus, Regnum  
SEcunda Declinatio est (plerunque) Masculinorum,  
in er ut Magister Neutrorum in um; ut, Regnum. us Dominus Terminationes hujus Declinationis sunt Singulariter Nom. r, us, um. Ejus Exempla sive Typi sunt Magister Dominus Regnum Gen. i. Magistri Domini Regni Dat. o. Magistro Domino Regno Acc. um. Magistrum Dominum Regnum Voc. r, e, um. Magister Domine Regnum Abl. o. Magistro Domino Regno Pluraliter Nom. i, a. Magistri Domini Regna Gen. orum. Magistrorum Dominorum Regnorum Dat. is. Magistris Dominis Regnis Acc. os, a. Magistros Dominos Regna Voc. i, a. Magistri Domini Regna Abl. is. Magistris Dominis Regnis  
Quando Nominativus exit in us, Vocativus exit in e; sed Deus format ô Deus, & Filius, ô fili.  
Propria Hominum in ius faciunt Vocativum in i; ut, Nom. Georgius, Voc. Georgi.  
Agnus, lucus, chorus, fluvius, formant Vocativum in e, & in us.  
Legimus plurali Dii Deorum Diis, Deos, Dii, Diis. Dei Deûm  
Nomina Graeca hujus Declinationis tres habent terminationes; viz. eus Masculini, os Masculini & Foeminini, & on Neutrius.  
Eus Genitivum ferunt in eï, vel eos, Dativum in eï Accusativum in ea, Vocativum in eu, Ablativum in eo.  
Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. Voc. Abl. Orpheus pheï, pheos Orpheï Orphea pheu pheo  
Os Accusativum in on mittit; ut, Nom. Delos, Gen. Deli ' Dat. Delo, Acc. Delos, Voc. Delt, Abl. Delo.  
Sed Attica in os, Genitivum in o mittunt; Androgeos, Androgeo, etc. Etcontracta in us formant Vocaivum in u; ut Oedipus, Oedipu.  
On formatur more aliorum Neutrorum; ut. Nom. Ilium, Gen. Ilii, Dat. Ilio, Acc. Ilium, Voc. Ilium, Abl. Ilio.   

Cap. 13. De tertia Decliatione.  
Tertiae, ut Lapis, aut Caput. Quae nomina formant Acc● in im. Im & em. Abl. ju ●. Nom pl. in ia. Es & eis. Gen. in ium. Abl. in i● & ●●●.  
TErtia Declinatio est admodum varia. continet enim omnia genera, & undecim (ad minimum) terminationes in Nominativo singulari: a, c, e, i, l, n, o, r, s, t, x.  
Terminationes hujus Declinationis sunt Singular. Nom. variae Ejus Exempla sive Typi sunt Lapis Caput Gen. is Lapidis Capitis Dat. i Lapidi Capiti Acc. em Lapidem Caput Voc. variae Lapis Caput Abl. e Lapide Capite Plural. Nom. es Lapidum Capita Gen. um Lapides Capitum Dat. ibus Lapidibus Capitibus Acc. es Lapides Capita Voc. es Lapides Capita Abl. ibus Lapidibus Capitibus  
Quorundam Accusativi flectuntut tantùm in im; ut, Vim, ravim, sitim, tussim, maguderim, Charybdim, & amussim. Quibus addas & Fluviorum nomina; ut, Ararim, Tybrim.  
Quaedam Accusativos flectunt in im, & em communiter; ut, Pelvis, turris, buris, puppis, torquis, securis, restis, febris, clavis, bipennis, aqualis, navis.  
Quorum Accusativus in im tantùm desinit, iis ablativus exit in i; Tussim, Abl. tussi.  
Mensium nomina in er, & is, Ablativum in i solùm mittunt; ut, September, Abl. bri; Aprilis, Abl. Aprili.  
Neutra desinentia in al, ar, & e, Ablativum magna ex parte mittunt in i;  
ut, Vectigal, Abl. li. Nam Rete in Ablativo, est à Retis. Calcar, Abl. ri. Rete, Abl. ti.  
Haec tamen in ar & e retinent e in Ablativo: Far, hepar, jubar, nectar, gausape, praesaepe, Soracte, Praeneste, Reate.  
Adjectiva, quae Nominativum communem in is vel er, & e Neutrum habent Ablativum mittunt in i; ut, Fortis, forti; acer, vel acris, acri.  
Quae Adjectivorum naturam induunt, majori exparte mittunt Ablativum in i; ut, Sodalis, li.  
Excipe propria; ut, Clemens, te.  
Nomina, quorum Accusativi per em & im finiunt, formant Ablativos in e & i; ut, Puppis, Acc. pem vel pim, Abl. pe vel pi.  
Par, quoque cum compositis, e & i habet. Comparativa etiam, ut melior, & reliqua Adjectiva, praeter ea quae suprà dicta sunt in er & is. Sed Pauper, degener, uber, sospes, hospes, in e tantùm faciunt Ablativum.  
Substantiva quaedam, ut, Ignis, amnis, anguis, supellex, vectis, unguis: Gentilia, ut, Arpinâs: et Verbalia in trix; ut, Victrix, Ablativum mittunt in e & i.  
Neutra, quorum Ablativus exit in i, vel in e & i, Nominativum pluralem mittunt in ia; ut, fortis, fortia; felix, felicia. Praeter Comparativa; ut, fortiora; Plus haber plura & pluria. Nonnulla Nominativum & Accusativum pluralem mittunt per es & eye diphthongum; ut, Omnes vel omneis. Eis autem aliquando contrahitur in is; ut, Sardis.  
Ex Ablativis in i tantùm, vel in e & i, fit pluraliter Genitivus in ium; ut, utili, utilium; puppi vel puppe, puppium. Praeter Comparativa; ut, meliorum, Item praeter ista; Supplicum, complicum, strigilum, artificum, veterum, vigilum Memorum, inopum, pugilum. At plus, plurium format.  
Quando Nominativi singulares duabus consonantibus finiuntur, genitivi plurales exeunt in ium; ut, Pars, partium.  
Excipe. Hyemum, principum, forcipum, municipum, inopum, caelibum, clientum, participum.  
Ubi in Nominativis & Genitivis singularibus reperiuntur pares syllabae, Genitivus pluralis exit in ium; ut, Collis, collium. His add; virium, salium, ditium, manium, penatium, litium.  
Excipe tamen vatum, juvenum, canum, opum, apum, panum.  
As format assium; mas, marium; vas-vadis, vadium; nox, noctium; nix, nivium; os, ossium; faux, faucium; mus, murium; caro, carnium; cor, cordium.  
Alice facit alituum, & coelites, coelituum, assumendo u.  
Boum à bos bovis, anomalum est, ut etiam bobus vel bubus, pro bovibus,  
Festorum nomina quae tantùm pluralia sunt, Genitivum aliquando in orum; ut, Agonalia, liorum: aliquando in ium; ut, Floralia, lium: aliquando tam in orum, quàm in ium mittunt; ut, Saturnalia, liorum, & lium.  
Neutra Graeca singularia in a, faciunt Dativum & Ablativum pluralem in is & ibus; ut, Problema, matibus, vel matis. Sic etianis Quinquatria, triis, vel tribus.  
Graeco fonte derivata quando juxta linguae suae morem variantur, haec exempla imitantur.  
Sing. Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. Voc. Abl. Horum nonnulla formant Genitivum pluralem in ων vel ium. Titan an anos ani ana an ane Arcas as ados adi ada as ade Phyllis is idos idi ida i ide Genesis is is, eos i im, in i i Opus us untos unti unta u unte Tethys ys yos yi yn y y Dido oh ûs o o o o Achilles es eos i ea e e   

Cap. 14. De quarta Declinatione.  
QUarta Declinatio duas tantùm sortitur terminationes in Recto singulari,  
Masculinorum & Foeminorum in us ut Manus: Neutrorum in u● Cornu. Terminationes hujus Declinationis sunt Singularly Nom. us, u. Ejus Exempla five Typi sunt Manus Cornu Gen. ûs, u. Manûs Cornu Dat. vi, u. Manui Cornu Acc. um, u. Manum Cornu Voc. us, u. Manus Cornu Abl. u, u. Manu Cornu Plural. Nom. us, va. Manus Cornua Gen. vum, Manuum Cornuum Dat. ibus. Manibus Cornibus Acc. us, va. Manus Cornua Voc. us, va. Manus Cornua Abl. ibus. Manibus Cornibus  
Olim Genitivus singularis exibat in i & üis, indè Veteres dixerunt fructi pro fructûs, & anüis pro anûs.  
Sacro-sanctum nomen Jesus habet in Accusativo Jesum, in reliquis verò casibus Jesus.  
Dativus interdum u habet; ut, fructu pro fructui.  
Haec Dativum & Ablativum pluralem in ubus formant; viz. Artus, arcus, tribus, acus, ficus, specus, quercus, lacus, partus, veru, genu. Caetera omnia in ibus.   

Cap. 15. De quinta Declinatione.  
Quintae, 〈…〉.  
QUinta Declinatio unicam habet terminationem in es; ut; Facies.  
Omnia nomina hujus Declinationis sunt foeminina; exceptis Dies, & meridies.  
Terminationes hujus Declinat. Singulariter Nom. es Eius Exemplum sive Typus est Facies Genitivus singularis olim etiam in es, two, & e, exibat, & Dativus aliquando in e. Gen. ei Faciei Dat. ei Faciei Acc. em Faciem Voc. es Facies Quaedam nomina tertiae Declinationis juxta hanc flectebantur; ut, Plebs, plebei. Abl. e Facie Pluraliter Nom. es Facies Haec Declinatio Genit. Dat. & Ablativum pluralem in nullis sortita est, praeter Res, species, facies, acies, dies, & meridies. Gen. erum Facierum Dat. ebus Faciebus Acc. es Facies Voc. es Facies Abl. ebus Faciebus   

Cap. 16. De flexione Adjectivorum.  
Adjectiva trium Terminationum vatiantur sicut Bonus. Adjectiva trium Arriculorum variantur ut, Felix, aut Tristis.  
ADjectiva flectuntur tribus Terminationibus, vel tribus Articulis.  
Adjectiva trium Terminationum variantur ad formam primae & secundae Declinationis, viz. r sicut Magister; us sicut Dominus; a sicut Musa; um sicut Regnum.  
Horum exemplum sive typus fit Singulariter Nom. Bonus Bona Bonum Gen. Boni Bonae Boni Dat. Bono Bonae Bono Acc. Bonum Bonam Bonum Voc. Bone Bona Bonum Abl. Bono Bonâ Bono Pluraliter Nom. Boni Bonae Bona Gen. Bonorum Bonarum Bonorum Dat. Bonis Bonis Bonis Acc. Bonos Bonas Bona Voc. Boni Bonae Bona Abl. Bonis Bonis Bonis  
Vnus, totus, solus, ullus, alter, uter, & eorum composita formant Genitivum in ïus, & Dativum in i: sic & alius, alia, aliud, Gen. alius, Dat. alii, etc.  
Ambo & duo sunt anomala, & formant neutrum genus per o: sic autem variantur.  
Pluraliter Nom. Ambo Ambae Ambo Gen. Amborum Ambarum Amborum Dat. Ambobus Ambabus Ambobus Acc. Ambos Ambas Ambo Voc. Ambo Ambae Ambo Abl. Ambobus Ambabus Ambobus  
Adjectiva unius vel duarum Terminationum sequuntur formam tertiae Declinationis, & flectuntur tribus Articulis.  
Horum Exempla sint Singul. Nom Hic, haec, & hoc, Felix. Singul. Nom. Hic, & haec, Tristis, & hoc, Triste. Gen. Hujus, Felicis. Gen. Hujus, Tristis. Dat. Huic, Felici. Dat. Huic, Tristi. Acc. Hunc, & hanc, Felicem, & hoc, Felix, Acc. Hunc, & hanc Tristem, & hoc Triste. Voc. Felix. Voc. Tristis, & Triste. Abl, Hoc, hac, & hoc, Felice, vel Felici. Abl. Hoc, hac, & hoc, Tristi Plural. Nom. Hi, & hae, Felices, & haec, Felicia. Plural. Nom. Hi, & hae, Tristes, & haec Tristia. Gen. Horum, harum, & horum, Felicium. Gen. Horum, harum, & horum, Tristium. Dat. His, Felicibus Dat. His, Tristibus. Acc. Hos, & has, Felices, & haec. Felicia. Acc. Hos, & has, Tristes, & haec, Tristia. Voc. Felices, & Felicia. Voc. Tristes, & Tristia. Abl. Felicibus. Abl. His, Tristibus.  
Nomina Composita à duobus rectis declinantur in utrisque; ut, Res-publica, Rei-publicae; jus-jurandum, juris-jurandi  
Composita verò à recto & obliquo, declinantur tantùm ex parte recti; ut, Pater-familiâs, patris-familiâs.   

Cap. 17. De Comparatione.  
Comparatjonis Gradus sunt tres. Positivus. Comparativus Superlativus. Quo'undam verò Comparatio est Irregularis. Inufitatior. Defectival Abusiva.  
COmparantur nomina, quorum significatio augeri, minuive potest.  
Comparatio est variatio dictionis per Gradus.  
Gradus Comparationis sunt tres, Positivus. Comparativus. Superlativus.  
Positivus Gradus est prima vox quae rem simpliciter, & sine excessu significat; ut, Tristis, durus.  
Comparativus Positivi significationem per magis auget; ut, Tristior, durior.  
Superlativus supra Positivum cum Adverbio valdè vel maximè significat; ut, Tristissimus, durissimus.  
Comparativus fit regulariter à primo Positivi casu in i, addendo or, & us; ut, à Tristi fit tristior, & tristius; à Duri, durior, & durius. Superlativus ssimus; ut, à Tristi, fit tristissimus; à Duri, durissimus.  
Positiva in r, formant Superlativum assumendo rimus; ut, Pulcer, pulcerrimus.  
Excipiuntur autem Dexter, dexterior, dextimus; & sinister, sinisterior, sinistimus, prout antiqui formabant.  
Sex ista in lis formant Superlativum mutando lis in limus; viz. Docilis, docillimus; agilis, agillimus; gracilis, gracillimus; humilis, humillimus; similis, simillimus; facilis, facillimus.  
Quae derivantur à dico, loquor, volo, facio, comparantur tanquam à Positivis in ens; ut,  
Maledicus, Maledicentior, Maledicentissimus.  
Magniloquus, Magniloquentior, Magniloquentissimus.  
Benevolus, Benevolentior, Benevolentissimus.  
Magnificus, Magnificentior, Magnificentissimus.  
Si vocalis praecedit us finale, fit gradus Comparativus per magis, & Superlativus per maximè; ut, Pius, magis Pius, maximè Pius.  
Haec etiam à Regula Generali praecedente excipiuntur.  
Bonus, melior, optimus. Malus, pejor, pessimus. Magnus, major, maximus. Parvus, minor, minimus. Multus plurimus, multa plurima, multum plus plurimum. Vetus, veterior, veterrimus. Maturus, maturior, maturimus, & maturissimus.  Nequam, nequior, nequissimus.  
Et istiusmodi multa, quorum Positivi ab Adverbiis & Praepositionibus derivantur; ut,  Citer, citerior, eitimus, à Citra. 
Exterus, exterior, extimus, ab Extra. extremus, Inferus, inferior, infimus, ab Infra. Posterus, posterior, postremus, à post. Superus, superior, supremus à Supra. summus  
Quibus addi solent, Vltra, ulterior, ultimus. Propè, propior, proximus. Pridem, prior, primus; & Diu, diutior, diurissimus.  
Haec in legendis autoribus rarò occurrunt, rarò igitur sunt usurpanda, viz. Assiduior, strenuior: egregiissimus, mirificissimus, pientissimus, vel piissimus, ipsissimus, perpetuissimus, tuissimus, exiguissimus, multissimus, proximior.  
Quaedam carent Positivo, Ocyor, ocyssimus; Potior, potissimus; Deterior, deterrimus; Penitior, penitissimus.  
Quaedam carent Comparativo; Novus, novissimus; Inclytus, inclytissimus; Invitus, invitissimus, Meritus, meritissimus; Sacer, sacerrimus; Falsus, falsissimus; Fidus, fidissimus; Nuper, nuperus, nuperrimus; Diversus, diversissimus.  
Quaedam carent Superlativo; ut, Opimus, opimior; Juvenis, junior; Senex, senior; Declivis, declivior; Longinquus, ginquior; salutaris, salutarior; supinus, supinior; adolescens, adolescentior; ingens, ingentior; satur, saturior; antè, anterior; infinitus, infinitior; taciturnus, taciturnior; communis, communior.  
Licentior est solus Comparativus.  
Interdum etiam à Substantivis fit Comparatio, sed abusiuè; ut, Nero, Neronior; Poenus, Poenior.   

Quae Genus: SIVE ROB. ROBINSONI Regulae de Heteroclitis, seu Anomalis.  

Cap. 18. De Heteroclitis variantibus.  
Heteroclits sunt Vatint  
1. QVae genus aut flexum variant, 2. quaecunque novato Ritu deficiunt, 3. superántve, Heteroclita sunto.  
Haec genus ac partim flexum variantia cornis,  
1. Pergamus infelix urbs Troum Pergamon gignit;  
Quod nisi plurali careat facit ipsa supellex;  
Singula foemineis, neutris pluralia gaudent.  
2. Dat prior his numerus neutrum genus, alter utrunque;  
Rastrum, cum fraeno, filum, simul atque capistrum.  
3. Argos item & coelum sunt singula neutra: sed audi,  
Mascula duntaxat coelos vocitabis & Argos.  
4. Nundinum, & hinc epulum, quibus addito balneum, & haec sunt  
Neutra quidem primo, muliebria ritè secundo.  
Balnea plurali Juvenalem constat habere.  
5. Haec maribus dantur singularia, plurima neutris;  
Maenalus, atque sacer mons Dindymus, Ismarus, atque  
Tartara, Taygetus, sic Taenara, Massica, & altus  
Gargarus. 6. At numerus genus his dabit alter utrunque;  
Sibilus, atque jocus, locus, & Campanus Ayernus.   

Cap. 19 De Heteroclitis defectivis Casu.  
2. Defectiva Casus.  
2. QVae sequitur manca est Numero, Casúve propago:  
1. Quae nullum variant casum; ut, fas, nîl, nihil, instar; Multa & in u simul i, ut sunt haec cornú que, genú que; Sic gummi, frugi; sic Tempe, tot, quot, & omnes A tribus ad centum numeros Aptota vocabis.  
2. Estque Monoptoton nomen, cui vox cadit una; Ceu noctu, natu, jussu, injussu, simul astu, Promtu, permissu, plurali legimus astus, Legimus inficias, sed vox ea sola reperta est.  
2. Sunt Diptota, quibus duplex flexura remansit, Vt, fors, forte dabit sexto; spontis quoque sponte; Sic plus, pluris habet; repetundarum, repetundis; Jugeris, & sexto dat jugere; verberis autem Verbere; suppetiae quarto quoque suppetias dant. Tantundem, dat tantidem, simul impetis hoc dat Impete; junge vicem sexto vice: nec lego plura Verberis, atque vicem, sic plus, cum jugere, cunctos Quatuor haec numero casus tenuere secundo.  
3. Tres quibus inflectis casus Triptota vocantur, Vt, precis, atque precem, petit & prece blandus amicam, Sic opis est nostrae fer opem legis, atque ope dignus. Integra vox vis est, nisi desit fortè Dativus; Omnibus his mutilus numerus prior, integer alter.  
5. Quae referunt, ut, qui; quae percontantur, ut, ecquis? Et quae distribuunt; ut, nullus, neuter, & omnis.  
Infinita solent his jungi, ut, quilibet, alter; Quinto haec saepe carent casu; & Pronomina praeter Quatuor haec infrà, noster, nostras, meus, & tu.   

Cap. 20. De Heteroclitis defectivis Numero.  
Defectiva numero. singulars 〈…〉  

1.  
PRopria cuncta notes, quibus est natura coërcens,  
Plurima nè fuerint, ut, Mars, Cato, Gallia, Roma,  
Ida, Tagus, Laelaps, Parnassus, Bucephalúsque.  
His frumenta dabis, pensa, herbas, uda, metalla;  
In quibus Autorum quae sint placita ipse requiras;  
Est ubi pluralem retinent haec, est ubi spernunt.   

2.  
Hordea, farra, forum, mel, mulsum, defruta, thúsque,  
Tres tantùm similes voces pluralia servant.   

3.  
Hesperus, & vesper, pontus, limúsque, fimúsque,  
Sic pecus, & sanguis, sic aether, nemo; sed ista  
Mascula sunt numerum vix excedentia primum.  
Nemo caret genito, quinto, numeróque secundo.   

4.  
Singula foeminei generis, pluralia rarò;  
Pubes, atque salus, sic talio cum indole, tussis,  
Pix, humus, atque lues, sitis, & fuga, junge quiétem,  
Sic cholera, atque fames, bilisque senecta, juventus:  
Sed tamen haec soboles, labes, ut & omnia quintae,  
Tres similes casus plurali saepe tenebunt:  
Excipe res, species, facies, aciésque diésque,  
Quas voces numero totas licet esse secundo,  
Istis multa solent muliebria nectere ut haec sunt;  
Stultitia, invidia, sapientia, desidia, atque  
Id genus innumerae voces, quas lectio praebet.  
Rariùs his numerum, quandoque sed, adde secundum.   

5.  
Nec licet his Neutris numerum deferre secundum;  
Delicium, senium, lethum, coenúmque salúmque;  
Sic barathrum, virus, vitrum, viscúmque penúmque:  
Adde gelu, solium, jubar. Hic quoque talia ponas,  
Quae tibi, si observes, occurrent multa legenti.   

6.  
Mascula sunt numero tantùm contenta secundo;  
Manes, majóres, cancelli, liberi, & antes;  
Menses [profluvium,] lemures, fasti, atque minores.  
Cùm genus assignant, natales: adde penates.  
Et loca plurali, quales Gablique, Locrique,  
Et quaecunque legas passim similis rationis.   

7.  
Hac sunt Foeminei generis, numerique secundi;  
Exuviae, phalerae, gratésque, manubiae, & idus,  
Antiae, & induciae, simul insidiaeque, minaeque,  
Excubiae, nonae, nugae, tricaeque, calendae,  
Quisquiliae, thermae, cunae, dirae, exequiaeque,  
Inferiae, & feriae, sic primitiaeque plagaeque  
Retia signantes, & valvae, divitiaeque,  
Nuptiae item & lactes. Addantur Thebae, & Athenae;  
Quod genus invenias, & nomina plura locorum.   

8.  
Rariùs haec primo plurali neutra leguntur;  
Moenia, cum tesquis, praecordia, lustra ferarum,  
Arma, mapalia, sic bellaria, munia, castra,  
Funus justa petit, petit & sponsalia virgo,  
Rostra disertus amat, puerique crepundia gestant;  
Infantésque colunt cunabula, consulit exta  
Augur, & absolvens superis effata recantat.  
Festa Deûm poterunt, ceu Bacchanalia, jungi.  
Quòd si plura leges, licet hâc quoque classe reponas.    

Cap. 21. De Heteroclitis Redundantibus.  
3. Redundantia.  

1.  
HAec quasi luxuriant varias imitantia form as:  
Nam genus & vocem variant, tonitrus, tonitrú que;  
Sic clypeus, clypeum; baculus, baculum, atque bacillum,  
Sensus, & hoc sensum; tignus, tignúm que; tapétum,  
Atque tapéte, tapes; punctus, punctúm que; sinapi,  
Quod genus immutans fertur scelerata sinapis;  
Sinus, & hoc sinum; [vas lactis,] mendá que mendum;  
Viscus, & hoc viscum; sic cornu & flexile cornum;  
At Lucanus aït cornûs tibi cura finistri.  
Eventus, simul eventum; Sed quid moror istis?  
Talia doctorum tibi lectio mille ministrat.   

2.  
Sed tibi praeterea quaedam sunt Graeca notanda,  
Quae quarto casu foetum peperêre Latinum:  
Nam panther panthera creat, craterá que crater,  
Cassida cassis habet, sed & aether aethera fundit.  
Hinc cratera venit, venit aethera; sic caput ipsum  
Cassida magna tegit, nec vult panthera domari.   

3.  
Vertitur his rectus, sensus manet & genus 〈◊〉;  
Gibbus, & hic gibber; cucumis, cucumer; stipis, & stips;  
Sic cinis, atque ciner; vomis, vomer; scobis & scobs;  
Pulvis, item pulver; pubes, puber; quibus addes  
Quae pariunt or & os; honour, & labor, arbor, odór que.  
His & apes, & apis, plebs, plebis. Sunt quoque multa  
Accepta à Graecis geminam referentia formam;  
Vt, delphin, delphinus, & hic elephas, elephantus,  
Sic congrus, conger, Meleagrus, sic Meleager;  
Teucrus, item Teucer. Dabis huc & caetera cuncta,  
Quae tibi par ratio dederint & lectio casta.   

4.  
Haec simul & quarti flexûs simul atque secundi;  
Laurus enim lauri facit, & laurûs genitivo;  
Sic quercus, pinus, pro fructu ac arbore ficus,  
Sic colus, atque penus, cornus quando arbor habetur;  
Sic lacus atque domus, licèt haec nec ubique recurrant.  
His quoque plura leges, quae priscis jure relinquas.  
Tolle me, mu, mi, mis, si declinare domum vis.   

5.  
Et quae luxuriant sunt, Adjectiva notanda  
Multa, sedimprimis quot & haec tibi nomina fundunt,  
Arma, jugum, nervus, somnus, cliuúsque, animúsque,  
Et quot limus habet, quot fraenum, & cera, bacillum;  
A quibus us, simul is formes, ut, inermus, inermis.  
Rarior est hilarus, vox est hilaris bene nota.    

Cap. 22. De Speciebus Nominum.  
Nomina sunt 1. Primitiva. 2. Derivativa.  
1. NOmina Primitiva sunt haec quae sequuntur, & hujusmodi, viz.  
1. Collectivum, quod singulari numero multitudinem significat; ut, Turba, grex.  
2. Fictitium, quod à sono fingitur; ut, Sibilus, tintinnabulum.  
3. Interrogativum, quo in interrogando utimur; ut, Quot? qualis?  
4. Redditivum, quod Interrogativo responsum reddit; ut Tota, talis.  
Atque haec duo migrant aliquando in Indefinita, quae certam rem non definiunt. Relativa, quae ad vocem praecedentem referuntur; ut, Talis erat, qualem nunquam vidi.  
5. Numerale, quod numerum aliquo modo signicat, cujus etiam species multae sunt, viz.  
1. Cardinale, à quo alia numeralia dimanant; ut, Vnus, duo.  
2. Ordinale, quod ordinem denotat; ut, Primus, secundus.  
3. Distributivum, quod totum in partes distribuit; ut, Singuli, bini.  
4. Partitivum, quod significat vel multa singulatim; ut, Quisque, uterque; vel unum è multis; ut, Alter, aliquis.  
5. Vniversále, quod universaliter rem significat; ut, Omnis, nullus.  
6. Particuláre, quod partem universalis significat; ut, Quidam, aliquis.  
7. Multiplicativum, quod multiplicitatem rei significat; ut, Simplex, duplex.  
8. Proportionále, quod proportionem significat; ut, Simplum, duplum.  
9 Temporále, quod tempus significat; ut, Binus, trinus; & Biennis, triennis.  
10. Ponderále, quod pondus significat; ut, Ternari, us, centenarius.  
II. Derivativa, etiam sunt multiplicia, quorum hae sunt praecipuae species.  
1. Verbále, quod à Verbo derivatur; ut, Lectio, flexilis.  
2. Patrium, quod patriam significat; ut, Londinensis.  
3. Gentile, quod gentem, partes, aut sectam significat; ut, Graecus, Ciceroniánus, Christiánus.  
4. Patronymicum, quod vel à patre, vel ab alia quâpiam suae familiae personâ derivatur; ut, Aeácides.  
5. Desinunt autem Patronymica vel in des, ut Latoïdes Masculina. ion, japétion as, ut Ilias, Foeminina. is, Meneláis, ne, Nerine,  
6. Diminutivum, quod significationem sui Primitivi minuit; ut, Stultulus, lapillulus.  
7. Possessivum, quod possessionem significat; ut, Regius, paternus.  
8. Denominativum, quod ab alio solâ terminatione differt; ut, Justitia, à justus.  
9 Materiale, quod materiam significat; ut, Aureus.  
10. Locale, quod locum denotat; ut, Hortensis, agrestis.  
11. Participiale, quod à Participio fit; ut, Sapiens.  
12. Adverbiale, quod ab Adverbio derivatur; ut, Crastinus, à cras. Diligenter autem hic observandum, quòd,  
1. Omnes voces habeantur pro Primitivis in Latina linguâ, quorum origo in eadem vel ignota vel incerta est; imò, licèt ab alia linguâ dimanent; ut, Ego, musa.  
2. Nè ridiculus sis in investigandis dictionum originibus, diligenter observes terminationes quae Primitivis accedunt; ut, ab Amo, fit amator, amicus, amabilis, etc.    

Cap. 23. De Pronomine.  
Pronomen pro Nomin● ponitur. Sunt autem Pronomina quindecits Quorum alia Primitiva. Et alia Derivativa sunt, Pronomina quatuor habent Declinationes. Primae sunt Ego, tu, sus. Secundae, Ille, ipse, i●te. Hic, is. Terriae, Meus, Tuus, Suus, Noster, Vester, & Cujus. Quartae, Nostras, vestras, o●jas.  
PRonomen est pars Orationis pro Nomine posita, & vicem ejus supplens.  
Pronomina sunt quindecim; Ego, tu, suî, ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, nostras, vestras.  
Quibus addi possint, Qui, quis, cujus, & cujas.  
Horum autem alia dicuntur Substantiva, viz. Ego, tu, suî, quae ad tria genera referuntur sine variatione. Adjectiva, viz. omnia reliqua quae per tria genera variantur; ut, Meus, mea, meum. Secundùm Speciem suam dicuntur 1. Primitiva, quae sunt primae voces, viz. Ego, tu, suî, ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, & qui. Atquae haec vocantur Demonstrativa, quae in re aliqua non priùs demonstranda usurpantur; ut, Ego, tu, suî, ille, ipse, hic, is. Relativa, quibus in repetenda re aliquâ priùs dictâ utimur; ut; Ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, & qui. 2. Derivativa, quae derivantur à suis Primitivis; ut, Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, nostras, vestras, quis, cujus, & cujas.  
Ex his etiam alia sunt  
Possessiva, quae possessionem significant; ut, Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester.  
Gentilia, quae gentem aut nationem, vel partes & sectas significant; ut, Nostras, vestras, & cujas, quae proferebant ur olim ut nomina in átis, & áte.  
Finita, quae definiunt certam personam; ut, Ego, tu.  
Indefinita, quae certam personam non definiunt; ut, Quis, cujus.  
Reciproca, quae recipiunt se ad eandem tertiam personam quae praecessit; ut, Suî, suus.  
Petrus rogat nè se deseras. Parcit quisque erroribus suis.  
Trahit sua quemque voluptas, i. e. Quisque trahitur à voluptate suâ.  
Declinationes Pronominum sunt quatuor.  
Genitivus Singularis primae Declinationis exit in i, Secundae in ius, vel jus, Tertiae in i, ae, i, Quartae in atis.  
Ego, tu, suî, primae sunt Declinationis, & sic varianur.  
Singular. Nom. Ego Plural. Nom. Nos Gen. Meî Gen. Nostrûm, vel Nostrî Dat. Mihi Dat. Nobis Acc. Me Acc. Nos Voc.  Voc.  Abl, à Me Abl. Nobis Singul. Nom. Tu Plural. Nom. Vos Gen. Tuî Gen. Vestrûm, vel vestrî Dat. Tibi Dat. Vobis Acc. Te Acc. Vos Voc. Tu Voc. Vos Abl. à Te Abl. Vobis Sing. & Plur. Gen. Suî Caret autem Nominativo & Vocativo utriusque numeri. Dat. Sibi Acc. Se Abl. Se  
Ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, qui, & quis, secundae sunt Declinationis & sic variantur.  
Singulariter Nom. Iste, ista, istud. Pluraliter Nom. Isti, istae, ista. Gen. Istius. Gen. Istorum, istarum, istorum. Dat. Isti. Dat. Istis. Acc. Istum, istam, istud. Acc. Istos, istas, ista— Voc.  Voc.  Abl. Isto, ista, isto. Abl. Istis.  
Ille, & ipse variantur sicut iste, nisi quòd ipse in Neutro genere in Nominativo & Accusativo singulari facit ipsum.  
Hic declinatur ut priùs in Articulis dictum est, pag. 7.  
Singulariter Nom. Is, ea, id. Pluraliter Nom. Two, eae, ea. Gen. Ejus: Gen. Eorum, earum, eorum. Dat. Ei. Dat. jis, vel eis. Acc. Eum, eam, id. Acc. Eos, eas, ea. Voc.  Voc.  Abl. Eo, eâ, eo. Abl. jis, vel eis. Sic variatur etiam compositum ab is & demum: Sing. Nom. Idem, eadem, idem. Gen. Ejusdem. Dat. Eidem. Acc. Eundem, eandem, idem. Singulariter Nom. Qui, quae, quod.  Pluraliter Nom. Qui, quae, quae. Gen. Cujus.  Gen. Quorum, quarum, quorum. Dat. Cui.  Dat. Quibus, vel queis. Acc. Quem, quam, quod.  Acc. Quos, quas, quae. Voc.   Voc.  Abl. Quo, quâ, quo. Abl. Quibus. Quî, Queis.  
Ad hunc modum etiam variatur Quis, quae, quid, etc.  
Ejus compositum sic: Nom. Quisquis, quicquid. Acc. Quicquid. Abl. Quoquo, quaquâ, quoquo.  
Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, & cujus, tertiae sunt Declinationis, & variantur ad formam Adjectivorum trium Terminationum in hunc modum.  
Nominativo Meus, mea, meum. Genitivo Mei, meae, mei. Et sic in reliquis casibus. Tuus, tua, tuum. Tui, tuae, tui. Suus, sua, suum. Sui, suae, sui. Noster, nostra, nostrum. Nostri, nostrae, nostri, Vester, vestra, vestrum. Vestri, vestrae, vestri. Cujus, cuja, cujum.   
Sed Meus habet Mi, mea, meum, in Vocativo singulari.  
Nostras, vestras, & cujas, quartae sunt Declinationis, & variantur ad formam Adjectivorum trium Articulorum.  
Ut, Nom. Nostras, Gen. Nostratis. etc. Vestras, Vestratis. Cujas, Cujatis  
Pronomina Componuntur,  
1. Inter se; ut, Ego-ipse, meî-ipsius, mihi-ipsi. istic, & illic.  
Istic & illic sic variantur, Nom. Istic, istaec, istoc, vel istuc. Acc. Istinc, istanc, istoc vel istuc. Abl. Istoc, istac, istoc.  
Plur. Nom. & Acc. Istaec.  
2. Cum Nominibus; ut, Aliquis, hujusmodi.  
3. Cum Verbis; ut, Quivis, quilibet.  
4. Cum Adverbiis; ut, Nequis.  
Sic etiam Eccum, eccam, ab ecce & is Ellum, Ellam, Eccos, Eccas, Ellos, Ellas, ab ecce & ille.  
5. Cum Conjunctione; ut, Quisnam, siquis.  
6. Cum praepositione; ut, Mecum, nobiscum.  
7. Cum syllabicis adjectionibus, met, te, pte, ce, cine, quarum met adjicitur primae & secundae personae; ut, Egomet, tuimet, sibimet, etiam & semet dicimus. Sed tumet non dicimus, nè videatur esse Verbum à tumeo.  
Te adjicitur tantùm tu & te; ut, Tute, tete.  
Pte apponitur istis Ablativis foemininis, Meâ, tuâ, suâ, nostrâ, vestrâ; ut, Meâpte, tuâpte, suâpte, nostrâpte, vestrâpte, & interdum eorundem masculinis & neutris; ut, Meópte labore. suópte jumento.  
Ce adjiciur obliquis horum Pronominum, Hic, ille iste, quoties in s desinunt; ut, Hujusce, hosce, hisce. Dicimus etiam hicce, huncce, & ejusce, & interdum hice legitur.  
Cine apponitur casibus in c desinentibus; ut, Hiccine, haeccine, hoccine; Hunccine hanccine, hoccine, etc.  
Quis, & qui in hunc modum componuntur.  
Quis in compositione hisce particulis postponitur, viz.  
En, ut Ecquis. Ne, Nequis. Alius, Aliquis. Num, Nunquis. Si, Siquis.  
Et haec tam in foeminino singulari, quàm in neutro plurali, qua habent, non quae; ut, Siqua mulier. Nequa flagitia. Sed Ecquis habet ecquae & ecqua in foeminino.  
His autem particulis praeponitur Quis in compositione, viz.  
Nam, ut Quisnam Et haec ubique quae retinent; ut, Quaenam doctrina; quaecunque negotia. Piam, Quispiam. Putas, Quisputas. Quam, Quisquam. Que, Quisque.  
Qui in compositione praeponitur his particulis, viz.  
Dam, ut Quidam Vis, Quivis. Libet, Quilibet. Cunque, Quicunque.   

Cap. 24. De Verbo, & ejus Accidentibus.  
III. Verbum esse agere aut pati significat. Estque Personale, Vel Impersonale. Accidunt Verboquinque genera. Activum. Passivum. Neutrum. Deponens. Commune. Modi quatuor. Indicativus. Imperativus. Subjunctivus. Infinitivus. Ad quem pertinent, Gerundia Di, do, dum. Supina, Um, & u. Tempora quinque. Praesens. Imperfectum. Perfectum. Plusquam perfectum. Futurum. Conjugationes quaturo. Prima habet a longum. Secunda e longum. Tertia e breve. Quarta ● longum ante re & ris.  
VERBUM est pars Orationis, quae esse aliquid, ageréve, aut pati significat; ut, Sum, Amorett, Amor.  
Verrbum dividitur inprimis in Personale, quod tribus personis in utroque numero distinguitur; ut, Singulariter Amo, Amas, Amat; Plur. Amamus, Amatis, Amant. Impersonale, quod nullius personae aut numeri certam significationem, nisi ex adjuncto casu obliquo, sortitur; ut, Oportet me, oportet te; Statur à me, statur à te.  
Verbo quidem accidunt, I. Genus. II. Modus. III. Tempus. IV. Conjugatio ..  
I. Quinque sunt Genera Verborum.  
1. Activum, quod agere significat, & in o finitur; ut, Amo: assumto verò r Passivum formare potest; ut, Amor.  
2. Passivum, quod pati significat, & in or finitur, demto verò r Activi formam resumere potest; ut, Amor.  
3. Neutrum, quod in o vel m finitum, nec admittit r ut fiat Passivum; u, Curro, Sum.  
Neutrorum tria sunt genera, secundùm eorum significationem.  
Substantivum, quod subsistentiam rei significat; ut, Sum.  
Absolutum, quod ipse sensum absolvit; ut, Dormio.  
Transitivum, cujus actio in rem cognatae significatienis transit; ut, Curro stadium.  
4. Deponens, quod in or finitum, vel Activi significationem habet; ut, Loquor verbum; vel neutrius; ut, Glorior.  
5. Commune, quod in or finitum, tam Activam, quàm Passivam significationem habet; ut, Osculor.  
II. Modi Verborum sunt quatuor:  
1. Indicativus simpliciter aliquid indicat, aut interrogat; ut, Ego amo. Amas tu?  
2. Imperativus imperat aut rogat; ut, Ama tu. Da mihi.  
3. Subjunctivus subjungitur alteri Verbo in eâdem sententiâ; ut, Cùm amarem, eram miser.  
Atque hic Modus dicitur Optativus, quando in optando usurpatur; Potentialis verò quando per possum, volo,, aut debeo exponitur.  
4. Infinitivus, certam personam, aut numerum non definit; ut, Amare. Et ad hunc Modum pertinent Tria Gerundia, quae à Nomine casum, à Verbo significationem accipiunt.  
Di, ut Amandi. Do, Amando. Dum, Amandum. Duo Supina quorum Prius exit in um, & Actiuè significat; ut, Amatum. Posterius exit in u, & Passiuè significat; ut, Amatu.  
III. Tempora Verborum sunt quinque.  
1. Praesens, quod de tempore praesenti loquitur, & aliquid nunc agere vel fieri significat; ut, Amo.  
2. Praeteritum imperfectum, de tempore nondum perfectè praeterito loquitur, & aliquid fieri, sed nondum absolvi significat; ut, Amabam.  
3. Praeteritum perfectum de tempore perfectè praeterito loquitur, & aliquid jam perfici significat; ut, Amavi.  
4. Praeteritum plusquam perfectum de tempore plus quàm perfecto loquitur, & aliquid jamdiu perfectum significat; ut, Amaveram.  
5. Futurum loquitur de tempore futuro, & aliquid de futuro significat; ut, Amabo.  
Subjunctivi Futurum dicitur Exactum, quòd praeteriti simul & futuri significationem habeat; ut, Cùm Amavero.  
IV. Conjugatio est variatio Verbi per Modos & Tempora.  
Verborum quatuor sunt Conjugationes, quae à se invicem certis indicibus, sive literis characteristicis distinguuntur.  
1. Prima Conjugatio habet a productum ante re & ris; ut, Amáre, amáris.  2, Secunda Conjugatio habet e productum ante re & ris; ut, Docére, docéris. In Infinitivo praesenti Verborum in o. 3. Tertia Conjugatio habet e correptum ante re & ris; ut, Légĕre, légĕris. Et in secunda persona singularis Indicativi praesentis Verborum in or. 4. Quarta Conjugatio habet i productum ante re & ris; ut, Audire, audiris.    

As in Praesenti: SIVE GUILIELMI LILII Regulae de Praeteritis & Supinis Verborum.  

Cap. 31. De Praeteritis Verborum Simplicium.  
Regulae de Praeteritis Verborum Simplicium. 1. In prima Conjugatione as format avi. 2. In Secunda es format ui. In Tertia, Bo fit bi. Co, ci, Do, di. Go, xi. Ho, xi. Lo, ui. Mo, ui. No, vi. Pso, psi. Quo, qui. Ro, vi. So, sivi. Sco, vi. To, ti. Ecto, exi. Vo, vi, Xo, xui. Cio, ci, Dio, di. Gio, gi. Pio, pi. Rio, ri. Tio, ssi. Uo, ui. In Quarta is format ivi.  

I.  
AS in praesenti perfectum format in avi;  
Vt no nas navi, vocito vocitas vocitavi.  
1. Demetrius lavo lavi, juvo juvi, nexóque nexui;  
Et seco quod secui, neco quod necui, mico verbum  
Quod micui, plico quod plicui, frico quod fricui dat:  
Sic domo quod domui, tono quod tonui, sono verbum  
Quod sonui, crepo quod crepui, veto quod vetui dat:  
Atque cubo cubui: rarò haec formantur in avi,  
2. Do das ritè dedi, sto stas formare steti vult.   

II.  
ES in praesenti perfectum format ui dans,  
Vt nigreo nigres nigrui: 1. jubeo excipe jussi,  
Sorbeo sorbui habet sorpsi quoque, mulceo mulsi;  
Luceo vult luxi, sedeo sedi, videóque  
Vult vidi; sed prandeo prandi, strideo stridi,  
Suadeo suasi, rideo risi, habet ardeo & arsi.   

2.  
Quatuor his infrà geminatur syllaba prima;  
Pendeo namque pependi, mordeo uúltque momordi,  
Spondeo, habere spospondi; tondeo, uúltqúe totondi,   

3.  
L vel r ante geo si stet, geo vertitur in si.  
Urgeo, ut ursi; mulgeo, mulsi, dat quoque mulxi;  
Frigeo, frixi; lugeo, luxi; habet augeo, & auxi.   

4.  
Dat Fleo, flex, flevi; leo, les, levi; indéque natum  
Deleo, delevi; pleo, ples, plevi. 5. Neo, nevi;  
A maneo, mansi, formatur. 6. Torqueo, torsi.   

7.  
Haereo, vult haesi. 8. Veo fit vi, ut Ferveo, fervi.  
Niveo, & indè satum poscit conniveo, nivi  
Et nixi; cieo, civi; vieó que vievi.   

TErtia Praeteritum formabit, ut hic manifestum.  
Bo fit bi; ut, Lambo, lambi. 1. Scribo, excipe scripsi;  
Et nubo, nupsi; antiquum cumbo, cubui, dat.   

Co fit ci; ut, Vinco, vici; vult parco, peperci,  
Et parsi; dico, dixi; duco quoque duxi.   

Do fit di; ut, mando, mandi: sed scindo, scidi, dat;  
Findo, fidi; fundo, fudi; tundo, tutudi que;  
Pendo, pependi; tendo, tetendi; pedo, pepédi;  
junge cado, cecĭdi; pro verbero caedo, cecidi;  
Cedo pro discedere, sive locum dare cessi.  
Vado, rado, laedo, ludo, divido, trudo,  
Claudo, plaudo, rodo, ex do, semper faciunt si.   

Go fit xi; ut, jungo, junxi; sed r aute go vult si;  
Vt, spargo, sparsi; lego, legi; & ago facit egi:  
Dat tango tetigi, pungo punxi pupugique;  
Dat frango fregi, cùm signat pango pacisci  
Vult pepigi, pro jungo pegi, pro cano panxi.   
Ho fit xi, traho ceu traxi, docet & veho vexi.  

Lo fit ui, colo ceu colui: psallo excipe cum p  
Et sallo sine p, nam salli format utrunque;  
Dat vello velli vulsi quoque, fallo fefelli;  
Cello pro frango ceculi; pello pepulique.   

Mo fit ui, vomo ceu vomui: sed emo facit emi,  
Como petit compsi, promo prompsi, adjice demo  
Quod format dempsi, sumo sumpsi, premo pressi.   

No fit vi, sino ceu sivi, temno excipe tempsi,  
Dat sterno stravi, sperno sprevi, lino levi,  
Interdum lini & livi; cerno quoque crevi:  
Gigno, pono, cano, genui, posui, cecini, dant.   

Po fit psi, ut scalpo scalpsi, rumpo excipe rupi,  
Et strepo quod format strepui, crepo quod crepui dat.   

Quo fit qui, ut linquo liqui, coquo demito coxi.   

Ro fit vi, sero ceu pro planto & semino sevi,  
Quod serui meliùs dat mutans significatum.  
Vult verro verri & versi, uro ussi, gero gessi,  
Quaero quaesivi, tero trivi, curro cucurri.   

So, velut accerso, arcesso, incesso, atque lacesso,  
Formabit sivi: sed tolle capesso capessi,  
Quódque capessivi facit, atque facesso facessi,  
Sic viso visi, sed pinso pinsui habebit.   

Sco fit vi, ut pasco pavi; vult posco poposci;  
Vult didici disco, quexi formare quinisco.   

To fit ti; ut, verto verti, sed sisto notetur  
Pro facio stare Activum, nam jure stiti dat.  
Dat mitto misi, peto vult formare petivi.  
Sterto stertui habet, meto messui. Ab ecto fit exi;  
Vt, flecto flexi; pecto dat pexui, habétque  
Pexi; etiam necto dat nexui, habet quoque nexi.   

Vo fit vi; ut, volvo volvi; vivo excipe vixi.  
Nexo ut nexui habet, sic texo texui habebit.   

Fit cio, ci; ut facio feci, jacio quoque jeci;  
Antiquum lacio lexi, specio quoque spexi.   
Fit dio, di; ut fodio fodi. Gio, ceu fugio gi.  

Fit pio, pi; ut capio cepi, cupio excipe pivi;  
Et rapio rapui, sapio sapui, atque sapivi.   

Fit rio, ri; ut pario peperi. Tio ssi geminans s;  
Vt quatio quassi, quod vix reperitur in usu.   

Denique uo, fit ui; ut statuo statui; pluo pluvi  
Format sive plui; struo sed struxi, fluo fluxi.   

IV.  
QVarta dat is, ivi; ut monstrat scio scis tibi scivi;  
Excipias venio dans veni, cambio campsi,  
Raucio rausi, farcio farsi, sarcio sarsi.  
Sepio sepsi, sentio sensi, fulcio fulsi;  
Haurio item hausi, sancio sanxi, vincio vinxi.  
Pro salto salio salui, & amicio amicui dat.  
Parciùs utemur cambivi, haurivi, amicivi,  
Sepivi, sanxivi, sarcivi, atque salivi.    

Cap. 32. De Compositorum Verborum Praeteritis.  
Simplex & Compositum idem habent Praeteritum. Excipe, 1. Geminantia primam syllabam. 2. Plico. 3. Oleo. 4. Pungo. 5. Do & Sto. 6. Mutantia primam vocalem in e● 7. Pasco. 8. Mutantia primam vocalem in i 9 Placeo. 10. Pango. 11. Maneo. 12. Scalpo, calco, salto 13. Claudo, quatio, lavo: 14. Mutantia primam vocalem praesentis in i, sed non praeteriti. 15. Facio. 16. Lego.  

PRaeteritum dat idem Simplex & Compositivum;  
Vt docui edocui monstrat: 1. Sed syllaba semper  
Quam simplex geminat, compôsto non geminatur;  
Praeterquam tribus his, praecurro, excurro, repungo:  
Atque à do, disco, sto, posco, ritè creatis.   

2.  
A plico compositum cum sub, vel nomine, ut ista,  
Supplico, multiplico, gaudent formare plicavi;  
Applico, complico, replico, & explico, ui vel in avi.   

3.  
Quamvis vult oleo simplex olui, tamen indè  
Quodvis compositum meliùs formabit olevi:  
Simplicis at formam redolet sequitur subolétque.   

4.  
Composita à pungo formabunt omnia punxi,  
Vult unum pupugi, interdúmque repungo repunxi.   

5.  
Natum à do, quando est inflectio tertia, ut addo,  
Credo, edo, dedo, reddo, perdo, abdo, vel obdo,  
Condo, indo, trado, prodo, vendo, didi; at unum  
Abscondo, abscondi. Natum à sto, stas, stiti, habebit.   

6.  
Verba haec simplicia praesentis praeteritique,  
Si componantur vocalem primam in e mutant;  
Damno, lacto, sacro, fallo, arceo, tracto, fatiscor,  
Partio, carpo, patro, scando, spargo, parióque,  
Cujus nata peri duo comperit & reperit dant;  
Caetera sed pervi, velut haec aperire, operire.   

7.  
A pasco, pavi tantùm compôsta notentur  
Haec duo compesco, dispesco, pescui habere:  
Caetera, ut epasco, servabunt simplicis usum.   

8.  
Haec habeo, lateo, salio, statuo, cado, laedo,  
Pango dans pegi, cano, quaero, caedo, cecidi,  
Tango, egeo, teneo, taceo, sapio, rapióque,  
Si componantur, vocalem primam in i mutant;  
Vt rapio rapui, eripio eripui: à Cano natum,  
Praeteritum per ui, ceu concino, concinui dat.   

9  
A placeo, sic displiceo; sed simplicis usum  
Haec duo complaceo, cum perplaceo, bene servant.   

10.  
Composita à pango retinent a quatuor ista;  
Depango, oppango, circumpango, atque repango.   

11.  
A maneo mansi, minui dant quatuor ista,  
Praemineo, emineo, cum promineo, immineóque;  
Simplicis at verbi servabunt caetera formam,   

12.  
Composita à scalpo, calco, salto, a per u mutant;  
Id tibi demonstrant exsculpo, inculco, resulto.   

13.  
Composita à claudo, quatio, lavo, rejiciunt a;  
Id docet à claudo, occludo, excludo; à quatióque  
Percutio, excutio; à lavo, proluo, diluo, nata.   

14.  
Haec si co●ponas, ago, emo, sedeo, rego, frango,  
Et capio, jacio, lacio, specio, premo, semper  
Vocalem primam praesentis in i sibi mutant,  
Praeteriti nunquam, ceu frango, refringo refregi,  
A capio, incipio incepi. Sed pauca notentur,  
Namque suum simplex perago sequitur, satagóque,  
Atque ab ago dego dat degi, cogo coëgi;  
A rego sic pergo perrexi, vult quoque surgo  
Surrrexi, mediâ praesentis syllabâ ademptâ.   

15.  
Nîl variat facio nisi praeposito praeeunte;  
Id docet olfacio, cum calfacio, inficióque.   

16.  
A lego nata, re, se, per, prae, sub, trans, praeeunte,  
Praesent is servant vocalem, in i caetera mutant;  
De quibus haec intelligo, diligo, negligo, tantùm  
Praeteritum lexi faciunt; reliqua omnia legi.    

Cap. 33. De Simplicium Verborum Supinis.  
Supinum formatur ex Praeterito. Bi format tum. Ci, ctum. Di, sum. Syllaba non geminatur Supinis. Gi, ctum. Li, sum.  
Mi, tum. Ni, Pi, Qui  
Ri, sum. Si, sum, Psi, tum. Ti, tum. Vi, tum. Ui, itum. Vtum. Sum. Xi, ctum.  

NVnc ex Praeterito discas formare Supinum.  
Bi sibi tum format, sic namque bibi bibitum fit.   

Ci fit tum, ut vici victum, testatur & ici  
Dans ictum, feci factum, jeci quoque jactum.  
Di fit sum, ut vidi visum: quaedam geminant ss,  
Vt pandi passum, sedi sessum; adde scidi quod  
Dat scissum, atque fidi fissum, fodi quoque fossum.   

Hic etiam advert as, quòd syllaba prima Supinis,  
Quam vult Praeteritum geminari, non geminatur:  
Idque totondi dans tonsum docet, atque cecidi  
Quod caesum, & cecĭdi quod dat casum, atque tetendi  
Quod tensum & tentum, tutudi tunsum, atque pepédi  
Quod format peditum, adde dedi quod jure datum vult.   

Gi fit ctum, ut legi lectum, pegi pepigi que  
Dat pactum, fregi fractum, tetigi quoque tactum,  
Egi actum, pupugi punctum, fugi fugitum dat.   

Li fit sum, ut salli stans pro sale condio salsum;  
Dat pepuli pulsum, ceculi culsum, atque fefelli  
Falsum; dat velli vulsum, tuli habet quoque latum.   

Mi, ni, pi, qui, tum fiunt, velut hic mànifestum;  
Emi emptum, veni ventum, cecini à cano, cantum;  
A capio cepi dans captum, à coepio coeptum,  
A rumpo rupi ruptum, liqui quoque lictum.  
Ri fit sum, ut verri versum; peperi excipe partum.   

Si fit sum, ut visi visum; tamen s geminato,  
Misi formabit missum, fulsi excipe fultum;  
Hausi haustum, sarsi sartum, farsi quoque fartum,  
Ussi ustum, gessi gestum, torsi duo tortum  
Et torsum, indulsi indultum indulsúmque requirit.  
Psi fit tum, ut scripsi scriptum; campsi excipe campsum   

Ti fit tum, à sto namque steti, à sistóque stiti fit,  
Praeterito commune statum; verti excipe versum.   

Vi fit tum, ut flavi flatum, pavi excipe pastum;  
Dat lavi lotum, interdum lautum atque lavatum.  
Potavi potum, interdum facit & potatum:  
Sed favi fautum, cavi cautum, à sero sevi  
Formes ritè satum; livi, linique litum dat:  
Solvi à solvo solutum, volvi à volvo volútum:  
Vult singultivi singultum, venio venis  
Venivi venum, sepelivi ritè sepultum.   

Quod dat ui dat itum, ut domui domitum, excipe quodvis  
Verbum in uo, quia semper ui formabit in utum,  
Exui ut exutum, à ruo deme rui ruitum dans;  
Vult secui sectum, necui nectum, fricuique  
Frictum, miscui item mistum, ac amicui dat amictum:  
Torrui habet tostum, docuique doctum, tenuique  
Tentum, consului consultum, alui altum alitúmque,  
Sic salui saltum, colui occului quoque cultum:  
Pinsui habet pistum, rapui raptum, seruique  
A sero vult sertum; sic texui habet quoque textum.   

Haec sed ui mutant in sum; nam censeo censum,  
Cellui habet celsum, meto messui habet quoque messum,  
Nexui item nexum, sic pexui habet quoque pexum;  
Dat patui passum, carui cassum caritúmque.  
Xi fit ctum, ut vinxi vinctum, quinque abjiciunt n,  
Nam finxi fictum, minxi mictum inque supino,  
Dat pinxi pictum, strinxi, rinxi quoque rictum.  
Xum flexi, plexi, fixi dant, & fluo fluxum.    

Cap. 34. De Compositorum verborum Supinis, & De Praeteritis verborum in Or.  
Compositum supinum formatur ut Simplex. Verba in ●● admitunt Praeteritum ex posterioresupino,  

I.  
COmpositum ut Simplex formatur quodque Supinum,  
Quamvis non eadem stet semper syllaba utrique.  
Composita à tunsum, dempta n tusum, à ruitum fit  
I media demptâ rutum, & à saltum quoque sultum,  
A sero quando satum format, compôsta situm dant.  
Haec captum, factum, jactum, raptum, a per e mutant,  
Et cantum, partum, sparsum, carptum, quoque fartum.  
Verbum edo compositum non estum, sed facit esum;  
Vnum dunaxat comedo formabit utrunque.  
A nosco tantùm duo cognitum & agnitum habentur  
Caetera dant notum nullo est jam noscitum in usu.   

II.  
VErba in or admittunt ex posteriore Supino  
Praeteritum, verso u per us, & sum consociato  
Vel fui, ut à lectu lectus sum vel fui. At horum  
Nunc est Deponens, nunc est Commune notandum,  
Nam labor lapsus, patior dat passus & ejus  
Nata ut compatior compassus, perpetiór que  
Formans perpessus: fateor quod fassus & indè  
Nata, ut confiteor confessus, diffiteór que  
Formans diffessus:: gradior dat gressus, & indè  
Nata, ut digredior digressus. Junge fatiscor  
Feslus sum, mensus sum metior, utor & usus.  
Pro texo orditus, pro incepto dat ordior orsus,  
Nitor nisus vel nixus sum, ulciscor & ultus.  
Irascor simul iratus, reor atque ratus sum,  
Obliviscor vult oblitus sum; fruor optat  
Fructus vel fruitus, misereri junge misertus.  
Vult tuor & tueor non tutus sed tuitus sum,  
Quamvis & tutum & tuitum sit utrique Supinum.  
A loquor adde locutus, & à sequor adde secutus;  
Experior facit expertus, formare paciscor  
Gaudet pactus sum, nanciscor nactus, apiscor  
Quod vetus est verbum aptus sum, undè adipiscor adeptus.  
Junge queror questus, proficiscor junge profectus,  
Expergiscor sum experrectus, & haec quoque commi—  
Niscor commentus, nascor natus, moriór que  
Mortuus, atque orior quod Praeteritum facit ortus.     

Cap. 35. De verbis quibusdam Anomalis.  
Verba Anomala sunt 1. Redundantia, Praeteritum. Activae & Passivae vocis habentitia. 2. Variantia ut, 1. Neutropastiva. & 2. Praeteritum mutuantia. 3. Defectiva 1. Praeterito. 2 Defectiva Supinis.  

PRaeteritum Activae & Passivae vocis habent haec,  
Coeno coenavi & coenatus sum tibi format,  
Juro juravi & juratus, potóque potavi  
Et potus, titubo titubavi vel titubatus.  
Sic careo carui & cassus sum, prandeo prandi  
Et pransus, pateo patui & passus, placeóque  
Dat placui & placitus, suesco suevi atque suétus,  
Veneo pro vendor, venivi venditus & sum,  
Nubo nupsi nuptáque sum, mereor meritus sum  
Vel merui. Adde libet libuit libitum, & licet adde  
Quod licuit licitum, taedet quod taeduit & dat  
Pertaesum; adde pudet faciens puduit puditúmque,  
Atque piget, tibi quod format piguit pigitúmque.   

NEutro-passivum sic praeteritum tibi format,  
Gaudeo gavisus sum, fido fisus, & audeo  
Ansus sum, fio factus, soleo solitus sum,  
Moereo sum moestus; sed Phocae nomen habetur.   

QVaedam praeteritum verba accipiunt aliunde.  
Incoeptivum in sco, stans pro primario, adoptat  
Praeteritum ejusdem verbi; vult ergò tepesco  
A tepeo tepui, fervesco à ferveo fervi,  
A video cerno vult vidi, à concutio vult  
Praeteritum quatio concussi, percutióque  
Percussi ferio; à mingo vult meïo minxi,  
A sedeo sido vult sedi, à suffero tollo  
Sustuli, & à fuo sum fui, à tulo ritè fero tuli,  
A sto sisto steti, tantùm pro stare; furóque  
Insanivi, à verbo ejusdem significati.  
Sic poscunt vescor, medeor, liquor, reminiscor,  
Praeteritum à pascor, medicor, liquefio, recordor.   

PRaeteritum fugiunt, vergo, ambigo, glisco, fatisco,  
Polleo, nideo, ad haec Inceptiva, ut puerasco;  
Et passiva quibus caruere activa supinis,  
Vt metuor, timeor. Meditativa omnia praeter  
Parturio, esurio, quae praeteritum duo servant.   

HAec rarò, aut nunquam retinebunt verba Supinum,  
Lambo, mico mucui, rudo, scabo, parco peperci,  
Dispesco, posco, disco, compesco, quinisco,  
Diego, ango, sugo, lingo, ningo, satagóque,  
Psallo, volo, nolo, malo, tremo, strideo, strido,  
Flaveo, liveo, avet, paveo, conniveo, fervet;  
A nuo compositum, ut renuo, à cado ut incido, praeter  
Occido quod facit occasum, recidóque recasum;  
Respuo, linquo, luo, metuo, cluo, frigeo, calvo,  
Et sterto, timeo, sic luceo, & arceo, cujus  
Composita ercitum habent: Sic à gruo, ut ingruo natum.  
Et quaecun sue in ui formantur neutra secundae,  
Exceptis oleo, doleo, placeo, taceóque,  
Pareo, item & careo, noceo, pateo, lateóque.  
Et valeo, caleo; gaudent haec namque supino.    

Cap. 33. De verbis quae deficiunt certis Modis & Temporibus.  
3. Certis Modis & Temporibus, ut, Aîo. Ausim. Duim. Salve. Ave. Cedo. Faxo. Forem. Quaeso. Infit. Defit. Confieri. Inquam. Odi. Cepi. Memini. Dor. For. Sci. Eo, & queo, Orior, Morior. Volo. Nolo. Malo. Fero. Feror. Edo. Sum.  
VErba (magis usitatè) Defectiva vocantur quae certis Modis & Temporibus deficiunt, viz.  
Indicativus Praesens Aïo, aïs, aït. Plur. Aïunt.  
Imperfect. Aïebam, habet omnes personas.  
Imperativus, Aï.  
Subjunctivus Praesens, Aïas, aïat. Plur. Aïamus, Aïant.  
Participium praesens, Aïens.  
Subjunctivus Praesens, Ausim, ausis, ausit. Plur. Ausint.  
Sic Duim, duis, duit. Plur. Duint.  
Veteres enim Subjunctiva per im efferebant, unde creduim pro credam legimus.  
Indicat. Futur. Salvebis.  
Imperat. Salve, salceto. Plur. Salvete, salvetote.  
Infinitivus, Salvere.  
Imperativus, Ave, aveto. Plur. Avete, avetote.  
Infinitivus, Avere.  
Imperativus, Cedo. Plur. Cedite, & apud Antiquos Cette.  
Indicat. & Subjunct. Fut. Faxim vel faxo, faxis, faxit. Plur. Faxint.  
Subjunct. Forem, fores, foret. Plur. forent.  
Infinit. Futur. Fore.  
Indicat. presens, Quaeso. Plur. Quaesumus.  
Indicat. praesens, Infit. Plur. Infiunt. Et Defit, defiet, defiat, ut item defieri & confieri.  
Indicat, praesens, Inquio vel inquam, inquis, inquit. Plur. Inquiunt.  
Perfectum, Inquisti, inquit.  
Futurum, Inquies, inquiet.  
Imperat. Inque, inquito.  
Subjunct. praesens, Inquiat.  
Participium. Inquiens.  
Odi, coepi, memini, habent ea solùm tempora quae à praeterito formantur; viz. in ram, rim, ssem, ro, & sse desinentia. Sed memini habet in imperativo singulari, memento. Plur. mementote.  
Dor, for, der, fer, simplicium non reperiuntur in primâ personâ singulari praesentis, sed in caeteris (ferè) omnibus.  
Dic, duc, fer fac, per Apocopen concisae sunt.  
Sci à scio non reperitur, nec solebo à soleo, nec fuo antiquum.  
Eo & queo habent imperfectum ibam & quibam, & futurum ibo & quibo.  
Orior oreris habet Infinitum oriri, sic & morior mori & moriri.  
Volo, nolo, malo, fero, feror, edo Syncopen ferè admittunt in plerisque temporibus; ut, Volo, vis, vult, Vultis. Nolo, non vis, nonvult, Nolumus. Malo, mavis, mavult, Malumus. Fero, fers, fert. Feror, ferris vel ferre, fertur. Edo, edis vel es, edit vel est, etc. ex quibus volo & malo carent Imperativo. Nolo facit Imperativo Noli nolito. Plur. Nolite nolitote.  
Sum cum compositis caret gerundiis, Supinis, & participo praesenti, nisi quod ab absum, praesum, veniunt absens, praesens, nam futurus est à fui, quod praeteritum olim obsoleti verbi fuo. Possum caret Imperativo.   

Cap. 38. De Impersonalibus & Defectivis.  
Impersonalia conjugantur in tertia singulati. Sunt autem Activae vocis. Velure 2. Passivae vocis. Derivativa sunt 1. Inchoativa. 2. Frequentativa. 3. Desiderativa. 4. Diminutiva. 5. Imitativa 6. Apparativa. Denominativa.  
IMpersonalia conjugantur in tertiâ personâ singulari per omnes modos & tempora.  
Sunt autem duplicia, 1. Activae vocis, quae in t desinunt, ut decet, decebat, decuit, decuerat, decebit. deceat, deceret, decuerit, decuisset, decuerit, decere. 2. Passivae vocis quae in tur desinunt, ut Studetur, studebatur, studitum est vel fuit, studitum erat vel fuerat, studebitur. Studeatur, studeretur, studitum sit vel fuerit, studitum esset vel fuisset, studitum erit vel fuerit, studeri.  
Impersonalia Gerundiis, & Supinis & Participiis plerunque carent.  
Participia, per quae Praeterita circumloquimur Substantiuè ponuntur in neutro genere.  
Impersonalia Activae vocis sunt haec undecim, Conjugationis secundae, quae semper ferè manent Impersonalia, viz. Decet, libet, licet, liquet, (cujus non exstat praeteritum) lubet, miseret, oportet, poenitet, piget, pudet, taedet, quae interdum etiam inveniuntur in tertia plurali, ut decent, oportent, pudent.  
His accensentur quaedam Impersonalia (quae absolutè inveniuntur in tertia persona absque nominatjvo, sequente mox Infinitivo). Cujusmodi sunt,  
In prima Conjugatione, delectat, juvat, praestat, restat, stat, constat, vacat.  
In Secunda, Apparet, attinet, debet, patet, placet, solet.  
In Tertia, Accidit, coepit, conducit, contingit, desinit, incipit, sufficit.  
In Quarta, Convenit, evenit, expedit.  
Inter anomala, est, interest, prodest, potest, fit, resert.  
Ad Impersonalium etiam naturam quodammodo accedunt verba exemptae potestatis, viz. actionem significantia non humanae potestatis, ut Fulgurat, pluit, lucescit, etc.  
2. Impersonalia Passivae vocis certum numerum non habent, quia fiunt ab omnibus verbis Activis, & quibusdam neutris, ut Legitur, curritur.  
Denique nullum ferè verbum est tam personale, ut non idem impersonalis formam possit induere, atque nonnulla Impersonalia remigrant aliquando in Personalia.  
Verbum Impersonale, pro singulis personis utriusque numeri indifferenter accipi potest, viz, ex vi adjuncti obliqui, ut,  
Oportet me, Oportet nos, te, vos, illum, illos. Statur à me, Statur à nobis, à te, à vobis, ab illo. ab illis.  
Derivativa saepissime pro ipsis primitivis usurpantur, ut Timesco pro timeo, hisco pro hio.  
Derivatorum quinque sunt genera.  
1. Inchoativa sive Augmentativa, quae inchoationem aut augmentationem significant, & in sco desinunt; ut, Lucesco, ardesco.  
2. Frequentativa, quae assiduitatem quandam vel conatum significant, & in to, so, xo, aut tor desinunt; ut, Visito, viso, nexo, sector.  
3. Desiderativa sive Meditativa, quae appetentiam quandam, aut studium significant, & desinunt in urio; ut, Lecturio, coenaturio.  
4. Diminutiva, quae diminutionem sui Primitivi significant, & desinunt in lo, vel sso, ut, Sorbillo, pitisso.  
5. Imitativa, quae imitationem significant, & desinunt in isso & or; ut, Patrisso, vulpinor.  
6. Huc pertinent & Apparativa, quae apparatum significant, & in co desinunt; ut, Vellico, fodico.  
7. Item Denominativa, quae à nominibus veniunt, & propriam appellationem non habent; ut, lignor, rusticor.   

Cap. 39 De Participio.  
Participium partem capit à Nomine, & Verbo. Species Participiorum sunt quatuor. 1. Praesentis. 2. Praeteriti. 3. Futuri in rus. 4. Futuri in dus. De modo Participia formandi. Et à quibus verbis derivantur. Nomina Participialia. Participia Praesent is variantur sicur Felix, Reliquorum temporum sicut Bonus,  
PARTICIPIUM est pars Orationis à Verbo derivata, tam à Nomine quàm à Verbo partem capiens; ut, Amans.  
Participium habet genera, casus, & declinationem à nomine; tempora & significationem à Verbo; numerum & figuram ab utroque.  
Secundùm tempus species Participiorum sunt quatuor.  
1. Participium Praesentis, habet significationem praesentis, & definit in ans, ens, & iens; ut, Amans, docens, legens, audiens.  
Caeterùm iens ab eo rarò legitur in Nominativo, sed euntis, etc. in obliquis. Composita verò Nominativum habent in iens, & Genitivum in untis, praeter Ambiens, ambientis.  
2. Participium Praeteriti, significat tempus praeteritum, & desinit in tus, sus, xus, ut, Amatus, visus, nexus, & unicum in vus, ut, mortuus.  
3. Participium Futuri in Rus habet significationem praesentis Infiniti sui Activi; ut, Amaturus, doctu rus.  
4. Participium Futuri in Dus, significationem habet Infiniti sui Passivi; ut, Amandus.  
Participium Praesens formatur ab imperfecto mutando ultimam syllabam in ns; ut ab Amabam amans.  
Participium Praeteriti formatur à posteriori Supino addendo s; ut ab Amatu amatus.  
Participium Futuri in rus formatur à posteriori Supino addendo rus; ut ab Amatu, amaturus.  
Participium Futuri in Dus formatur à Genitivo participii praesentis mutando tis in dus; ut ab Amantis amandus.  
Haec participia praeter Analogiam à verbis suis deducuntur; Pariturus, nasciturus, soniturus, arguiturus, moriturus, luiturus, nosciturus, osurus, futurus, oriturus.  
Tunicatus, togatus, personatus, larvatus: etc. similia participiis sunt, à nominibus verò deduucuntur.  
Ab Activis & Neutris quae habent Supina, veniunt duo participia, unum Praesentis, alterum Futuri in rus; ut ab Amo, amans, amaturus, à Curro, currens, cursurus.  
A quibusdam verò neutris reperiuntur etiam participia in dus; ut Dubitandus, vigilandus, carendus, dolendus. Et ab iis quae praeteritum faciunt more passivorum formatur etiam participium praeteriti; ut, Gaudeo gavisus, juro juratus: sic ab Impersonalibus in tur; ut ab Aratur, aratus.  
A Passivis veniunt duo participia Praeteriti & Futuri in dus; ut ab Amor, amatus, amandus.  
A Deponentibus veniunt tria participia, Praesentis, Praeteriti, & Futuri in rus; ut ab Auxilior, auxilians, auxiliatus, auxiliaturus.  
Multis accidit etiam participium in dus, praecipuè Accusativum regentibus; ut à Loquor, loquens, locuturus, locutus, loquendus.  
A Communibus veniunt quatuor participia, ut à Largior, largiens, largiturus, largitus, largiendus.  
Ab Impersonalibus nulla exstant participia praeter Poenitens, decens, libens, lubens, pertaesus, poenitendus, pudens, pudendus, pigendus.  
Participia degenerant in nomina Participialia.  
1. Cùm alium casum quàm suum verbum, regunt, ut Amans pecuniae.  
2. Cùm componuntur cum dictionibus, cum quibus ipsorum verba componi non possunt, ut Infans, indoctus.  
3. Cùm comparantur; ut, Amans, amantior, amantissimus.  
4. Cùm tempus non significat; ut, Sapiens, sponsa.  
Participia praesentis temporis non rarò fiunt Substantiva, modò masculini generis; ut, Oriens: modò foeminini; ut, Consonans: modò neutrius; ut, Accidens: modò communis; ut, Appetens.  
Participia praesentis variantur tribus Articulis; ut, Hic, haec, & hoc Amans, sicut Felix.  
Participia reliquorum temporum variantur tribus terminationibus; Amatus, ta, tum; Amaturus, ra, rum; Amandus, da, dum, sicut Bonus.   

Cap. 40. De Adverbio.  
V. Adverbium explanat Verbum. Species Adverbiorum sunt 33.  
ADVERBIUM est pars Orationis adjecta aliis vocibus (sed praecipuè Verbis) ad sensum & significationem earum perficiendum & explanandum.  
Significationes Adverbiorum sunt multae, quarum varietas ex Verborum circumstantiis colligenda est.  
Secundùm eorum significationem quaedam dicuntur Adverbia Loci eáque In Loco; ut, Hic, illic. Ad Locum; ut, Huc, illuc. A Loco; ut, Hinc, illinc. Per Locum; ut, Hac, illac. Temporis; ut, Nunc, tunc, hodie; usque Temporis & Loci est. Numeri; ut, Semel, bis, ter, iterum. Ordinis; ut, Indè, denique, demum. Interrogandi; ut, Cur? quare? unde? Vocandi; ut, Heus, ô, eho. Affirmandi; ut, Certè, nae, profectò, scilicet. Negandi; ut, Non, haud, minimé. Jurandi; ut, Pol, aedipol, hercle. Hortandi; ut, Agè, sodes, sûltis. Concedendi; ut, licèt, estò, sit-sané. Prohibendi; ut, Nè, non. Adulandi; ut, Amabo. Optandi; ut, utinam, ô si. Congregandi; ut, Simul, unà, pariter. Segregandi; ut, Seorsim, gregatim, bifariam. Eligendi; ut, Potiùs, imò, satiús. Excludendi; ut, Tantùm, modò, solúm. Includendi, sive negatae solitudinis; ut, Non modò, non solùm, nedum. Diversitatis; ut, Aliter, secus. Propinquitatis; ut, Obviàm, praestò. Intendendi; ut, Valdè, nimis, funditùs, omnino. Remittendi; ut, Vix, aegrè, paulatim, pedetentim. Restringendi; ut, Quatenus quoad, in-quantùm. Rei non peractae; ut, Penè, ferme. Explanandi; ut, Putà, utpote, nimirum, i. e. (id est) viz. (videlicet) q. d. (quasi dicat). Dubitandi; ut, Forsan, forsitan, fortassis. Eventûs; ut, Fortè, fortuitò, fortè fortunâ. Demonstrandi; ut, En, ecce, sic, itá. Similitudinis; ut, Sic, sicut, ceu, tanquam, velut. Quantitatis; ut, Parùm, minimè, satis, abunde. Qualitatis; ut, Bene, malè, & quae in e desinunt ab Adjectivis trium terminationum; ut, Doctè, pulcrè: item in er ab Adjectivis trium Articulorum; ut, Graviter, feliciter. Comparandi; ut, Tam, quàm, minks, aequè, magis atque.  
Adverbia ab Adjectivis derivata more Adjectivorum comparantur, sed solâ terminatione differunt; ut, Doctè, doctiùs, doctissimè; fortiter, fortiùs, fortissimé.  
Similiter & Bene, meliùs, optimè; saepè, saepius, saepissimè; nuper, nuperrimè, cum paucis aliis.  
Aliquando Neutra Adjectiva induunt formam Adverbiorum, ad Graecorum imitationem; ut, Recèns, pro recenter; Toruùm pro toruê.   

Cap. 41. De Conjunctione.  
VI Conjunctio voces & sententias conjungit. Species ejus quoad significationem sunt 17. Quoad Ordinem quatuor.  
CONjUNCTIO est pars Orationis, quae voces & sententias aptè connectit.  
Quoad potestatem five significationem Conjunctionum aliae sunt Copulativae, quae & sensum & verba copulant; ut, Et, que, nec. Suspensivae, quae orationem suspendunt sive aliud exspectari faciunt; ut, Cùm, tum, &, vel, geminatae. Disjunctivae, quae sensum disjungunt, verba verò copulant; ut, Aut, sive, vel. Causales, quae caussam reddunt superioris sententiae; ut, Nam, enim, quia. Discretivae, quae discretionem faciunt; ut, Sed, verò, at, ast. Conditionales, quae conditionem implicant; ut, Si, sin, nisi, dum. Exceptivae, quae aliquid excipiunt; ut, Ni, nisi, quin, alioquin. Interrogativae, quae interrogant; ut, Nè, an, utrum. Dubitativae, quae dubitant; ut, An, num, nunquid. Rationales, sive Illativae, quae ex ratione proposita conclusionem inferunt; ut, Ergò, ideo, itaque. Continuativae, quae membra orationis ordine continuant; ut, Deinde, porrò, proinde, insuper. Concessivae, sive Adversativae, quae aliquid concedunt cui posterior sententia adversetur; ut, Etsi, quanquam, licèt, tametsi, quamvis. Redditivae earundem, quae ad Concessivas relatae diversam sententiam superiori reddunt; ut, Tamen, attamen, veruntamen. Electivae, quae ostendunt praecedens membrum sententiae praeferri; ut, Quàm, ac, atque. Diminutivae, quae diminuunt sensum; ut, Saltem, vel. Expletivae, vel Completivae, quae ornatûs gratiâ sententiam complent; ut, Quidem, autem, scilicet, enimvero. Conjunctiones adverbiales, vel Adverbia conjunctiva, quae tenui discrimine ab adverbiis discernuntur; ut, Quando, proinde. Quoad Ordinem sunt Praepositivae, quae in sententiarum exordio ponuntur; ut, Nam, quare, at. Subjunctivae, sive Postpositivae, quae secundum, tertium, vel quartum locum in clausula occupant; ut, Quidem, quoque, verò, enim. Communes, quae indifferenter & praeponi & postponi possunt; ut, Ergò, igitur, itaque, sed. Encliticae sive Inclinativae, quae affixae praecedenti voci, accentum suum in ejus ultimam syllabam inclinant; ut, Que, nè, ve, dum, sis, nam.   

Cap. 42. De Praepositione.  
VII. Praepositio aliis vocibus praepoponitur. Praepositiones sunt 54. Quarum alii sunt, 1. Separabiles. 2. Aliae Inseparabiles.  
PRAEPOSITIO est pars Orationis quae aliis vocibus praeponitur,  
vel in Appositione; ut, Ad Scholam. Compositiont; ut, Advenio. Praepositiones sunt vel 1. Separebiles. Sive 2. Inseparabiles.  
1. Separabiles sunt, quae & in & extra Compositinem usurpantur; de quarum regimine dicemus, LIB. 3. CAP. 8.  
Ex his enim triginta una Accusativum regunt, viz.  
Ad. Erga. Praeter. Apud. Extra. Prope, Adversús. Infra. Propter. Adversúm. Inter. Secundúm. Ante Intra. Secus. Cis. Juxta. Supra, Citra. Ob. Trans. Circum. Penés. Versús. Circa. Per. Vltra. Circiter. Poné.  Contra. Post.   
Quas aliqui quatuor versibus complectuntur.  

Ad, penès, adversùs, cis, citra, circiter, extra,  
Erga, apud, ante, secus, trans, supra, versus, ob, infra,  
Vltra, post, praeter, propter, propè, ponè, secundùm,  
Per, circum, circa, contra, juxta, inter, & intrá.  
Duodecim verò regunt Ablativum; A, ab, abs, absque, coram, cum, de, è, ex, prae, pro, sine.   
Quinque serviunt utrisque casui; Clam, in, sub, subter, super; unicum tenus gaudet Ablativo singulari, & Genitivo plurali.  
2. Inseparabiles sunt, quae nunquam extra Compositionem inveniuntur.  
Am, ut, Ambio. Di, Diduco. Dis, Disttrabo. Re, ut, Recipio. Se, Sepono. Con, Convivo. Ve, Vesanus.  
Praepositionum significatio non tam regulis, quàm assiduo legendi ac scribendi usu discenda est.  
Quaedam Praepositiones suis casibus postponi solent; viz. Cum, ut quibuscum; tenus, ut pube tenus; versùs, ut Londinum versús: quibus addi potest usque, ut ad Orientem usque.  
Praepositiones cùm sine casu ponuntur fiunt Adverbia; ut, Coràm laudare, clàm vituperare.  
Quaedam Adverbiorum, Conjunctionum, & Praepositionum, pro variâ eorum significatione, modò Adverbia, modò Conjunctiones, modò Praepositiones censeri possunt.  
Quaedam Praepositiones procreant Adjectiva Comparativi & Superlat. gradûs, ut videre est, Cap. 17. l. 2.   

Cap. 34. De Interjectione.  
VIII. Interjectio caeteris partibus orationis interjicitur.  
INterjectio est pars Orationis quae subitò prorumpentem animi affectum demonstrat.  
Tot igitur sunt Interjectiones, quot sunt animiperturbati motus, viz.  

Exultantis; ut Evax, vah, io.  
Dolentis; ut, Heu, hoi, hei, oh, ah.  
Timentis; ut, Atat.  
Admirantis; ut, Papae.  
Indignantis; ut, Hem, vah.  
Vitantis; ut, Apage, apagite.  
Vocantis; ut, Eho, ho, io.  
Laudantis; ut, Euge, eja.  
Deridentis; ut, Huî.  
Exclamantis; ut, Oh, proh.  
Imprecantis; ut, Malùm, vae malúm.  
Fastidientis; ut, Phy.  
Minantis; ut, Vae,  
Ridentis; ut, Ha, he, he.  
Silentium orationi injungentis; ut, Au, ' st, pax.   
Aliquando Nomina, Verba, & aliae voces interjiciuntur more Interjectionum; ut, Infandùm, amabò, malùm, mirabile dictu, etc.    

LIB. III. DE SYNTAXI.  
Syntax is debitam partium Orationis Compositionem docet. Per Regulas  
SYNTAXIS, sive Constructio, est tertia pars Grammatices, quae debitam partium Orationis inter se Compositionem docet.  
Ea verò est debita Compositio, quâ veterum probatissimi, tum in scribendo, tum in loquendo sunt usi.  
Syntaxeos partes duae sunt, Concordantia. & CAP. 1. Regimen. CAP. 2.  

Cap. 1. De Concordantiâ.  
1. Concordantiae.  
COncordantia est dictionum constructio secundùm earum in accidentibus quibusdam convenientiam.  
Sunt autem Concordantiae tres, Prima inter Nominativum & Verbum. s. I. Secunda inter Substantivum & Adjectivum. §. II. Terria inter Antecedens & Relativum. §. III. Quibus adjungi possunt Regulae De casu Relativi. §. IV. De Interrogativo & Redditivo. §. V.  

§. I. Regula primae Concordantiae.  
VErbum Personale cohaeret cum Nominativo Numero & personâ; ut,  

Praeceptor legit, vos verò negligitis.  
Dum felis dormit, saliunt mures.   
1. Obs. Nominativus primae vel secundae personae rarissimè exprimitur; ut,  
Absque Deo nihil possumus.  
1. Exc. Nisi caussâ discretionis; viz. cùm diversa studia significamus.  
Tu ludis, ego studeo.  
2 Exc. Aut Emphasis gratiâ; viz. cùm plùs significamus, quàm expressè dicimus; ut,  
Tu es patronus, tu pater, si deseris tu, perimus.  
2. Obs. Verbum Substantivum saepissime subauditur; ut, Nulla salus bello.  
Qualis Dominus, talis Servus.  
3. Obs. Saepe reticentur & alia verba; ut,  
Cornici oculum. (* configere)  
Sus ad lutum. († redibit)   

§. II. Regula secundae Concordantiae.  
ADjectivum cum Substantivo, genere, numero, & casu consentit; ut,  
Rara avis in terris, nigróque simillima cygno Vera fides.  
Canis festinans coecos parit catulos.  
1. Obs. Adjectivum Substantiuè positum supplet locum Substantivi; ut,  

Doctus pauper indocto divite praestantior est.  
Omnia mala sunt fugienda.  
Vir bonus est commune bonum.    

§. III. Regula tertiae Concordantiae.  
3. Tertiae.  
RElativum (qui) cum Antecedente concordat genere, numero, & personâ; ut,  

Vir sapit, qui pauca loquitur.  
Prima, quae vitam dedit, hora carpsit.  
Leve fit, quod bene fertur onus.   
N. B. Antecedens (ferè) est dictio quae Relativum antecedit, & à Relativo refertur.  
Nominativus, Substantivum, & Antecedens dicuntur Supposita, quia Verbo, Adjectivo, & Relativo in Concordantia (quae etiam à quibusdam Apposita vocantur) quasi supponuntur atque ea sustentant: hinc  
1. Obs. In orationibus quae ad homines tantùm pertinent Suppositum saepe subauditur; ut,  

Sic vulgò dicunt.  
Boni discunt seduli.  
Bona bonis prognata.  
Qui nimiùm properat, seriùs absolvit.  
Quae nocent, docent.   
2. Obs. Aliquando oratio, membrum orationis, verbum Infiniti modi, Adverbium cum Genitivo, aut dictio pro se posita, supplent locum Suppositorum; ut,  

Ingenuas-didicisse-fideliter-artes, emollit mores.  
Diluculo-surgere saluberrimum est.  
Partim signorum sunt combusta.  
In-tempore-veni, quod omnium rerum est primum.  
Saepe vale dicto, rursus sum multa locutus.   
3. Obs. Suppositum quandoque cum Verbo, vel Adjectivo, vel Relativo sensu magis quàm voce convenit. ut,  

Turba ruunt. Vterque deluduntur.  
Gens armati pugnant.  
Ubi illic scelus est qui me perdidit?   
4. Obs. Verbum, Adjectivum, aut Relativum inter duo supposita diversorum numerorum, aut generum collocatum, cum alterutro convenire potest; ut,  

Amantium irae amoris redintegratio est.  
Paupertas visum est magnum onus.  
Animal plenum rationis, quem vocamus hominem.  
Avis (qui vel) quae passer appellatur.   
5. Obs. Plura Supposita singularia per Conjunctionem copulata saepe Verbum, vel Adjectivum, vel Relativum plurale exigunt, atque haec cum Supposito digniore quadrabunt; ut,  

Ego & tu, qui studemus seduli, sumus in tuto.  
Tu atque ille, qui sedetis tam supini, cavete ne vapuletis.   
N. B. Suppositi dignitas spectatur secundùm 1. Genus. aut, 2. Personam.  
1. Dignior enim est persona prima quàm secunda, aut tertia, & dignior secunda quàm tertia.  
2. Dignius etiam est masculinum genus quàm foemininum, aut neutrum, & dignius foemininum quàm neutrum.  
Exc. At in rebus inanimatis neutrum genus adhibetur tanquam dignius; ut,  

Arcus & calami sunt bona.  
Virga tua & baculus tuus (ipsa) me consolata sunt.   
6. Obs. Cùm Verbum vel Adjectivum pluribus Suppositis respondet, cum viciniore convenit expresse, cum reliquis per supplementum; ut,  

Cubas ubi ego, coenas quando nos.  
Maritus & uxor est irata.   
Exc. Attamen quando est comparatio vel similitudo, Verbum vel Adjectivum convenit cum remotiore Supposito; ut,  

Ego meliùs, quàm tu, scribo.  
Divina lex, sicut mel, dulcis est.   
7. Obs. Pronomen Primitivum includi vel subintelligi in Possessivo videtur, ideóque Relativum aut Adjectivum cum tali Primitivo saepe concordant; ut,  

Nil meâ refert, qui sum natu maximus.  
Scripta cùm mea nemo legat, vulgò recitare timentis.    

§. IV. Regula de casu Relativi.  
Quibus addas, 4. De casu Relativi.  
QUoties nullus Nominativus interseritur inter Relativum & Verbum, Relativum erit Verbo Nominativus; ut,  

Qui antè non cavet, pòst dolebit.  
Quod rarum charum.  
Facilè inveniat baculum qui cupit caedere canem.   
At si Nominativus Relativo & Verbo interponatur, Relativum regetur à Verbo, aut ab alia dictione in eadem oratione; ut,  

Saepe vincas patientiâ quem non vincas impetu.  
Si non potes quod vis, id velis quod possis.  
Cujus umbram veneror.  
Cui similem non vidi.   
1. Obs. Sicuti Relativum Verbo Nominativus, ità Adjectivo Substantivum fieri potest; ut,  

Qui malis gaudet alienis bis miser est.  
Felix quem faciunt aliena pericula cautum.   
2. Obs. Nomina Interrogativa & Indefinita regulam Relativi sequuntur, quae semper praecedunt verbum sicuti Relativum; ut,  
Qualis erat? Talis erat, qualem nunquam vidi.   

§. V. Regula de Interrogativo, & ejus Redditivo.  
5. De Interrogativo & Redditivo.  
INterrogativum & ejus Redditivum ejusdem casûs, & temporis erunt; i. e. quo casu vel tempore quaeritur, in eodem respondebitur; ut,  
Quid agitis? Studemus.  
Quis dives est? Qui nîl cupiat. Quis pauper? Avarus. Quid rerum nunc geritur in Anglia?  
Consulitur de Religione.  
1. Obs. Fallit haec regula, quoties diversa vocum natura diversos casus exigit; viz.  
1. Quoties interrogatio fit per Cujus, ja, jum; ut,  
Cujum pecus? Aegonis.  
2. Aut per dictionem variae Syntaxeos; ut,  

Furtine accusatur, an homicidii? Vtroque, vel de utroque.  
Quanti constitit? Denario.   
3. Quoties per Possessivum respondere licet; ut,  

Cujus est hic codex? Meus.  
Cujus est haec domus? Paterna.     

Cap. 2. De Regimine Nominum.  
2. Regiminis 1. Nominum  
REgimen est constructio dictionum, secundùm quam praecedens quaeque dictio regit certum casum vel modum sequentis.  
Est autem Regimen Nominum, Cap. 2. Pro nominum, Cap. 3. Verborum, Cap. 4. Participiorum, Cap. 5. Adverbiorum, Cap. 6. Conjunctionum, Cap. 7. Praepositionum, Cap. 8. Interjectionum, Cap. 9  
Omnes enim partes orationis regunt casus, exceptâ Conjunctione, quae tamen certos modos & tempora postulat.  
Nomina regunt quatuor casus: viz. Genitivum, §. VI Dativum, §. VII. Accusativum, §. VIII. Ablativum, §. IX.  

§. VI Regula de Nominibus Genitivum regentibus.  
6. Genitivo  
GEnitivum regunt.  
I. Substantiva: Quum enim duo Substantiva diversae significationis concurrant, posterius in Genitivo ponitur; ut,  

Timor domini est initium sapientiae.  
Verbum Dei manet in aeternum.   
1. Obs. Sin duo vel plura Substantiva sint ejusdem rei, in eodem casu ponentur; ut,  

Pater meus vir amat me puerum.  
Marcus Tullius Cicero Princeps Oratorum.   
2. Obs. Genitivus possessoris saepissimè in Adjectivum possessivum mutatur; ut,  

Patris domus, vel Paterna domus.  
Heri filius, vel herilis filius.   
3. Prius Substantivum quandoque per Ellipsin subauditur; ut,  

Ad 
* Templum.  Stae Mariae.  

† Servum.  Hujus video Byrrhiam.  
Tertio 
* Die.  Kalendarum.   
4. Adjectivum in neutro genere Substantiuè positum Genitivum postulat; ut,  

Quantum quisque suâ nummorum servat in arcá, Tantum habet & fidei  
Non videmus id manticae quod in tergo est.   
Sic & alia Graecorum imitatione; ut,  

Nigrae lanarum nullum bibunt colorem,  
Canum degeneres caudam sub alvum reflectunt.   
5. Nomina qualitatem denotantia ad laudem vel vituperium rei efferentur in Ablativo vel Genitivo post Nomen vel Verbum Substantivum; ut,  

Ingenui vultûs puer, ingenuique pudoris.  
Contemptissimus quisque solutissimâ est linguâ.   
6. Opus & usus pro necesse, gaudent Ablativo; ut,  

Quid verbis opus est.  
Vsus est viginti minis.   
Opus verò pro necessarius variè construitur; ut,  

Dux nobis opus est.  
Quae tibi opus sunt para.   
II. Adjectiva quae desiderium, notitiam, memoriam, curam, timorem, aut ejusmodi animi affectionem significant; ut, Est natura hominum novitatis avida.  
Mens est praesaga futuri.  
Vive memor mortis. Timidus procellae,  
Rudis literarum.  
III. Verbalia in ax; ut,  
Virtus est vitiorum fugax.  
Tempus edax rerum.  
IV. Partitiva; ut, Aliquis vestrûm.  
Vtrum horum mavis accipe.  
V. Partitiuè posita; viz. quae per de, è, ex, de, aut inter exponuntur, cujusmodi sunt,  
1. Interrogativa quaedam; ut Quis fratrum?  
An quisquam hominum est aequè miser ut ego?  
2. Certa Numeralia; viz. Cardinalia & Ordinalia; ut, Quatuor judicum.  
Sapientum octavus quis fuerit nondum constat.  
3. Comparativa & Superlativa; ut,  
Manuum fortior est dextra.  
Digitorum medius est longissimus.  
1. Obs. Haec tamen in alio sensu Ablativum exigunt cum praepositione; ut,  
Primus ab Hercule. Tertius ab Aenea:  
2. In alio verò sensu Dativum; ut,  
Nulli pietate secundus.  
3. Usurpantur etiam cum Praepositionibus per quas Genitivus exponi solet; ut,  
Est deus è vobis alter. Solus de plurimis.  
Primus inter omnes.  
VI Ingens praetereà Adjectivorum turba, (viz. Compos, reus, exsors, particeps, etc.) crebrâ lectione meliùs addiscenda; ut,  
Compos voti. Reus furti. Omnis culpae exsors.  
Illius consilii particeps.  
De quibus videsis LINACRUM & DISPAUTERIUM.   

§. VII. Regula de nominibus Dativum regentibus.  
7. Dativo.  
DAtivum regunt.  
I. Adjectiva quibus significatur  
1. Commodum aut Incommodum; ut,  

Sis bonus ô felixque tuis.  
Patriae idoneus, utilis agro.  
Turba gravis paci, placidaeque inimica quieti.   
2. Similitudo aut Dissimilitudo; ut,  

Est finitimus Oratori Poëta. Aequalis Hectori.  
Veritati dissentaneum.   
3. Voluptas; ut, Jucundus omnibus.  
4. Submissio; ut, Parenti supplex.  
5. Relatio ad aliquid; ut,  

Otium tibi molestum erit.  
Invia virtuti nulla est via.   
6, Huc referuntur ex Con Praepositione composita; ut, Mihi cognatus.  
1. Obs. Quaedam tamen ex his quae Similitudinem significant Genitivo gaudent; ut,  

Domini similis es.  
Par hujus erat. Affinis sceleris vel sceleri.   
2. Obs. Communis, alienus, immunis, proprius, conscius, & superstes variis casibus serviunt; ut,  

Commune animantium omnium.  
Mors omnibus communis est.  
Hoc mihi tecum commune est.  
Alienum consilii. Alienus ambitioni.  
Alienus à Scevolae studiis.  
Immunis hujus mali. Omnibus immunis.  
Immunes ab illis malis sumus.  
Proprium est stultorum. Mihi proprium.  
Mihi nullius culpae conscius sum.  
Is conscius illi facinori fuit.  
Superstes dignitati suae vixit.  
Superstes omnium rerum.   
3. Obs. Natus, commodus, incommodus, utilis, inutilis, vehemens, aptus, ineptus, par, aequalis, interdum etiam Accusativo cum Praepositione junguntur; ut,  

Natus ad gloriam. Calcei ad pedes apti.  
Homo ad nullam partem utilis.  
Virtutes ipsae inter se aequales & pares. Cic.   
II. Verbalia in bilis accepta passiuè; ut,  

Multis ille bonis flebilis occidit,  
Nulli flebilior quàm tibi.    

§. VIII. Regula de Nominibus Accusativum regentibus.  
ADjectiva regunt Accusativum significantem magnitudinis mensuram; ut,  
Altus pedem. Latus manum.  
Crassus tres digitos. Septem pedes longus.  
Sed interdum regunt Genitivum; ut, Areae lat● pedum denum. Ablativum; ut, Fons latus pedibus tribus.   

§. IX. Regula de Nominibus Ablativum regentibus.  
A Blativum regunt.  
1. Comparativa (Nomina, Verba, & Adverbia) quum exponuntur per quàm, aut post se habent nomen significans mensuram excessûs; ut,  

Vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum.  
Nullum theatrum veritati conscientiâ majus est.  
Vno pede altior. Viribus praestare.   
1. Obs: Tantò, quantò, multò, paulò, nimiò, eò, quò, hòc, aetate, natu, utrique gradui apponuntur, ut,  

Longè caeteris peritior est, sed non multò melior.  
Quò quis indoctior, eò impudentior.  
Maximus aetate. Minimus natu.   
II. Dignus, indignus, praeditus, captus, contentus, extorris, fretus, ut,  

Dignus es odio.  
Indignum sapientis gravitate.  
Omni virtute praeditus. Captus oculis.  
Sorte tuâ contentus abi.  
Extorris suâ domo. Fretus tuâ clementiâ.   
Obs. Dignus & indignus interdum etiam Genitivum vindicant, ut, Militia operis digna tui.  
Magnorum non indignus avorum.  
III. Nomina diversitatis, Ablativum sibi cum Praepositione subjiciunt, ut, Aliud ab hoc. Alter ab illo.  
Et nonnunquam Dativum, ut huic diversum.  
IV. Adjectiva & verba quae ad copiam egestatémve pertinent, interdum Ablativo, interdum & genitivo gaudent, ut, Amor & melle & felle est foecundissimus.  

Res est soliciti plena timoris amor.  
A more abundans. Cares virtute.  
Dives nivei pecoris. Dives agris.  
Expers fraudis. Gratiâ beatus.  
Macte sis virtute. Integer vitae.   
1. Obs. Ex his quaedam junguntur Ablativo cum Praepositione, ut, Vacuus irae, irâ, ab irâ.  
V. Quodvis Nomen aut Verbum admittit Ablativum,  
1. Instrumenti, ut, Ense validus. Melior remis. Daemona non armis, sed morte subegit JESUS.  
2. Causae: ut, Pallidus irâ.  

Deteriores licentiâ.  
Invidus alterius rebus macrescit opimis.   
3. Circumstantiae, modi actionis aut rei; ut,  

Nomine Grammaticus, re barbarus.  
Troianus origine, Syrus natione.  
Jam veniet tacito curva senecta pede.   
1. Obs. Sed Ablativo caussae aut modi aliquando additur Praepositio; ut,  

Imparatus à pecuniâ. Cic.  
Summâ cum humanitate tractavit hominem.   
VI Adjectiva & Verba mercandi regunt Ablativum pretii; ut,  

Vilis viginti minis. Asse carus.  
Nec gemmis, nec purpurâ venale, nec auro.  
Multo sanguine ac vulneribus ea victoria stetit.  
Mercede docuit. Vili venit triticum.  
Addicere denario. Locare solido.  
Habitat decem minis.   
1. Obs. Haec tamen sine Substantivis posita, Verbis subjiciuntur in Genitivo; viz. Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris; as,  

Non vendo pluris quàm alii, sed minoris.  
Tanti valent res, quanti vendi possunt.   
N. B. Ablativus absolutê ponitur expresso Participio vel subaudito; ut,  

Rege veniente hostes fugerunt.  
Me duce.   
Et resolvitur per Dum, cùm, si, etc.  
VII. Adjectiva, & Verba Passiva, & Neutralia, significantia aliquam proprietatem vel passionem, possunt regere Accusativum, vel Ablativum, significantem partem in qua est proprietas aut passio; ut,  

Aeger pedes, vel pedibus. Aegrotat animo magis quàm corpore.  
Rubet capillos. Ruber crine.   
1. Obs. Sed pars affecta interdum in Genitivo ponitur; ut, O te felicem cerebri!  
Angis te animi.  
2. Obs. Graecae Phrases sunt:  

Caetera laetus. Caetera similis.  
Huic vocem colorem similis est.     

Cap. 3. De Regimine Pronominum.  
2. Pronominum.  
MEî, tuî, suî, nostrî, vestrî ponuntur cùm passio; sed Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, cùm actio vel possessio significatur; ut,  
Pars tuî. Pars tua. Imago nostrî. Imago nostra.  
Amor suî. Amor suus.  
1. Obs. Possessiva verò interdum pro Primitivis usurpantur; ut, Meâ caussâ fecit, i. e. meî.  
2. Obs. Nostrûm & vestrûm sequuntur Distributiva, Partitiva, & Comparativa, & Superlativa; ut, Aliquis vestrûm. Major vestrûm. Maximus natu nostrûm.  
3. Obs. Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, quosdam Genitivos post se recipiunt; viz. ipsius, solius, unius, duorum, trium, omnium, plurium, paucorum, & Genitivos Participiorum qui referuntur ad Primitivum in Possessivo inclusum; ut,  

Ex tuî ipsius animo conjecturam feceris.  
Nostros vidisti flentis ocellos.   
II. Ipse & idem omnibus personis adjungi possunt; ut  

Ego-ipse videbo. Idem perge facere.  
Ipse Plato dixit. Hic idem fecit.   
Idem regit aliquando Dativum; ut,  
Invitum qui servat idem facit occidenti.  
Sed frequentiùs Ablativum cum praepositione, ut, Idem cum illo.  
III. Ille eminentiam rei denotat; Iste verò contemptum, ut, Alexander ille. Iste homuncio.  
Hic ad posterius & propius antepositum; ille ad prius & remotius usitatissimè refertur; ut,  
Agricolae contrarium est Pastoris propositum; ille sructum è terra sperat; hic è pecore.   

Chap. 4. De Regimine Verborum.  
VErba regunt Nominativun Casum, §. X. Genitivum §. XI. Dativum §. XII. Accusativum §. XIII. Ablativum §. Xiu Quibus accidunt Regulae De variam constructionem habentibus. §. XV. De Modo infinito, Gerundiis, & Supinis. §. XVI. De tempore, Spatio, & loco. §. Xuii. De Impersonalibus. §. XVIII.  

§. X. Regula De Verbis Nominativum Regentibus.  
3. Verborum. cum 1. Nominativo.  
Verba Substantiva, passiva quaedam, & Verba gestûs, utrinque nominativum expetunt, ut,  

Deus est summum bonum.  
Fides Religionis nostrae fundamentum habetur.  
Malus Pastor dormit supinus.  
Hic evadet vir doctus.   
1. Obs: Omnia ferè Verba post se Nominativum habebunt Adjectivi nominis, quod cum supposito verbi, casu, genere, & numero concordat, ut,  

Terra manet immobilis. Scribo rarissimé.  
Boni discunt seduli. Loquor frequens.    

§. XI. Regula De Verbis Genitivum Regentibus.  
2. Genvo.  
GEnitivum regunt.  
I. Sum, quoties significat possessionem aut ad aliquid pertinere, ut,  

Haec domus est patris.  
Adolescentis est majores natu revereri.   
Boni Pastoris est tondere pecus non deglubere.  
1. Obs: At hi Nominativi meum, tuum, humanum, etc. usurpantur ubi officium aut munus subintelligi videtur per Ellipsin. ut,  
Non est meum contra Autoritatem Senatûs dicere.  
Humanum est irasci; Belluinum verò saevire.  
Regium est benefacere.  
II. Verba aestimandi.  

Parvi penditur probitas.  
Plurimi passim fit pecunia.  
Non hujus te facio, qui me pili aestimas.  
Aequi, boni consulo, vel facio.   
1. Obs. Aestimo Ablativum etiam adsciscit; ut,  

Magno virtus aestimanda est.  
Tribus denariis aestimavit.   
2. Obs. Valeo cum Genitivo, frequentiùs autem cum Accusativo, & Ablativo junctum reperitur; ut,  
Tanti valet. Valet duos asses, vel duobus assibus.  
3. Obs. Dicimus etiam, Pro nihilo puto, habeo, duco, etc.  
III. Verba accusandi, damnandi, monendi, & absolvendi, Genitivum criminis, vel poenae postulant; ut, Qui alterum incusat probri eum ipsum se intueri oportet.  

Socratem innocentissimum capitis condemnabunt.  
Admonuit me errati.  
Furti absolutus est.   
1. Obs. Vertitur hic Genitivus aliquando in Ablativum vel cum Praepositione, vel sine Praepositione; ut, Condemnabo te eodem crimine.  

Accusatur furti an stupri? Vtroque, vel de utroque.  
Putavi eâ de re admonendum esse te.   
IV. Satago, misereor, miseresco; ut  

Is rerum suarum satagit, Miserere laborum.  
Generis miseresce tui.   
1. Obs. At misereor & miseresco rariùs cum Dativo leguntur; ut,  
Huic misereor. Miseresce malis.  
V. Reminiscor, obliviscor, & memini; ut,  
Datae fidei reminiscitur. Proprium est stultorum, aliorum vitia cernere, oblivisci suorum.  
Faciam ut meî semper memineris.  
1. Obs. Et haec Accusativum etiam desiderant; ut,  
Reminiscor lectionem. Obliviscor carmen.  
VI Quaedam etiam more Graecorum Genitivum admittunt; ut,  

Desine mollium querelarum. Hor.  
Tempus desistere pugnae. Virg.  
Dignus est omni malo qui erubescit fortunae. Curt.    

§. XII. Regula de Verbis Dativum regentibus.  
3. Dativo.  
DAtivum regunt,  
Omnia verba acquisitiuè posita; ut,  

Huic habeo non tibi.  
Non omnibus dormio.  
Mihi istic nec seritur, nec metitur.   
Atque huic regulae appendent Verba,  
1. Significantia Commodum aut Incommodum; ut,  

Non potes mihi commodare nec incommodare.  
Bonis nocet qui malis parcit.   
2. Comparandi; ut,  

Parvis componere magna.  
Fratri se adaequavit.   
1. Obs. His autem interdum additur Accusativus aut Ablativus cum Praepositione; ut,  

Si ad eum comparatur nihil est.  
Comparo Virgilium cum Homero.   
3. Dandi & reddendi, ut, Fortuna multis nimiùm dedit,, nulli satis.  
Ingratus est qui gratiam bene merenti non reponit.  
4. Promittendi ac solvendi, ut, Haec tibi promitto.  
Aes alienum mihi numeravit.  
5. Imperandi aut nuntiandi, ut,  

Imperat, aut servit collecta pecunia cuique.  
Quid de quoque viro, aut cui dicas saepe caveto.   
6. Fidendi, ut, Mulieri nè credas, nè mortuae quidem. Hoc tuae mando fidei.  
7. Obsequendi & repugnandi, ut,  

Semper obtemperat pius filius patri.  
Ignavis precibus fortuna repugnat.   
8. Minandi & irascendi, ut.  

Vtrique mortem minatus est.  
Irascor tibi.   
9 Sum, cum compositis, praeter possum, ut,  

Vrbi pater est, Vrbique maritus.  
Multa petentibus desunt multa.   
Obs. Item Sum & suppetit pro habeo, ut,  

Velle suum cuique est.  
Sunt nobis mitia poma.  
Pauper non est cui rerum suppetit usus.   
2. Obs. Sum cum multis aliis geminum adsciscit Dativum; ut,  

Exitio est avidis mare nautis.  
Rex pius est Reipublicae ornamento.  
Speras tibi laudi fore, quod mihi vitio vertis.   
10. Composita cum Adverbiis Satis, bene, malè, & Praepositionibus, prae, ad, con, sub, ante, post, ob, in, inter, ut,  

Benefecit multis, malefecit nulli.  
Neminem tibi antepono.  
Auditis aliquid novus adjicit Autor.   
1. Obs. Pauca ex his mutant Dativum aliquoties in alium casum; ut  

Praestat ingenio alius alium.  
Interdico tibi aquâ & igni.   
2. Obs. Sed Praeeo, praecedo, praecurro, & quaedam alla Composita cum prae Accusativo potiùs junguntur, ut,  
Praeibis me.  
3. Obs. Saepe fit Pleonasmus sive redundantia Dativorum Mihi, tibi, sibi, ut,  
Suo sibi hunc jugulo gladio.  
4. Obs. Aliquando Dativus figuratè ponitur pro Accusativo cum Praepositione, & à nonnullis dicitur octavus casus, ut,  

It clamor caelo pro ad caelum.  
Solstitium pecori defendite, pro à pecore.    

§. XIII. Regula de Verbis Accusativum Regentibus.  
4. Accusativo.  
Verba Transitiva exigunt Accusativum, ut,  

Deum time. Regem honora.  
Filii est, revereri parentes.  
Torva Leaena lupum sequitur, lupus ipse capellam.   
1. Obs. Verba absoluta Accusativum admittunt cognatae significationis & aliquando Ablativum, ut,  

Vivo vitam vitâ diu vivere.  
Endymionis somnum dormis  
Gaudebant gaudium valdè magnum ..  
Longam ire viam. Ire rectâ viâ.  
Morte obiit repentinâ.   
2. Obs. Quaedam etiam figuratè Accusativum habent, ut,  

Olet hircum. Sonat hominem.  
Eadem peccat. Curios simulant & Bacchanalia vivunt.   
3. Verba Rogandi, docendi, vestiendi, duplicem regunt Accusativum, unum personae, alterum rei, ut,  

Tu modò posce Deum veniam.  
Multa hominem fames docet.  
Induit se calceos, quos priùs exuerat.   
4. Sed interdum mutant alterum Accusativum in Dativum vel Ablativum, cum, vel sine Praepositione; ut,  
Induo te tunicâ, vel tibi tunicam. Senatum edocet de itinere. Veniam oremus ab ipso.   

§. XIV. Regula de Verbis Ablativum regentibus.  
5. Ablativo.  
ABlativum regunt. De quibus in Regimine Nominum supra dictum est, p. 211. I. Quodvis Verbum, modò iste Ablativus sit 1. Instrumenti. 2. Caussae. 3. Modi Actionis. II. Verba Pretii. III. Verba proprietatem vel passionem significantia. IV. Verba Abundandi, & Implendi.  
V. Certa quaedam Deponentia & Neutra, viz.  
Fungor, ut Qui adipisci veram gloriam volunt Justitiae fungantur officiis. Fruor, Optimum est alienâ i nsaniâ frui. Vtor, In re malâ, animo si bono utare, juvat. Vescor, Vescor carnibus. i Nitor, Nitor meis viribus. Virtute decet non sanguine n ti. Dignor Haud equidem tali me dignor honore. Prosequor, Prosequor te amore. Muto, Mutat quadrata rotundis. Munero, Regni eum societate muneravit. Supersedeo, Exemplorum multitudine supersedendum est. Communico, Communicabo te semper mensâ meâ. Afficio. Afficio te gaudio, cum paucis aliis.  
VI Verba quae vim comparationis obtinent, ut,  

Praefero hunc multis gradibus.  
Paulo intervallo illum superat.  
Deforme est ab iis virtutibus superari, quos dignitate praestas.   
VII. Verba accipiendi, distandi & auferendi Ablativum cum Praepositione optant, ut,  

Audivi ex multis. Longè distat à nobis.  
Eripui te à malis.   
1. Obs. Vertitur hic Ablativus aliquando in Dativum. Eripuit illi vitam.  
VIII. Mereor Ablativo adhaeret cum Praepositione De, ut, De me nunquam bene meritus es.  
Catilina pessimè de Republica meruit.  
IX. Verba passiva admittunt Ablativum cum Praepositione, & interdum Dativum, ut,  

Virgilius legitur à me.  
A cane non magno saepe tenetur aper.  
Honesta bonis viris, non occulta, petuntur.   
1s Obs. Caeteri casus manent in passivis qui fuerunt activorum, ut,  

Accusaris à me furti.  
Habeberis ludibrio.   
2. Obs. Vapulo, veneo, liceo, exsulo, fio, Passivorum constructionem habent; i. e. Ablativum admittunt cum Praepositione, vel Dativum, ut,  

A Praeceptore vapulabis.  
Malo à cive spoliari, quàm ab hoste venire.  
Quid fiet ab illo? virtus parvo pretio licet omnibus.  
Cur à conviviis exsulat Philosophia?    

§. XV. De Verbis variam constructionem habentibus.  
Cum diversa significatione.  
EIdem verbo diversi casus diversae rationis apponi possunt, ut,  
Dedit mihi vestem pignori, te presente, propriâ manu.  
II. Haec variam habent constructionem,  

1. In eâdem significatione, viz. 

1. Adulo tibi. Adulor te.  
2. Aspersit 

mihi labem.  
me labe.    
3. Attendo 

tibi,  
te.    
4. Consentio 

tibi,  
te cum.    
5. Dissentio tibi, à te Dissideo tecum.  
6 Dono 

tibi librum,  
te libro.    
7. Illudo 

tibi,  
te.    
8 Impertio 

tibi fortunas meas,  
te fortunis meis.    
9 Induo 

tibi tunicam,  
te tunicâ.    
10. Instravit 

equo penulam.  
equum penulâ.    
11. Interdico tibi hanc rem, vel te hâc re.  
12. Medicor 

gnato tuo,  
istum morbum.    
13. Moderor 

affectui,  
affectum.    
14. Obtrecto 

laudem,  
laudi.    
15. Praestolor 

tibi,  
te.    
16. Prohibeo 

te domo.  
tibi domum.    
17. Subeo 

tectum,  
tecto.    
2. In diversâ significatione. 

1. Accedo 

tibi, i. e. Assentior.  
te, i. e. Adeo.    
2. Aemulor 

tibi, i. e. Invideo.  
te, i. e. imitor.    
3. Ausculto 

tibi, i. e. Obedio.  
te, i. e. Audio.    
4. Caveo tibi, i. e. periculum à te averto. te, i. e. declino. à te, de te, i. e. do aliquid ad cautionem.  
5. Cedo 

tibi.  
urbe.  
librum.    
6. Consulo 

tibi, i. e. consilium do, vel prospicio.  
te, i. e. consilium à te peto.  
in te, i. e. statuo.    
7. Contingit 

mihi, i. e. accidit.  
me, i. e. tangit:    
8. Cupio, 

tibi, i. e. faveo.  
te, i. e. expete.    
9 Deficit 

mihi, i. e. deest.  
me, i. e. destituit.  
à me, i. e. in alteram partem transit.    
10. Do, tibi literas, i. e. ut ad aliquem feras. Mitto, ad te literas, i. e. ut legas.  
11. Foenero, tibi, i. e. do ad usuram. Foeneror, abs te, i. e. accipio ad usuram.  
12. Laboro 

febri.  
de salute publicâ.    
13. Metuo, Timeo, te, vel à te. i e. nè mihi noce●s. Formido tibi, vel de te, i. e. sollicitus sum.  
14. Memini tuî, te. de te.  
15. Potior urbis. Potior voto.  
16. Recipio 

tibi, i. e. promitto.  
te, i. e. accipio,  
domum, i. e. confero.    
17. Refero 

tibi, i. e. narro.  
ad te, i. e. propono.    
18. Renuntio 

muneri, i. e. recuso.  
consulem, i. e. declaro.    
19 Solvo 

tibi, i. e. satisfacio.  
te, i. e. libero.    
20. Studeo. 

huic, i. e. operam do.  
hoc, i. e. cupio.    
21. Vaco 

nugis, i. e. operam do.  
ad nugas, i. e. otium habeo.  
culpâ, i. e. careo.         
Vacat locus.  
Caetera docebit usus.   

§. XV. Regula de Infinitivo Modo.  
De Infinito modo.  
I. VErba Infinita quibusdam tum Verbis tum Adjectivis subjiciuntur; ut,  

Vis fieri dives Pontice? nîl cupias.  
Et erat tum dignus amari.  
Audax omnia perpeti. Patiens vocari.   
1. Obs. Pro Nominativo Accusativum ante se statuunt; ut, Jubeo te abire.  
Gaudeo te bene valere.  
Atque resolvuntur per quòd & ut; ut, Jubeo ut tu abeas. Gaudeo quòd tu bene valeas.  
2. Obs: Utrinque eosdem casus habet; ut, Hypocrita cupit videri justus, vel se videri justum. Natura beatis omnibus esse dedit si quis cognoverit uti.  
3. Obs. Ponuntur interdum absolutè per Ellipsin; ut,  
Haeccine fieri flagitia? i. e. decet.  
Agnus trepidare. i e. coepit.   

§. XVII. Regula de Gerundiis.  
De Gerundiis. Di. Do. Dum  
GErundia & Supina regunt casus suorum Verborum; ut,  
Vtendum est aetate. Auditum concionem.  
Et se habent ut nomina utriusque numeri.  
In Di tanquam Genitivi Casûs Dum Accusativi Do Ablativi ut, Occasio studendi. Aptus ad studendum. Fessus studendo.  
Huic est quòd,  
1. Gerundia in Di pendent à quibusdam tum Substantivis tum Adjectivis; ut,  

Non est narrandi locus.  
Amor sceleratus habendi. Certus eundi.  
Peritus jaculandi. Illorum videndi gratiâ.  
Licentia deripiendi pomorum.   
1. Obs. Infinitivus aliquando loco hujus Gerundii ponitur; ut, Peritus medicari.  
2. Gerundia in Do pendent ab his Praepositionibus A, ab, abs, de, è, ex, cum, in, pro; ut,  

Ignavi à discendo citò deterrentur.  
Rectè scribendi ratio cum loquendo, conjuncta est.   
1. Obs. Ponuntur & absque Praepositione; ut, Docendo discimus.  
3. Gerundia in Dum pendent ab his Praepositionibus, inter, ante, ad, ob, propter; ut,  
Inter coenandum hilares este.  
Christus moriebatur propter nos redimendum.  
1. Obs. Cùm significatur necessitas ponuntur citra Praepositionem, addito Verbo est cum Dativo expresso vel subintellecto, ut,  
Abeundum est mihi. Orandum est ut sit mens sana in corpore sano.  
N. B. Saepe vertuntur Gerundia in Participalia in Dus, quae suis Substantivis conveniunt; ut,  

Legendis veteribus proficies.  
Ad Accusandos homines duci praemio proximum latrocinio est.    

§. XVIII. Regula de Supinis.  
De Supinis. Vm. U.  
I. PRius Supinum sequitur Verbum aut Participium significans motum ad locum; ut,  
Spectatum veniunt.  
Cur te is perditum?  
1. Obs. Illa verò Do venum, do filiam nuptum, latentem habent motum.  
2. Poëticè dicunt, Eo visere. Vado videre.  
II. Posterius sequitur nomina Adjectiva; ut, Facile factu. Turpe dictu.   

§. XIX. Regula de Tempore.  
De Tempore.  
FRequentiùs usurpantur  
1. In Ablativo, quae significant partem temporis, i. e. quando; ut,  

Nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapit.  
Nocte vigilas, luce dormis.   
2. In Accusativo, quae durationem temporis denotant, i. e. quamdiu; ut,  

Hyemem totam stertis:  
Noctes atque dies patet atri janua Ditis.   
1. Obs. Interdum additur Praepositio; ut,  
Ante tres menses. Per tres annos. In paucis dicbus. Circa id aetatis. Id tempus. per vel sub.   

§. XX. Regula De spatio Loci.  
De Spatio.  
SPatium loci in Accusativo effertur, interdum & in Ablativo; ut,  

A rectâ conscientiâ transversum pedem nè discedas.  
Nec multis inter se passibus absunt.    

§. XXI. Regula de Loco.  
De Loco.  
NOmina loci, cùm apponuntur Verbis significantibus actionem aut motum,  
1. In loco, ad locum, à loco, aut per locum; si sint nomina Appellativa vel nomina majorum locorum viz. Regionum etc. adduntur ferè cum Praepositione; ut, In foro versatur.  

Vivo in anglia. Ad templum abiit.  
Venit per Galliam In Italiam.  
Profectus est ex oppido.   
1. Obs. Sed omittitur aliquando Praepositio; ut Italiam petiit.  
2. In loco aut ad locum (si sint propria nomina Urbium aut oppidorum) primae vel secundae Declinationis & Singularis numeri, Genitivum; sin tertiae declinationis & pluralis duntaxat numeri, Ablativum admittunt; ut,  

Quid Romae faciam? Londini vixit.  
Athenis natus est. Romae Tibur amo ventosus, Tibure Romam.   
3. Ad locum (si sint propria) ponuntur in Accusativo, ut,  

Eo Londinum ad merces emendas.  
Concessi Cantabrigiam.   
IV. A loco aut per locum, (si sint propria) ponuntur in Ablativo; ut  
Profectus est Londino (vel per Londinum) Cantabrigiam. Discessit Londino.  
Obs. Humus, militia, bellum, Domus, & Rus propriorum sequuntur formam; ut,  

Domi bellique simul viximus.  
Rure educatus est.  
Ego rus ibo. Ite domum.  
Rure reversus est.  
Nuper domo exiit.    

§. XXII. De Regimine Impersonalium.  
De Impersonalibus. 1. Activis. 2. Passives.  
1. IMpersonalia activae vocis regunt.  
I. Genitivum, viz. Interest, refert, & est pro interest, ut, Interest omnium rectè agere.  
Refert multùm Christianae Reipublicae Episcopos doctos & pios esse.  
1. Obs. Praeter Ablativos meâ, tuâ, suâ, nostrâ, vestrâ, & cujâ, as,  

Tuâ refert teipsum nôsse.  
Vestrâ parvi interest.   
II. Dativum, viz. Accidit, certum est, contingit, constat, confert, etc. quae acquisitiuè ponuntur; ut,  
Peccare nemini licet. Emori per virtutem mihi praestat, quàm per dedecus vivere.  
Stat mihi casus renovare omnes.  
III. Accusativum 1. solum, viz. Juvat, decet, delectat, oportet, ut, Dedecet viros muliebriter rixari.  
2. Cum Praepositione Ad, viz. attinet, pertinet, spectas.  
Ad te attinet. Spectat ab omnes bene vivere.  
3. Cum Genitivo, viz. Poenitet, taedet, miseret, miserescit, pudet, piget, ut,  

Suae quemcunque fortunae poenitet.  
Taedet me vitae.   
II. Impersonalia passivae vocis similes cum Personalibus passivis casus obtinent; ut,  

Mihi istic nec seritur, nec metitur.  
Itur Athenas. Dormitur totam noctem.  
Ab hostibus constanter pugnatur.   
I. Obs. Sed & horum casus interdum non exprimuntur; ut, Quid agitur in ludo literario? Studetur.    

Cap. 5. De Regimine Participiorum.  
5. Participiorum.  
PArticipia regunt casus suorum Verborum; ut, Fruiturus amicis.  
Consulens tibi. Septem vocati sapientes.  
1. Obs. Sed cùm fiunt nomina Genitivum postulant; ut, Alieni appetens. Cupientissimus tuî.  
2. Obs. Quae in Dus verò Dativum; as,  
Mihi exorandus est.  
3. Obs. Exosus, & perosus, actiuè significantia regunt Accusativum; ut  
Exosus saevitiam.  
Passiuè verò Dativum; ut,  
Exosus Deo & sanctis.  
4. Obs. Pertaesus nunc Genitivum, nunc Accusativum regit; ut Pertaesus thalami. Ignaviam suam.  
5. Obs. Natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creätus, ortus, editus, in Ablativum feruntur; ut,  

Nate Deâ.  
Bona bonis prognata parentibus.  
Quo sanguine cretus?    

Cap. 6. De Regimine Adverbiorum.  
6. Adverbiorum. 1. Cum Casu.  

§. I. De Adverbiis quae casus regunt.  
ADverbia regunt,  
Nominativum, viz. En & ecce, demonstrandi; ut, En Priamus. Ecce duo altaria.  
1. Obs. Exprobrantis verò Accusativo junguntur; ut, En habitum. Ecce alterum.  
2. Genitivum, viz. Adverbia loci temporis & quantitatis; ut, Vbi gentium. Quò terrarum. Tunc temporis. Abunde fabularum. Satis verborum. Partim virorum.  
1. Obs. Sic & ergô pro caussâ, ut, Illius ergô.  
2. Obs. Pridie & postridie Genitivum aut Accusativum regunt; ut, Pridie ejus diei.  
Postridie Kalendas, sive Kalendarum.  
3. Obs. Minimè gentium peculiaris phrasis est.  
3. Dativum, viz. quae derivantur à Nominibus Dativum regentibus; ut, Venit obviàm illi.  
Canit similiter huic. Sibi inutiliter vivit.  
1. Obs. Sunt & hi Dativi Adverbiales Tempori, luci, vesperi; ut, Tempori surgendum. Vesperi cubandum. Luci laborandum.  
4. Accusativum Praepositionis unde sunt profecta; ut, Propiùs urbem. Proximè Hispaniam.  
N. B. Plùs, minùs, ampliùs, Nominativo, Genitivo, Accusativo & Ablativo, junguntur; ut,  

Plus trecenta vehicula. Plùs quinquaginta hominum.  
Plus quinginta passus. Plus eo.    

§. II. De Adverbiis quae Modos regunt.  
Cum Modo.  
UBi, postquam, & cùm, Indicativum regunt; ut, Cùm faciam vitulâ pro frugibus, ipse venito.  
Et Subjunctivum; ut,  
Cùm canerem Reges, & praelia, Cynthius aurem vellit.  
Donec pro quousque regit Indicativum; ut, Cogere donec oves stabulis numerúmque referre jussit.  
Aut Subjunctivum; ut,  
Donec ea aqua, quam adjeceris, decocta sit.  
Donec pro quamdiu regit Indicativum; ut,  
Donec eram sospes.  
Dum de re imperfectâ, regit Indicativum; ut,  
Dum apparatur virgo.  
Dum quod te dignum est facis.  
Dum pro quamdiu, dummodo, & donec, regit Subjunctivum; ut, Dum prosim tibi.  
Tertia dum Latio regnantem viderit aestas.  
Quoad pro quamdiu, Indicativum regit; ut,  
Quoad exspectes contubernalem.  
Aut Subjunctivum; ut, Quoad possem & liceret.  
Quoad pro donec regit Subjunctivum; ut,  
Omnia integra servabo, quoad exercitus huc mittatur.  
Simulac, Simulatque Indicativum regunt; ut,  
Simulac belli patiens erat.  
Vel Subjunctivum; ut, Simulatque adoleverit aetas.  
Quemadmodum, ut, utcunque, sicut, regunt Indicativum; ut, Vt salutabis, ità & resalutaberis.  
Aut Subjunctivum; ut, Vt sementem feceris, ità & metes.  
Vt pro postquam Indicativum regit; ut.  
Vt ventum est in Urbem.  
Quasi, ceu, tanquam, perinde acsi, haud secus acsi, regunt Subjunctivum; ut,  
Quasi non nôrimus nos inter nos.  
Atque haec copulant similes casus; ut,  

Novi hominem tanquam te.  
Arridet mihi quasi amico.   
Nè Prohibendi Imperativum regit; ut,  
Nè saevi tantopere.  
Aut Subjunctivum; ut, Hic nebulo magnus est, nè metuas.    

Cap. 7. De Regimine Conjunctionum.  
7. De Conjunctionibus quae copulant.  

§. I. De Conjunctionibus quae Copulant.  
COnjunctiones Copulativae & Disjunctivae, cum his quatuor, quàm, nisi, praeterquam, an, similes omnino casus, & aliquoties similes modos & tempora conglutinant; ut, Nox, & amor, vinúmque nihil moderabile suadent.  

Est minor natu quàm tu.  
Nemini nisi sibi placet.  
Petrus & Joannes precabantur & docebant in templo.   
1. Obs. Saepe verò dictionum aliqua privata ratio diversos casus, modos, & tempora postulant; ut,  

Emi librum centussi & pluris.  
Vixi Romae & Venetiis  
Tibi gratias egi, atque agam dum vivo.   
2. Obs. Cùm & tum, item tum geminatum similes casus copulant;  
Amplectitur cùm eruditos omnes, tum in primis Marcellum. Odit tum literas, tum virtutem.   

§. I. De Conjunctionibus quae Modos regunt.  
Regunt Modos.  
ETsi, tametsi, etiamsi, quanquam, in principio Orationis regunt Indicativum; ut,  
Etsi nihil novi afferebatur.  
Sed in medio Orationis, Subjunctivum; ut,  
Me culpas; etiamsi ipse feceris.  
Quamvis, & licèt frequentiùs Subjunctivum regunt; ut,  
Ipse licèt venias.  
Ni, nisi, si, siquidem, quòd, quia, quàm, postquam, posteaquam, ubi pro postquam, nunquam, priusquam,  
regunt Indicativum, aut, ut, Quòd tu rediisti, Subjunctivum, (vel redieris incolumis, gaudeo. Si regit Indicativum; ut, Si vales, bene est. & Subjunctivum; ut, Si negaveris, vapulabis.  
Si pro quamvis, Subjunctivum; ut,  
Non; si me obsecret.  
Quando, quandoquidem, & quoniam regunt Indicativum; ut,  
Dicite, quandoquidem in molli consedimus herbâ.  
Quippe regit Indicativum; ut, Quippe aegrotat.  
Quippe qui, Indicativum & Subjunctivum; ut, Quippe qui bis pejeravit, sive pejeraverit.  
Qui, cùm Quippe subintelligitur: habens vim Causalem, Subjunctivum; ut,  
Stultus es qui huic credas.  
Cùm pro quamvis, quandoquidem, & quoniam, regit Subjunctivum; ut,  
Cùm sis aptus.  
Nè, an, num Interrogandi, regunt indicativum; ut, Superátne?  
Dubitandi, Subjunctivum; ut,  
Vise num redierit.  
Vt, caussalis, & pro nè, non, pro quanquam, & utpote Subjunctivum regit; ut,  

Vt unà esset tecum.  
Metuo ut substet.  
Vt omnia contingant, quae volo.  
Vt qui toties fèfelleris.   
Vt pro postquam, quemadmodum, sicut, & Interrogativum regit Indicativum; ut,  

Vt ab urbe discessi.  
Perge facere, ut facis.  
Vt est dementia. Vt valct?     

Cap. 8. De Regimine Praepositionum.  
8. Praepositionum.  

TRiginta Praepositiones Accusativum regunt; viz.  
1. Ad Ecclesiam.  
2. Apud forum.  
3. Ante obitum.  
4. Adversos duos.  
5. Adversùm te.  
6. Cis Tamesin.  
7. Citra fluvium.  
8. Circa oppidum.  
9 Circùm montem.  
10. Circiter duo millia.  
11. Contra stimulum.  
12. Erga populum.  
13. Extra aedes.  
14. Inter calicom & labrum.  
15. Intra domum.  
16. Infra omnes.  
17. Juxta fontem.  
18. Ob praemium.  
19 Penès illum.  
20. Per campos.  
21. Ponè tergum.  
22 Post mortem.  
23 Praeter casam.  
24 Propter vicinum.  
25 Secundùm Aristotelem.  
26 Secus decursus aquarum.  
27 Supra captum.  
28 Trans Alps.  
29 Londinum versús.  
30 Vltra Indos.   
Duodecim verò regunt Ablativum, viz.  

1 A Deo.  
2 Ab inimico.  
3 Abs quovis.  
4 Absque pecuniâ.  
5. Coram praeceptore.  
6 Cum damno.  
7 De nugis.  
8 E fonte.  
9 Ex altâ rupe.  
10 Prae omnibus.  
11 Sine pane.  
12 Pro pauperibus.   

III. Quinque regunt Accusativum & Ablativum. 

1 Clam patrem, patre.  
2 In tectum. tecto.  
3 Sub noctem, nocte.  
4 Super lapidem, lapide.  
5 Subter terram, terra.     
Quibus addas Tenùs; ut,  
Pube tenús. Pectoribus tenús.  
Aurium tenús.  
1 Obs. Praepositio saepe subauditur; ut,  
Exspecto hodie, aut 
* Ad.  summum cras.  
Apparuit 
† Sub.  humanâ specie.  
2 Obs. Saepe verò redundat; ut, Abstine à vitiis.  
Amicos ad vocabo ad hanc rem.  
3 Obs. Praepositio in Compositione eundem nonnunquam casum regit quem & extra compositionem regebat; ut,  
Praetereo te insalutatum. Decedo magistratu.  
4 Obs. Limen exire. Cursu praevertere ventos, etc. videntur singularia.   

Cap. 9 De Regimine Interjectionum.  
9 Interjectionum.  
QUaedam Interjectionum regunt casus; viz.  
1. O Exclamantis Nominativum, Accusativum, & Vocativum; ut,  
O festus dies! O fortunatos agricolas! O formose puer! Vocantis verò Vocativum tantùm; ut,  
Huc ades ô Galataea!  
2. Heus & ohe vocativum; ut,  
Heus sire! Ohe libelle!  
3. Pro & proh, ah & vah, Accusativum & Vocativum; ut, Proh Deûm atque hominum fidem!  
Proh sancte Jupiter! Ah me miserum! Vah inconstantiam! Ah virgo infelix! Vah scelus!  
4. Heu Nominativum, Dativum, & Accusativum, ut,  
Heu Pietas.  
Heu stirpem invisam. Heu misero mihi.  
5. Hem & apage Accusativum; ut, Hem astutias.  
Hem Davum tibi. Apage istiusmodi salutem.  
6. Hei & vae Dativum; ut, Hei mihi.  
Vae tibi.  
1 Obs. Interjectiones non rarò absolutè & sine casu ponuntur; ut,  
Hei vereor. Quae (malùm) dementia?  
2 Obs. Saepe etiam subintelliguntur; ut, Me miserum. Facinus indignum. Credo vos mirari, judices.   

Cap. 10. De Figuris dictionis.  
De Figuris, 1. Dictionis.  
FIgura est novatâ arte aliquâ dicendi forma, sive mutatio formae dictionis aut orationis à communi joquendi consuetudine, idque bonorum scriptorum autoritate.  
Est autem Figura duplex, 1. Dictionis: quae Etymologiae accidit. 2. Constructionis. Syntaxi  
Figura dictionis, (sive Etymologica) est quae dictionis formam aliquo modo mutat; ejus hae sunt praecipuae species.  
1. Prosthesis, (sive adjectio) est appositio literae vel syllabae ad principium dictionis; ut, Gnatus pro natus, tetuli pro tuli.  
2. Aphaeresis, (sive detractio) est ablatio literae vel syllabae à principio dictionis; ut, Ruit pro eruit, temnere pro contemnere.  
3. Epenthesis, (sive insertio) est interpositio literae vel syllabae in medio dictionis; ut, relligio pro religio, Induperator pro Imperator.  
4. Syncope, (sive concisio) est ablatio literae vel syllabae à medio dictionis; ut, Abiît pro abivit, dîxti pro dixisti.  
5. Paragoge, (sive productio) est appositio literae vel syllabae ad finem dictionis; ut, Dicier pro dici, emorier pro emori.  
6. Apocope, (sive abscissio) est ablatio literae vel syllabae à fine dictionis; ut, Ingenî pro ingenii.  
7. Diaeresis, (sive divisio) est divisio unius syllabae in duas; ut, Auläi pro Aulae, evolüisse pro evolvisse.  
8. Synaeresis, (sive complexio) est contractio duarum vocalium (quae ad diversas syllabas pertinent) in unam syllabam; ut, Thesei pro Thesei, uêmens pro vehemens.  
9 Metathesis, (sive trajectio) est transpositio literae vel syllabae; ut, Pistris pro pristis.  
10. Antithesis, sive Antistoechon, (sive oppositio) est positio litèrae pro litera; ut, Olli pro illi.  
11. Tmesis, est dissectio vocis compositae, cujus partibus alia interponitur; ut, Quae mihi cunque placent.  
12. Enallage, (sive Antimeria) partes Orationis, earúmque Accidentia alia pro aliis ponit; ut, Populum latè regem, i. e. regnantem. Agnus trepidare, pro trepidabat.  
13. Archaïsinus, est vetus & jam obsoletus loquendi mos; ut, Valdè tonit, pro tonuit. Tam nulli consili. pro nullius consilii. Operam abuti.  
14. Metaplasmus, (sive transformatio) est quaevis mutatio vocis; ut, Agreste pro agresti.   

Cap. 11. De Figuris Constructionis.  
2. Constructions.  
FIgura Syntaxeos, sive Constructionis, est quae orationis structuram aliquo modo mutat. Ejus Species sunt,  
1. Appositio, est duorum vel plurium Substantivorum ejusdem casûs conjunctio; ut, Flumen Rhenus. Vrbs Athenae. M. T. C.  
Fit autem caussâ, 1. Restringendae generalitatis; ut, Animal equus. 2. Tollendae aequivocationis; ut, Canis, astrum. 3. Ad proprietatem attribuendam; ut, Erasmus vir exactissimo judicio.  
2. Syllepsis, est comprehensio indignioris generis vel personae sub digniore; ut,  

Ego & frater sumus candidi.  
Mars & Venus, impliciti laqueis, nudus uterque jacet.   
3. Prolepsis, est pronuntiatio quaedam rerum summaria; ut, Duae aquilae volaverunt, haec ab Oriente, illa ab Occidente. Populus vivit, alii in penuriâ, alii in deliciis. Alter alterius onera portate. Curemus aequam uterque partem.  
4. Zeugma, est Verbi vel Adjectivi, ad diversa Supposita reductio, ad unum quidem expressè, ad alterum verò per supplementum; ut,  

Joannes fuit piscator & Petrus.  
Maritus & uxor est irata.   
5. Synthesis, est Oratio congrua sensu non voce; ut, Gens armati ruunt. Vterque laesi sumus. Anser foeta. Duo millia caesi.  
6. Antiptôsis, est positio casûs pro casu; ut, Omne genus elegantiá, i. e. omnis generis. Idne estis autores, i. e. ejus.  
7. Synecdoche est, eùm id quod partis est, attribuitur toti; ut, aethiop's albus dentes. Saucius frontem, vel fronte. Flores, inscripti nomina regum.  
8. Elleipsis, est defectio vocis in Oratione; ut,  
Memini * videre, i. e. * me.  
Ego continuò * mecum, i. e. * cogitabam.  
9 Pleonasmus, est abundantia vocis in Oratione supra necessitatem; ut,  

Vidi his oculis.  
Suo sibi hunc jugulo gladio.   
10. Asyndeton, est Conjunctionum in Oratione defectus; ut, Velis, nolis, fiet.  
Ede, bibe, lude.  
11. Polysyndeton est Conjunctionum in Oratione redundantia; ut,  
Somnus, & vinum, & epulae, & scorta, & balneae corpora atque animos enervant.  
12. Anastrophe, est cùm Praepositio suo casui postponitur; ut,  
Te penès imperium.  
13. Synchysis, est ordo Verborum confusus; ut,  
Namque ¹ pilâ ⁷ lippis ³ inimicum ² & ⁴ ludere ⁶ crudis 5  
14. Hypallage, est mutua casuum permutatio; ut,  
Dare classibus Austros.  
15. Hellenismus, sive Graecismus est recessus à Latinâ consuetudine in imitationem Graecorum; ut,  
Noli pugnare duobus, i. e. contra duos.  
Caeterae quae ad ornatum magis Orationis, quâm structuram ejus spectant, à Rhetoricis inquirendae sunt.    

LIB. IU. DE PROSODIA.  
IV. Prosodia. agit de  
PROSODIA est quarta pars Grammatices quae rectam vocum pronuntiationem tradit.  
Recta pronuntiatio est, quae observat in unaquamque voce Spiritum, Tonum, & Tempus Syllabarum.  
Dicendum ergò in Prosodiâ de 1. Spiritibus, & Cap. 1. 2. Tono, sive Accentibus. 3. Tempore, sive Quantitate Syllabarum, Cap. 2. 3.  

Cap. 1. De Spiritibus & Tonis, sive Accentibus.  
1. Spiritibus. 2. Tonīs.  
1. SPiritus est ratio proferendi syllabam cum spiritu, estque,  
Vel Asper, quo asperè profertur syllaba; ut, Hamus, homo. Lenis, quo syllaba leniter profertur; ut, Amo, omnis.  
2. Tonus, sive Accentus est ratio pronuntiandi syllabam, eandem elevando vel deprimendo; ut, Probitátem, vituperáre.  
Est autem Accentus triplex, 1. Acutus, qui syllabam acuit, sive attollit, & notatur virgulâ obliquâ in dextram asscendente ('). 2. Gravis, qui syllabam gravat sive deprimit, & notatur virgulâ obliquâ in dextram descendente (`). 3. Circumflexus, qui syllabam longiori morâ effert, pariter attollens cum acuto, & deprimens cum gravi, & signatur notâ ex acuto & gravi conflatâ ().  
Tonorum regulae sunt tres.  
1. Monosyllaba dictio, brevis, aut Positione longa, acuitur; ut, Mél, párs; at Naturâ longa Circumflectitur; ut, Spês, flôs.  
2. In Dissyllabâ dictione, si prior longa fuerit naturâ, & posterior brevis, prior Circumflectitur; ut, Lûna, mûsa; in caeteris verò acuitur; ut, Bónus, Déus, sólers.  
3. Dictio Polysyllaba, si penultimam longam habet, sequente longâ, penultimam acuit; ut, Libértas; sequente verò brevi, circumflectit penultimam; ut, Amâre. Românus.  
Sin brevem habet penultimam, acuit antepenultimam; ut, Dominus, Póntifex.  
Caeterae omnes syllabae in Polysyllabis gravantur, etsi non notentur; ut, Celeberrimus.  
1 Obs. Composita à Fácio penultimam acuunt; ut, Benefácis, malefácis.  
2 Obs. Composita à Fis, fit, ultimam acuunt; ut, Calefit, malefit.  
3. Obs. Grammatici circumflexum cum acuto saepe confundunt, quòd ab eo vix prolatione discernitur.  
Quinque sunt quae Tonorum regulas perturbant, five Tonos mutant.  
I. Differentia, cujus caussâ  
1. Quaedam dictiones Circumflectuntur in ultima; ut, Ablativus primae Declinationis Musâ, quo differat à Nominativo & Vocativo Musa,. Sic ergô pro caussâ differt ab ergò Conjunctione.  
2. Quaedam acuuntur, ut Adverbia plurima, nè videantur esse aliae partes Orationis; viz. Vnà, aliquò, putà, penè, etc. quae in fine sententiarum acuuntur, in consequentia verò gravantur.  
3. Quaedam Antepenultimam suspendunt; ut, Déinde, déorsum, quinimo, intereáloci, nihilóminus, quâtenus, etc. cùm non sunt orationes diversae; ut sunt, Intérea lóci, nihilo minus, púbe ténus, etc.  
N. B. Accentûs nota nusquam ferè jam apponitur, nisi differentiae caussâ, tunc enim signatur non tantùm in ultima, sed etiam in penultima, & antepenultimâ; ut, óccido, occido.  
II. Transpositio, Praepositiones enim postpositae suis casibus gravantur; ut, Transtra pèr & remos. Te penès imperium.  
III. Attractio, cùm scil. ultima syllaba praecedentis dictionis attrahit sibi Accentum Encliticae Conjunctionis; ut, Lumináque laurúsque Dei.  
1 Obs. ubi verò manifesta est Compositio, non variatur tonus; ut, itaque, úndique, hiccine.  
IV. Concisio, cùm dictiones per Syncopen aut Apocopen castrantur, tunc enim tonum retinent integraedictionis; ut, Virgili pro Virgilii, Arpinâs pro Arpinâtis. Sic hûc, illûc, pro hûcce, illûcce; & Composita à Dic, duc, fac; ut, Benedic, reduc, benefac.  
V. Idioma, sive linguae proprietas. Dictiones enim Graecae si integrae ad Latinos veniant, (i. e. si iisdem planè literis proferantur) servant tonum suum; ut, Metamórphosis, Orthographia.  
Sin prorsus Latinae fiunt, Latinum quoque tonum servant; ut, Geórgica, Philosóphia, idólum.  
N. B. 1. Si ignoretur proprius peregrinae vocis tonus, tutissimum fuerit juxta Latinum accentum illam enuntiare.  
2. Syllabae communes (i e. ubi muta cum liquida sequitur vocalem brevem) in prosa oratione corripiuntur; Célebris, Cáthedra; in aliis verò dictionibus producuntur; ut, Vnius, illius, ubique.  
3. Interrogatio etiam tonum transfert; ut, Siccine aïs Parmenó?   

Cap. 2. De Tempore, sive Quantitate Primarum & Mediarum Syllabarum.  
3. De tempore sive quantitate. Primarum. Medinum.  
TEmpus sive Quantitas est syllabae pronuntiandae mensura, sive spatium modulandae vocalis, quo scil. moram ejus in pronuntiando metimur.  
Secundùm tempus, sive quantitatem Syllaba dicitur Brevis, quae unum habet tempus, sive quae celeriter pronuntiatur; ut, Lĕgĕrë, cujus tempus breve sic notatur (˘). Longa, quae duo tempora habet, sive quae spatium duarum brevium exigit; ut, Aūdinre, cujus tempus longum sic notatur (¯). Secundùm ordinem suum quem habent in dictionibꝰ sylae dicuntur Primae, quae primum locum in dictione quâvis occupant. Mediae, medium Vltimae, ultimum Primarum syllabarum quantitas octo modis cognoscuntur, viz. I. Positione. II. Vocali ante vocalem. III. Diphthongo. IV. Derivatione. V. Compositione. VI Praepositione. VII. Regulâ. VIII. Exemplo seu Autoritate.  
Mediarum verò peculiaris est cognoscendi modus quem videre licet IX.  
I. Juxta Positionem.  
1. Vocalis ante duas consonantes, aut duplicem in eadem dictione longa est; ut, Venntus, anxis, patrīzo. Sed Composita à jugum corripiunt; ut, Bĭjugum.  
2. Quòd si consonans priorem dictionem claudat, sequente item à consonante inchoante, vocalis praecedens longa erit; ut,  
Majonr sum quām cui possint fonrtuna nocere.  
3. Vocalis brevis in fine dictionis, sequente à duabus consonantibus inchoante, interdum, sed rariùs producitur; ut,  
Occultā spolia, & plures de pace triumphos.  
4. Vocalis brevis ante mutam sequente liquidâ, communis redditur; ut,  
Et primò volŭcri similis, mox vera voluncris.  
Longa verò vocalis non mutatur; ut, Arantrum, simulancrum.  
II. Vocalis ante alteram in eadem dictione brevis est; ut, Dĕus, nĭhil.  
Sed 1. Genitivi in ius, penultimam habent communem; ut, Vnius, illius, licèt i in alterĭus semper sit brevis, in alīus semper longa.  
2. In quinta declinatione e inter geminum i longa fit; ut, Facieni.  
3. Fi in Fio ubique longa est, nisi sequatur e & r simul; ut,  
Omnia jam fīent, fĭeri quae posse negabas.  
4. Ohe primam syllabam ancipitem habet; enheu semper longam.  
5. Vocalis ante alteram in Graecis dictionibus subinde longa fit; ut, Dicite Pierides; & in Possessivis; ut, Aenenia nutrix.  
Sed Graecarum quantitas à Graecis rectiùs addiscenda est.  
6. In peregrinis quantitas est ambigua; ut, Michaël, Abraham.  
III. Omnis Diphthongus longa est; ut, Aunrum, Musâ. Syllabae item Contractae; ut, Congo, nīl.  
Sed prae ante vocalem saepius corripitur; ut, Ver praeit aestatem; rariùs producitur; ut, Domino praeiret Arion. ae in Maeotis est anceps.  
IV. Derivata eandem cum Primitivis quantitatem sortiuntur; ut, ămator primâ brevi ab ămo. Excipiuntur tamen quaedam,  

1. Deducta à brevibus, quae producuntur, viz.  Vox, voncis, à Vŏco. Lex, lengis, Lĕgo. Rex, rengis, Rĕgo. Sēdes, Sĕdeo. Jūnior, Jŭvenis. Hummanus, Hŏmo. Juncundus, Jŭvo. Vōmer, Vŏmo. Lanterna, Lăteo. Tengula, Tengo. Mancero, Măcer. Pennuria, Pĕnus. 
2. Deducta à longis quae corripiuntur, viz.  Dux, duncis, à Dunco. Dĭcax, Dinco. Fĭdes, Fino. ărena, ărista, āreo. Pŏsui, Ponno. Genui, Gingno. Frăgor, à Framngo. Frăgilis, Nŏto, as, Nontu. Năto, as, Nantu. Dĭsertus, Dinssero. Sŏpor, Sŏpio.  
Atque alia nonnulla utriusque generis.  
V. Composita simplicium quantitatem sequuntur; ut, Pŏtens, impŏtens. Sōlor, consōlor.  
1. Excipiuntur tamen Innŭba, à Numbo. Cognĭtum. à Nontum. Pronŭba, Agnĭtum. Dejĕro, à Junro. Perstĭturus à Stanturus. Pejĕro, Restĭturus.  
2. Item Composita à Dinco in dicus; ut, Ma'edĭcus.  
3. Ambĭtus Nomen corripitur, ambintus Participium producitur.  
4. Idem Masculinum producit i, Neutrum verò corripit.  
5. In Compositis.  
1. Cum Verbis, prior pars vocis in e desinens corripitur; ut, Valĕdico.  
2. Cum particulis, bi, tri, tre, du, eaedem corripiuntur; ut, Bĭceps, trĭceps, trĕcenti, dŭcenti.  
3. Cum Nominibus, prior pars exiens in i, y, u, corripitur; ut, Tardĭgradus, Polydorus, cornŭpeta, excipe quīvis & pauca alia.  
6. Hae voces ultimam syllabam simplicium, quae communis est, producunt, viz. Vbinque, ubinlibet, ibindem, quandōque, quandoncunque, sed do in quandŏquidem corripitur.  
VI Ex Praepositinibus.  
1. A, de, è, se, prae, & quae in a desinunt, ubique producuntur, nisi vocali sequente; ut, Vnda dĕhiscens.  
2. Pro Latina longa est, praeterquam in istis, Prŏcella, prŏfugus, prŏtervus, prŏnepos, prŏneptis, prŏfanus, prŏfiteor, pronfundus, prŏficiscor, prŏfari, prŏparo, prŏfugio, profectò, prŏpello, prŏpulso. Sed  
1. Propago, gas, & pro habent ancipitem. Propago, gĭnis,  
2. Pro Graeca corripitur; ut, Prŏpheta, prŏlogus, Prŏmetheus, etc. Sed in propino anceps est.  
3. Di producitur, nisi in dĭrimo, & dĭsertus.  
4. Reliquae Praepositiones, si positio sinat, corripiuntur; nam re in refert pro utile est, à nomine res est, ideóque producitur.  
VII. Regula est duplex 1. De Praeteritis & Supinis dissyllabis. 2. De primam Praeteriti geminantibus.  
1. Omne Praeteritum & Supinum dissyllabum priorem habet longam; ut, Lengi, emmi, montum, lantum. Excipiuntur tamen,  
1. Sex Praeterita, Fĭdi, bĭbi, dĕdi, scĭdi, tŭli, steti.  
2. Novem supina, Dătum, sătum, cĭtum (à cieo) ĭtum, lĭtum, quĭtum, sĭtum, rătum, rŭtum.  
2. Primam Praeteriti geminantia, primam itidem brevem habent; ut, Pĕpendi, mŏmordi, spŏspondi.  
VIII. Quarum syllabarum quantitas sub praedictas rationes non cadit, à Poētarum usu Exemplo atque Autoritate petenda est; atque haec ratio est omnium certissima & generalissima,  
1. Quia regula omnis autoritate veterum nititur.  
2. Quia multarum syllabarum modulus non nisi exemplo cognoscitur.  
1. Haec primam syllabam habent communem; viz. Britannus, Bithynus, Cacus, Cosyra, Crathys, Creticus, Curetes, Fidene, Gradivus, Hinulus, Hymen, Italus, liquor, liquidus, Lycus, Orion, Pachinus, palatium, Pelion, Pyrene, rudo, Sychaeus, Sycanius, cum quibusdam aliis.  
3. Haec verò mediam; Batavus, connubium, Ficedula, malea, Pharsalia, Sidonius, etc.  
IX. Mediae syllabae partim eâdem ratione quâ primae, partim etiam 1. ex incrementis Genitivi, atque 2. Conjugationis Analogiâ cognofci possunt.  
1. Incrementum Genitivi est quando Nomen plures habet syllabas in Genitivo singulari, quàm in Nominativo; juxta hoc, penultima Nominum crescentium  
1. Acutè, longa est.  
2. Graviter, brevis est.  
2. Analogia Conjugationis est quando verba sequuntur communem regulam conjugandi; & juxta hanc,  
a index Primae Conjugationis longa est. e Secundae longa e Tertiae brevis i Quartae longa  
Sed in Do & ejus Compositis, quando primae suut Conjugationis, a brevis est; ut, Dămus, circundămus, dăbis circundăbis, dăre circundăre.  
Syllaba rimus & ritis in Praeterito modi Subjunctivi sunt breves; ut, Amaverĭmus, amaverĭtis; in Futuro verò longae; ut, Amaverimmus, amaverītis.  
Adjectiva in inus Latina penultimam producunt; ut, Clandestinnus, mediastinnus, etc. Praeter haec sequentia, diutĭnus, crastĭnus, pristĭnus, perendĭnus, hórnotĭnus, serotĭnus, oleagĭnus, fagĭnus, cedrĭnus, carbasĭnus, & reliqua materialia, sive à metallorum nominibus formata in inus; ut, Chrystallĭnus myrrhĭnus, etc. à Graecis deducta.   

Cap. 3. De Ultimarum Syllabarum quantitate.  
Et ultimarum syllabarum.  
ULtimae syllabae numerantur juxta ordinem literarum finalium, sic,  
Finita in A producuntur; ut, amam, contrā, ergā.  Excipe,  1. Pută, ită, quiă, ejă.  2. Item omnes casus in a, praeter vocativos in a, à Graecis in as, ut, ô Aenean, & Ablativum primae declinationis; ut, Musan.  3. Numeralia in ginta, quae a habent communem; ut, Triginta, quadraginta. B brevia sunt, ut, ăb.  Excipe,  1. Hebraea; ut, Jacomb. C producuntur; ut, anc, sīc, & hinc Adverbium.  Excipe,  1. Lāc, nĕc, donĕc, quae contrahuntur.  2. Fac, & Pronomen hic sunt communia, item & ejus Neutrum hoc modò non sit Ablativi casûs. D brevia sunt; ut, ăd.  1. Excipe Hebraea; ut, Davīd. E brevia sunt; ut, Marĕ, penĕ, legĕ, scribĕ.  Excipe,  1. Voces Quintae Inflectionis in e; ut, Fidem, diem, rē, cum Adverbiis indè enatis; ut, Hodiē, quarē.  2. Fame, quae nunc Tertiae Inflectionis brevis, olim quintae longa fuit.  3. Secundae personae singulares Imperativorum Activorum secundae Conjugationis; ut, Docen, movē, manē.  Sed e in Cave, vide, salve, & vale quandoque etiam corripitur.  4. Monosyllaba in e; ut, mē, ten, cē, praeter quĕ, nĕ, vĕ, Enclyticas Conjunctiones.  5. Adverbia in e, ab Adjectivis deducta; ut, doctē, valdē, item fermē, & ferē. Benĕ tamen & malĕ corripiuntur.  6. Quae à Graecis per n scribuntur; ut, Anchisen, cetē, tempē. I longa sunt; ut, Dominin, amarī.  Excipe  1. Mihi, tibi, sibi, ubi, ibi, uti pro ut, & cui dissyllabum, quae sunt communia.  2. Nisĭ, & quasĭ quae corripiuntur, ut & Dativi & Vocativi Graecorum quorum Genitivus in os breve exit; ut, Palladĭ, Daphnĭ. L corripiuntur; ut, Animăl, mĕl.  Excipe  1. Sanl, & Sonl.  2. Hebraea, quae Graecè scribuntur per vocalem longam; ut, Michaenl. N producuntur; ut Paeamn, Hymenn, nōn.  Excipe  1. Forsăn, forsităn, ăn, tamĕn, attamĕn, veruntamĕn.  2. Voces per Apocopen castratas; ut, Mén ', vidén '.  3. In cum Compositis; ut, Exĭn, subĭn, etc.  4. Nomina in en, quorum Genitivus ĭnis correptum habet; ut, Carmĕn, pectĕn, tibicĕn.  5. Graeca in on per o parvum; ut, Iliŏu, Peliŏn, Caucasŏn.  6. Graeca in in, yn, & an, quorum Nominativus est brevis; ut, Alexĭn, Ityn, Maiăn. O Communia sunt; ut, Amo, virgo, porrò, docendo.  Excipe,  1. Obliquos in o, qui semper producuntur; ut, Dominon, servō.  2. Adverbia ab Adjectivis deducta; ut, Tanton, falsō, etc. Sed sedulō, crebrō, mutuō, sunt communia, tutiùs producenda.  3. Monosyllaba in o produ cuntur; ut, dō, stō, item ergon pro caussâ.  4. Ambo, duo, ego, homo, cito, modò cum compositis vix leguntur producta.  5. Graeca per 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 producuntur; ut, Sapphon, nisi descendant à Nominativis in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 quibus v adimitur; ut, Leo, Plato, quae plerunque corripiuntur. R Corripiuntur; ut, Caesăr, torcúlăr, pĕr, diciĕr.  Excipe,  1. Fanr, lār, năr, vĕr, fur, cūr, & pār, cum compositis. Cor semel apud Ovidium producitur.  2. Graeca in n● er; ut, Aenr, cratēr, except patĕr & matĕr. S pares cum numero vocalium terminationes habent. as producuntur; ut, Amans, musās.  Except,  1. Graeca quorum Genitivus singularis in dos exit; ut, Archăs, Pallăs.  2. Accusativos plurales nominum crescentium; ut, Heroăs, Phyllidăs. es Longa sunt; ut, Anchisēs, sedens, docens.  Excipe  1. Nomina in es tertiae Decliationis graviter crescentia; ut, milĕs, diuĕs. Sed ex his, Cerens, abiens, ariens, pariens, & pēs cum Compositis longa sunt.  2. Es quoque à sum unà cum Compositis, potĕs, adĕs, prodĕs, obĕs, & penĕs Praepositio corripiuntur.  3. Item Neutra singularia: & Nominativi plurales Graecorum in es breve non eis desinentia; ut, Cacoethĕs, Cyclopĭs. is brevia sunt; ut, Parĭs, panĭs, tristĭs.  Excipe  1. Obliquos Plurales in is, ut, Musïs, do minīs, & queīs pro quibus.  2. Producentia penultimam Genitivi crescentis; ut, Samnins, nitis.  3. Quae fiunt in is ab eis Diphthongo; ut, Omnins, Simoins.  4. Monosyllaba omnia; ut, Vins, lis, praeter ĭs, bĭs, & quĭs.  5. Velīs, cum Compositis, malīs, nolīs, item ausīs, faxīs.  6. Secundas personas singulares Indicativi praesentis quartae Conjugationis; ut, Audins, dormīs.  7. Secundas personas Futuri Subjunctivi, quae sunt communes; ut, dederis, amaveris. os producuntur; ut, Herōs, honōs, dominōs.  Excipe  1. Compŏs, impŏs, & ŏs ossis.  2. Graeca per o parvum; ut, Delŏs, Palladŏs. us corripiuntur; ut, famulŭs, tempŭs.  Excipe,  1. Nominativos acutè crescentium; ut, Virtūs, salūs.  2. Genitivos singulares, Nominativos, Vocativos, & Accusativos plurales Quartae Declinationis; ut, hujus manuns, hae manūs, has manūs, ô manūs.  3. Monosyllaba in us, ut, pūs, cruns.  4. Quae à Graecis scribuntur per 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉; ut, Panthūs, cliūs.  Atque piis cunctis venerandum nomen Iësuns. u producuntur; ut, Manun, genum. y & ys corripiuntur; ut, Moly, Tiphys.  Ultima cujusque versûs syllaba habetur communis.    

Appendix Grammatices.  
Appendix Grammatices, agit De Ordine  
HActenus de vocum Elementis, Accidentibus, Constructione & Pronuntiatione, quae quidem, quatuor, quas j am diximus, Partes Grammaticae, tanquam propria & partialia singularum subjecta, constituunt, & ipsam orationem jux'a Regulas Grammatices componendam, (tanquam subjectum hujus Artis, ut Logici dicunt, adaquatum, totale & principale) conspiciunt.  
Nunc verò de Croine vocum pauca subjiciemus. Nam & hoc etiam ad finem Grammatici aliquo modo conducit, ut quo ordine voces sint collocandae, ad orationem meliùs eloquendam, aut scribendam intelligat.  

Cap. 1. De Ordine vocum Grammatico.  
Dictionum sive vocum, 1. Grammatico. 2. Oratorio.  
ORdo dictionum est earundem inter se collocatio, ità ut alia necessariò praecedat, alia sequatur.  
Est autem Ordo triplex, 1. Grammaticus, quem observant Grammatici in Oratione componendâ. 2. Oratorius, Oratores 3. Poëticus, Poëtoe  
1. Ordo Grammaticus sive naturalis est quando voces in oratione juxta naturam suam collocantur, nullo observato sonorum numero.  
Atque hic ordo è sermone vernaculo praecipuè cognoscitur.  
Secundùm hunc ordinem composita oratio Translatio dicitur.  
In Translatione verò sic collocentur voces.  
1. Vocativus, vocandi particulae, & quae ab illis pendent.  
2. Nominativus, & quae ab eo pendent.  
3. Verbum principale, & quae ab eo pendent, viz.  
1. Infinitum. 2. Casus Verbi, & quae ab illis pendent. Hic tamen obser vandum,  
1. Adverbium Verbo subjungitur.  
2. Substantivum & Adjectivum,  
Item Praepositio & suns casus conjungi debent.  
3. Interrogativa, Relativa, Indefinita, & Partitiva, Adverbi a quaedam, & Conjunctiones praecedunt alias voces.  
4. Impersonale quandoque incipit orationem.  
5. Accusativus ante verbum Impersonale exponi debet per quod vel ut.  
6. Si quid defuerit suppleri debet.  

Exemplum Ordinis Grammatici.  
Scipio & Laeli, artes exercitationésque virtutum sunt omnino arma aptissima senectutis; quae cultae afferunt fructus mirificos in aetate omni, cùm vixeris multùm diúque non solùm quia deserunt nunquam, nè quidem in tempore extremo aetatis, quanquam id est maximum; verùm etiam quia conscientia vitae actae bene, recordatióque benefactorum multorum est jucundistima.    

Cap. 2. De Ordine vocum Oratorio.  
ORdo Oratorius est quando voces in oratione juxta Artem Oratoriam collocantur, observatis quidem certis, sed omninò dissimilibus sonorum numeris.  
Juxta hunc ordinem compositae voces prosam sive solutam orationem (quam & 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Orationem dicimus) constituunt.  
In oratione componendâ.  
1. Obliquus in principio, Nominativus in medio, & Verbum in in fine collocetur.  
2. Adjectivum praecedere, Substantivum vero sequi debet.  
3. Inter Adjectivum & Substantivum aliae voces interseruntur.  
4. Adverbia, Praepositionésque cum suo casu venustiùs ante Verbum vel Participium suum collocantur.  
5. In prosâ versum fugito: citare tamen potes.  
6. Principium vel exitum carminis nec principium nec exitum prosae facito.  
7. Principii cura sit major, medii penè nulla, clausulae verò maxima.  
1. Clausula varianda est maximé.  
9 Artificium numeri nunquam longiùs senis à fine syllabis observetur  
10. Ex longis omnibus clausula rarior est, rarissima ex omnibus brevibus, at ex temperatione longarum & brevium frequentior.  
11. Vocalium in diversis vocibus concursus sit quàm rarissimus.  

Exemplum Ordinis Oratorii.  
Aptissima omnino sunt, Scipio & Laeli, arma senectutis artes exercitation esque virtutum; quae in omni aetate cultae, cùm multum diúque vixeris, mirificos afferunt fructus; non solùm quia nunquam deserunt, nè in extremo quidem tempore aetatis quanquam id maximum est; verùm etiam quia conscientia bene actae vitae, multorúmque bene factorum recordatio, jucundissima est.  
N. B. Neque tamen haec praecepta sunt ita mordicus tenenda, quin ut puer ex doctissimorum observatione potiora iis apprehendat & in compon enda Oratione proprias aures & pulmones consulat.    

Cap. 3. De Ordine vocum Poëtico.  
3: Poentico. Juxta quem Carmen constituitur. In quo dignoscendisunt.  
ORdo Poëticus est quando voces in oratione juxta Artem Poëticam collocantur, observatis quidem & certis & similibus sonorum numeris.  
Juxta hunc ordinem constricta Oratio Carmen sive Poëma dicitur.  
Carmen 1. Pro Diversitate 1. Versûs (qui Graecis Colon sive membrum dicitur),  usitatè dividitur in 1. Monocólon, quod constat unius generis metro.  2. Dicólon, ubi duo sunt genera versuum.  3. Tricólon, ubi triplex est metrum.  4. Polycólon, in quo plura metri genera concurrunt. 2. Strophae, sive reditionis ad idem versuum genꝰ ufitatè dividitur in 1. Distrophon, cùm post seeundum versum ad primi generis versum redimus. 2. Tristrophon, tertium 3. Tetrastrophon, quartum 4. Pentastrophon, quintum 2. Pro Ratione Numeri versuum, usitatè dicitur Hemistichon quod continet dimidium versûs. Distichon, duos versus. Tetrastichon, quatuor versus. Hexastichon, sex versus. Eteostichon, annorum numerum. Hemerostichon, dierum numerum. Acrostichis, cujus initiales, finales, aut mediae literae collectae certum sensum praebent. Materiae Comoedia, Tragoedia, Bucolica, Elegia, Ode, Hymnus, Georgica, Satyra, Epigramma, Epitaphium, Epithalamium, Genethliacum, etc.  
In Carmine verò ritè constituendo summa cura adhibenda est ad dignoscendos pedes, & diversa versuum genera. Ex pedibus enim conjunctis fiunt Versus, & ex Versibus Carmen.   

Cap. 4. De Pede, & ejus generibus.  
●: Pes. 1, Simplices. 2. Compositi.  
PES est duarum syllabarum pluriúmve constitutio, ex certâ temporum sive quantitatum observatione.  
Pes est 1. Simplex, atque is 1. Dissyllabus, qui constat ex duabus syllabis. aut 2. Trissyllabus, qui constat ex tribus syllabis. 2. Compositus, qui constat ex simplicibus pedibus conjunctis. Dissyllabi pedes sunt quatuor Spondaeus, qui constat ex duabus longis. a Pyrrbychius, duabus brevibus. b Trochaeus, priore longâ, & posteriore brevi. c jambus, priore brevi, & posteriore longâ. d  
ut, a Virtūs. b Dĕŭs. c ānnŭs. d ămāns  
Trissyllabi sunt octo, Molossus, qui constat ex tribus longis. e Tribrachus, tribus brevibus. f Dactylus, primâ longâ, reliquis duabus brevibus. g Anapastus, primis duabus brevibus, postremâ longâ. h Bacchius, primâ brevi, rel iquis duabus longis. i Antibacchius, primis duabus longis, postremâ brevi. k Amphimacer, primâ longâ, mediâ brevi, ultimâ longâ. l Amphibrachus, primâ brevi, mediâ longâ, ultimâ brevi. m  
ut, e Māgnātēs. f Dŏmĭnŭs. g Scrimbĕrĕ. h pĭĕtans. i Hŏnenstans. k Aundirĕ. l Chanrïtans. m Vĕnirë.  
Pedes compositi, potiùs pedum conjunctiones quàm pedes à quibusdam vocantur, atque ab aliis omittuntur, tanquam non multùm ad institutum Grammatici pertineant. Hos tamen tetrasyllabos nihilominus adjecimus, propter aliquem eorum usum in Carminibus illis quae ab his nomen acceperunt, viz. Choriambicum, jonicum, etc.  
Pedes igitur compositi praecipui sunt 18. Proceleusinaticus, qui constat ex duobus Pyrrhichiis. a Dispondaeus, duobus Spondaeis. b Choriambus, trochaeo & jambo. c Antispastus, jambo & Trochaeo. d Diambus, duobus jambis. e Dichoraeus, duobus Trochaeis. f jonicus à majore, Spondaeo & Pyrrhichio. g jonicus à minore, Pyrrhichio & Spondaeo. h Epitritus primus, jambo & Spondaeo. i Epitritus secundus, Trochaeo & Spondaeo. k Epitritus tertius, Spondaeo & jambo. l Epitritus quartus, Spondaeo & Trochaeo. m Paeon primus, Trochaeo & Pyrrhichio. n Paeon secundus, jambo & Pyrrhichio. o Paeon tertius, Pyrrhichio & Trochaeo. p Paeon quartus, Pyrrhichio & jambo. q  
ut, a Hŏmĭnĭbŭs. b Cōnclūdēntēs. c Hinstŏrĭae. d Alēxāndĕr. e Sĕvenrĭtans. f Commprŏbanrĕ. g Camntambĭmŭs. h Vĕnĕrāntēs. i Sălūtāntēs. k Connoĭtantin. l Cōmmūnĭcānt. m īncāntārĕ. n cōnfĭcĕrĕ. o Rĕsonluĕrĕ. p Sŏcĭanrĕ. q Cĕlĕrĭtans.  
Ex pedibus au tem jambus, & Trochaeus, Spondaeus & Dactylus, Anapaestus, & Tribrachus usitatissimi sunt.   

Cap. 5. De Versuum variis generibus.  
2 Versus, & eorundem 1. Scansio. Cui accidunt, 1. Caesura. 2 Synalaepha. 3. Ecthlipfis. 4 Synaeresis 5. Diaeresis. 5. Systole. 7. Diastole. 2. Depositio. Secundùm quam dicitur, 1. Acatalecticus:. 2. Catalecticus. 3. Brachycatalecticus. 4. Hypercatalecticus. 3. Metrum. Secundùm quod est, 1. Adonicus. 2. Archilochius dactylicus. 3. Alcmanius: 4. Glyconicus. 5. Pherecratius. 6. Aesclepiadaeus. 7. Sapphicus. 8. Phaleucius. 9 Elegiacus. 10. Heroicus. 11. jambicus. Archilochius Heptameter.  
VErsus est oratio justo atque legitimo pedum numero constricta.  
Versum composituro discendum est, pedibus ipsum ritè metiri, (sive in suos pedes distinguere) quam Scansionem sive Dimensionem vocant; ut,  
Panruĕ nĕc ‑ īnvĭdĕō sĭnĕ | mē lĭbĕrībĭs ĭnūrbēm.  
Heni mĭhĭ | quond dŏmĭnō ‑ nōn lĭcĕt | īrĕ tŭo. ‑  
Scansioni accidunt hae Figurae.  
1. Caesura, quum ità secatur vox ut posterior ejus pars initium sit pedis sequentis; ut;  
Sīc canĭbūs catŭlōs sĭmĭlēs sīc | mātrĭbŭs | hoedons.  
Species ejus sunt quatuor,  
1. Triemimeris, cùm post primum pedem relinquitur syllaba; ut, 2. Penthemimeris, secundum 3. Hepthemimeris tertium 4. Eneemimeris, quartum  
Illĕ lătūs ¹ nĭvĕūm ² mōllī ³ fūltūs ⁴ hyăcīnthō.  
Ob Caesuram, syllaba brevis in fine dictionis aliquando extenditur  
Post 1 um pedem, ut Penctŏrĭlŭs ĭnhĭāns spīrāntĭā cōnsŭlĭt | ēxtā, 2 um Omnĭă | vīncīt ămōr & | nōs cēdāmŭs ămōrĭ. 3um Ostēntāns ārtēm părĭ | tēr ārcūmquĕ sŏnāntĕ. 4 um Illĕ lātūs nĭuĕūm mŏllī fūltūs hyăcĭntho.  
N. B. Invenustus est versus qui Caesurâ caret; ut,  
Aunrĕă | canrmĭna junlin ‑ scrībīs | māxĭmĕ | vātūm.  
Vrbĕm | fōrtēm ‑ numpenrcepit ‑ fonrtĭŏr ‑ hōstĭs. ‑  
2. Synalaepha est elisio quaedam vocalis ante alteram in diversis dictionibus; ut,  
Senră nĭmīs vīt ' est | crāstĭnă | viv' hŏdĭlē.  
At heu, ô, & io nunquam intercipiuntur; ut,  
At bĭs ĭŏ Arĕthunsan, īō Arĕthunsan uŏcanvint. Interdum etiam Synalaepha negligitur; ut,  
Et sunccuns pĕcŏrī ēt | lāc sūbdūcĭtŭr ‑ āgnīs.  
Tēr sūnt cōnātī īmpōnĕrē ‑ Pē ĭŏ | ossām.  
Aliquando fit in fine versûs; ut,  
Omn●ăă ‑ Mērcūrĭō sĭmĭlīs vōcēmqŭe cŏlŏrēn | suē Et crīnēs flāvōs.  
3. Ecthlipsis est quoties m cum suâ vocali perimitur proximâ dictione à vocali exorsâ; ut,  
Mōnstr', hōrrēnd', īnfōrm', īngēns cūī | lūmĕn ādēmt ' Olim elidebatur S; ut,  
Arbŏrĭbūs vĕtĕrēs dēcīdĕrĕ ‑ fālcĭbŭs | rāmōs.  
4. Synaeresis est duarum syllabarum in unam contractio; ut,  
Sēu lēntō fŭĕrīnt * ālvārĭă ‑ vīmĭnĕ | tēxtă.  
* pro alvearia.  
Fit autem frequentiùs in his dictionibus, Dii, Diis, iidem, iisdem, deinde, deinceps, semianimis, semihomo, semiustus, deest, deero, deerit, anteambulo, anteit, cui, & Genitivis nominum in eus; ut, Vlisseus, Vlissei, cum multis aliis.  
5. Diaeresis, est ubi ex unâ syllabâ dissectâ fiunt duae; ut,  
Dembŭĕramnt fūsōs ēvŏlüīssĕsŭōs. pro evolvisse.  
6. Systole est quae longam syllabam corripit; ut, Mantrin lōngă dĕcēm tŭlĕrūnt fāstīdĭă mēnsēs.  
7, Diastole est quae brevem syllabam producit; ut, In quēm rēcĭdĭmūs quīcquīd mōrtālē crĕāmur.  
Atque haec si reperitur in ultima dictionis syllabâ Caesura frequentiùs dicitur; ut,  
Omnĭă | vīncĭt ămōr ēt | nōs cēdāmŭs ă mōrī.  
Versuum genera sunt varia pro ratione 1. Depositionis, & 2. Metri.  
1. Depositio est terminatio scansionis, ex quâ versûs abundantiam, plenitudinem, aut defectum cognoscimus.  
Secundùm hanc versus dicitur,  
1. Acatalecticus, sive perfectus, cui nihil aut superest aut deest; ut,  
Munsae | Jŏvīs | sūnt finlĭae.  
2. Catalecticus, sive semimutilus, cui in fine deest syllaba; ut,  
Munsae | Jŏvemm ‑ cănēbānt.  
3. Brachycatalecticus, sive mutilus, cui in fine pes deest; ut,  
Munsae ‑ Jŏvinsgnatae—.  
4. Hypercatalecticus, sive exuberans, In quo una, aut duae syllabae supersunt, ut;  
Munsae ‑ sŏrōrēs sūnt Mĭnenr vae.  
Munsae ‑ sŏrōrēs Panllădins lugent.  
2. Metrum est legitimus pedum numerus, quo versum metimur.  
Quoad Metrum versus dicitur.  
1. Dimeter, qui constat pedibus duobus éstque 1, Adonius, sive Adonicus, qui constat ex dactylo & spondaeo; ut, Ganudĭă | pēllē. Pēlle tĭmōrēm. 2. Archilochius dactylicus qui constat ex duobus dactylis, & syllabâ; ut, Dinscĭtĕ ‑ jūstĭtĭam. 2. Trimeter, tribus, éstque 3. Alcmanius, qui constat ex tribus dactylis & syllabâ; ut, Dinscĭtĕ ‑ jūstïtĭām mŏnĭtī. 4. Glyconicus, qui constat è spondaeo & duobus dactylis; ut, Tamndemm | rēgĭă | nōbĭlĭs. 5. Pherecratius, qui constat è spondaeo, dactylo & spondaeo; ut, Nīgrīs | aequŏră | vēntīs. Hic versus aliquando pro priori spondaeo habet trochaeum; ut, Prōdĕās nŏvă | numpta. Aliquando Anapaestum; ut, Sĭmĭlī | sūrgĭt ăb | ŏrtum. 3. Tetrameter quatuor, éstque 6. Aesclepiadaeus, qui constat ex spondaeo, dactylo, & syllabâ longâ, & duobus deinde dactylis; ut, Maecennans ătă | vīs | edïtĕ | rëgĭbŭs. 4. Pentameter, quinque, èstque 7. Sapphicus, qui constat ex trochaeo, spondaeo, & duobus demum trochaeis, ut, Jamm sătīs tērrīs nĭvĭs ‑ ātquĕdīrae. Post tres versus Sapphicos, Adonicus addi solet. 8. Phaleucius, qui constat ex Spondaeo, dactylo, & tribus tandem trochaeis; ut, Quonquon ‑ diffŭgĭās păvēns Măbili. Nostrum | non poteris latere ‑ nasum. 9 Elegiacus, qui constat dactylo vel spondaeo, cum syllabâ longâ; & duobus tandem omnino dactylis, cum syllabâ item longâ; ut, (amor. Rens ēst | sōllĭcĭ | tīplēnă tĭ | mōris Henimĭhĭ | quond dŏmĭ | nŏ | nōn lĭcĕt | īrĕtūo 5. Hexameter. sex, èstque 10. Heroïcus, qui constat quatuor primis locis è spondaeo veldactylo, quinto dactylo, & sexto spondaeo; ut, Tytïrĕ | tum pantŭlae rĕcŭbāns sūb | tēgmĭnĕ fāgī Sylven strēm tĕnŭī Munsamm mĕdĭtārĭs ăvēnā. Reperitur etiam spondaeus aliquando in quinto loco; ut, Chanră Dĕumm sŏbŏlēs mā gnī Jŏuĭs ‑ īncrēmēntūm. Est & Heroïcus Tetrameter qui constat ex quatuor postremis Hexametri pedibus; ut, Aūt Ephĕsumm bĭmărīs vĕ Cŏrinnthin. 11. jambicus, qui constat è pedibus jambicis; ut, Sŭīs | ĕt īpsă Rommă vīrĭbūs ‑ rŭīt. Est autem hic versus 1. Purus, sive Legitimus, qui constat è solis jambis; ut, Phăsenlŭs īllĕ, quēm ‑ vĭdētĭs hōspĭtēs; 2. Impurus, qui aliquot in locis recipit pedem diversum jambo; ut, Jūs ēst | ĭn ārmīs ōpprĭmīt ‑ lengens tĭmŏr. 3. Scazon, sive Choliambus, i. e. claudicans jambus, qui in sexto loco Spondaeum, & in quinto jambum retinet; ut, Nēc fōntĕ lābră pronlŭi ‑ Cäbanllinnon. N. B. Recipit Iambicus interdum (ob maiorem gravitatem exprimendam) in locis imparibus (i. e. primo, tertio, & quinto) pro Iambo tribrachum, spondaeum, dactylum, anapaestum; atque in locis paribus (i. e. secundo & quarto) quandoque tribrachum, spondaeum rariùs, ultimum verò locum rarò mutat; & saltem binos pedes jambos perpetuò sibi servat. Hic versus etiam diducitur in duo genera usitatiora 1. Dimetrum, sive tetrametrum, qui constat ex quatuor pedibus quémque metimur  vel Per dipodiam, i. e. geminum pedem more Graeco; ut, O cārmĭnūm ‑ dūlcēs | nontae. Per monopodiam, i. e. singulos pedes more Latino; ut, O cārmĭnūm ‑ dūlcēs | nontae. 2. Trimetrum sive senarium, qui senis constat pedibus, quémque metimur, Vel Per dipodiam; ut, Quni nōs dāmnānt | sūnt hīstrĭōnēs māxĭmī. Per monopodiam; ut, Quni nōs | dammnamnt | sūnt hīstrĭōnēs māxĭmī. 6. Heptameter, septem, estque 12. Archilochius Heptameter, qui constat quatuor primis pedibus Heroïcis & tribus tandem trochaeis; ut, Sōlvĭtŭr | ācrĭs hyēms grātā vĭcĕ ‑ vērĭsēt Făvonnĭ:  
Plura qui quaerit, Autores qui de Arte Poëtica fusiùs scripserunt, otiosior consulat.  
Et discas oportet, & quod didicisti agendo confirmes, Sen. Epist.  
Doctissimorum enim virorum usus pluris faciendus, quàm omnes omnium Grammaticorum Canones. Danesius.  
Artifices, solus, qui facit, usus erit. Ovid.   

A Synopsis or short view of the Latin GRAMMAR.  


The Latin Grammar teacheth the Art or Skill ro writ or speak Latin aright: It is divided into four parts:  
I. Orthography, which teacheth how to spell words, Lib. 1. It treateth— 

1. Of Letters. Chap. 1.  
2. Of Syllables. Chap. 2.  
3. Of Right Utterance. Chap. 3.  
4. Of Points in Sentences. Chap. 4.    
II. Etymology, which treateth of the Eight parts of speech, & their Accidents, Li. 11. 

1. In general, Chap. 1.  
2. In particular, 

1. Of a Noun, and 

1. its proper Accidents, Chap. 2. which are 

1. Case, Chap. 3.  
2. Gender, Chap. 4. the Rules to know which are— 

1. General, 

1. Of Substantives 

1. Proper, Chap. 5.  
2. Commō, Chap. 6.    
2. Of Adjectives, Chap. 10.    
2. Special, Of Nouns 

not increasing, Ch. 7.  
increasing 

Long, Ch. 8.  
Short, Ch. 9        
3. Declension 

the first, Chap. 11.  
the second, Chap. 12.  
the third, Chap. 13.  
the fourth, Chap. 14.  
the fifth, Chap. 15.  
To which belong the manner of declining Adjectives, Chap. 16.    
4. Comparison, Chap. 17. To these belong the Rules of Heteroclits, which are 

Variant, Chap. 18.  
Deficient in— 

Case, Chap. 19  
Number Chap. 20.    
Redundant, Chap. 21.      
2. its Kindes, Chap. 22.    
2. Of a Pronoun, Chap. 23.  
3. Of a Verb, and its 

Accidents, Chap. 24.  
Form of the Conjugation 

first, Chap. 27.  
second. Chap. 28.  
third. Chap. 29.  
fourth. Chap. 30.      
Hitherto belong 1. The Rules to know 

1. The Preterperfect Tenses Of Verbs in O 

1. Regular 

Simplo, chap. 31.  
Compound, c. 32.  
Simple, chap. 33.  
Compound, and the Preterperfect Ten of Verbs in or, ch. 34.      
2. The Supines of Verbs in O 

1. Regular 

Simplo, chap. 31.  
Compound, c. 32.  
Simple, chap. 33.  
Compound, and the Preterperfect Ten of Verbs in or, ch. 34.    
2. Irregular, Chap. 35.  
3. Defective, Chap. 36.    
2. The Forming the Verb Sum, Chap. 37.  
3. Impersonals and Derivatives, Chap. 38.    
4. Of a Participle, Chap. 39  
5. Of an Adverb, Chap. 40.  
6. Of a Conjunction, Chap. 41.  
7. Of a Preposition, Chap. 42.  
8. Of an Interjection, Chap. 43.      
III. Syntaxe, which teacheth the due joining words together, Lib. III. by way of 

1. Concordance, Cham 1. containing the Rule of the 

first Concord. §. 1.  
second Concord §. 2.  
third Concord §. 3.  
Case of the Relative, §. 4.  
Question and Answer, §. 5.    
2. Of Government 

1. Of Nouns, Chap. 2. with a 

Gen. Case. 6.  
Dat. Case. 7.  
Acc. Case. 8.  
Abl. Case. 9    
2. Of Pronouns, Chap. 3.  
3. Of Verbs, Chap. 4. with a 

Nom. Case. 10.  
Gen. Case. 11.  
Dat. Case. 12.  
Acc. Case. 13.  
Abl. Case. 14.    
To which also belong the Rules of 

Verbs having divers Constructions. § 15.  
the Infinitive Mood §. 16.  
the Gerunds. §. 17.  
Supines. §. 18.  
Time. §. 19  
Space. §. 20.  
Place. §. 21.  
Impersonals. §. 22.      
4. Of Participles. Chap. 5.  
5. Of Adverbs, Chap. 6. with 

Cases. §. 1.  
Moods. §. 2.    
6. Of Conjunctions, Chap. 7. which 

Couple Words. §. 1.  
Govern Moods. §. 2.    
7. Of Prepositions. Chap. 8.  
8. Of Interjections. Chap. 9    
To Etymologie belong Figures 

Of a Word. Chap. 10.  
Of Construction. Chap. 11.    
To Syntaxis belong Figures 

Of a Word. Chap. 10.  
Of Construction. Chap. 11.    
FOUR Prosodie, which teacheth the right Pronunciation of Words, Lib. FOUR by observing their 

Spirits and Tones. Chap. 1.  
Quantity of Syllables 

First & Middle, Chap. 2:  
Last. Chap. 3.       To Grammar after a manner pertaineth that which is said concerning the Order of Words, which is 1. Grammatical, Cap. 1.  2. Rhetorical, Cap. 2.  3. Poëtical, Cap. 3. touching which we consider the sorts of Feet. Cap. 4. Verses. Cap. 5.     

Pro Puerorum in Studi is pio progressu, Precatio quotidiana.  
DOmine Pater, Coeli ac Terrae effector, qui liberaliter tribuis sapientiam omnibus eam à te cum fiducia petentibus: Exorna (quaesumus) ingeniorum nostrorum bonitatem, quam cum caeteris naturae viribus nobis insudisti, lumire divinae gratiae tuae; ut non modò quae ad cognoscendum te & Salvatorem nostrum Dum num Jesum valeant, intelligamus; sed etiam totâ ment, & voluntate persequamur, & indies benignitate tuâ, tum doctrinâ, tum pietate proficiamus; ut qui efficis omnia in omnibus, in nobis resplendescere dona tua facias, ad gloriam sempiternam Majesta is tuae.  
Amen.   

PAter noster, qui es in coelis, Sanctificetur Nomen tuum: Adveniat regnum tuum. Fiat Voluntas tua, sicut in coelo, sic & in terra. Panem nostrum quotidianum da nobis quotidie. Et dimitte nobisdebita nostra, sicut & nos dimittimus debitoribus nostris: Et nè nos inducas in tentationem; Sed libera nos à malo. Quia tuum est Regnum, Potentia, & Gloria, in secula seculotum.  
Amen.   

Dr Saunderson 's Approbation of this GRAMMAR.  
I Have perused this present work, which the Author, to his great Commendation, hath contrived with so much care and judgement, that I cannot but very well approve of it, as being the shortest, orderliest and plainest for the ease both of Master and Scholar, and with the least variation from the COMMON-GRAMMAR, of any Book that I have seen published in this kind.  
Robert Saunderson. Ità testor Edvardus Silvester.   

Imprimatur  
Dec. 18. 1648.  
JO. LAN●LEY.   

THE LATIN GRAMMAR FITTED FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS.  
Wherein the words of family's GRAMMAR are (as much as might be) retained; many errors thereof amended; many needless things left out: many necessaries, that were wanting, supplied; and all things ordered in a Method more agreeable to Child's Capacity.  
By Charles Hoole, Mr of Arts, of Lincoln-Collegde in Oxford, sometimes Schoolmaster of Rotherham in Yorkshire; and now Teacher of a Private Grammar-School in Gold-smith's Alley, not far from Aldersgate and Cripplegate, LONDON.  
And (that nothing might be wanting to the purpose) the English Translation is set down on the contrary page for the benefit of Yong-learners.  
FRANC. PATRI.  
Grammar is the Foundation of all Disciplines.  
LONDON, Printed by William Dugard; and are to be sold by John Clark jun. at the lower end of Cheapside entering into Mercer's Chapel. An. Dom. 1651.   

To the Lovers and Professors of Grammar-learning.  
More especially To his most honoured good friends, the Schoolmasters of his acquaintance either in City or Country.  
Gentlemen!  
I Have lately published some Helps towards Grounding little ones in the Latine-tongue: and finding them (by my own and other's Practice) to become successful; I more willingly go on to prosecute my begun design; viz. to contrive (at vacant times) such necessary Subsidiaries for every Classis in a Grammar-School, as may much facilitate The good (though with some tedious) old way of Teaching by Grammar, Autors, and Exercises.  
And because our greatest cumber hitherto hath been Grammar, I have first begun with it, and endeavoured to bring the Rules of that Art to the reach of Child's apprehensions; that in daily reading, writing, and speaking Latin, they may clearly see, and at once understand the Reason of what they do.  
What I have done herein I most humbly submit to your candid judgements, and if, in your Opinions, I but seem to effect any thing, which may make our School-labor less troublesome, I have what I desire; and therefore rest,  
Your truly devoted friend, and humble servant From my School in Gold-smith's Alley, March, 26. 1651. Charles Hoole.   

THE LATIN GRAMMAR.  
Of Grammar, and its Parts.  
The Latin Grammar containeth Rules of right speaking Latin. It hath four Parts.  
GRammar is the Art of Writing and Speaking aright.  
With the Latins in Latin.  
There be four Parts of Grammar. 1 Orthography. Lib. I. 2 Etymology: Lib. II. 3 Syntaxis. Lib. III. 4 Prosodia. Lib. IU.  
Grammar hath its name from letters, which the Greeks call gramma●d, and implie's as much as literature; as if you should call it the Letter-Art, or Skill in letters: for this Art begins with letters, of which syllables are made; and of syllables, words; and of words, a speech; which is either Prose or Verse.  
Orthography is spent about Letters; Prosodia about Syllables; Etymology about Words; and Syntaxis about a Speech. The natural order therefore require's, that Prosodia should be ranked in the second place; But we, following the method of the Common-Grammar (because indeed the quantity of Syllables cannot so well be perceived before Words be understood) thought good to set Prosodia in the last place.  

Lib. I. Of Orthography.  
1. Orthography treateth  
Orthography is the first part of Grammar, which teacheth with what letters any word is to be spelled; as, lectio not lexio.  
Orthography treateth Of Letters. Chap. 1. Of Syllables. Chap. 2. Of Right Utterance. Chap. 3. Of Points of Sentences. Chap. 4.  

Chap. 1. Of Letters.  
2. of Letters, which are vowels, and Consonants. Small and Great. which stand for A Word, Or A Number.  
A Letter is the least part of a Word.  
There be 23 Latin letters. A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T V X Y Z.  
Three things belong to every Letter. 1. The Name whereby it is called. 2. The Figure or Character whereby it is known, or noted. 3. The Force or power whereby it is pronounced or uttered. Letters are distinguished according to their sound into Vowels, & Consonants.  
A Vowel is a letter which soundeth by its self; and and they be five, a e i oh u, and y the Greek one: of which, being diversely placed, are made as many Dipthongs, ae au ei eu oe, and v.  
A Consonant is a letter which soundeth not except it be joined with a Vowel, as, B C D etc. Likewise I and V become consonants, when they are ●● before themselves, or other vowels in the same syllable; as, Juno, Jovis; voluntas, vultus.  
of Consoants some are 1. Mutes, which have no sound, of themselves, and they are nine, b c d f g k p q t, in which the sound of the vowel follow's after. For f answereth to φ fi the Greek letter, and q to make it sound takes u to it. 2. Semivowels, which have some sound of themselves, and they are seven, l m n r s x z; in which the sound of the vowel goeth before. Semivowels are some of them Liquids, which do melt, or lose their force after a Mute in the same syllable; as, l m n r. Double Consonants, which have the force of two letters, as x z and j between two vowels. For in the word jejunium, the first j seems to be a single consonant, the second a double consonant, and the third a vowel.  
S is neither a Liquid nor a Mute, but a letter of its own power or pronunciation; which some therefore call Monadicon, or a letter, of whose sort there is but that one.  
H is not properly a letter, but a note of asspiration; as in pulcher, homo, hiatus; which before ie is seldom pronounced, for we say Hjeremias, Hjerosolyma, as though they begun with I consonant; but Hierarchia, as if it begun with I vowel.  
Letters according to their shape are Small or 〈◊〉 which are written with Small characters, as a b c. Great Great characters, as A B C.  
Great letters are written in the beginning of  
1. Sentences; as, Deum time, Fear God. Regem honora, Honour the King.  
2. Proper names; as, Carolus Charles. Londinum London. Thamisis the Thames.  
3. The more eminent words in a sentence; as,  
Religionis Christianae fundamentum est Fides.  
Faith is the foundation of the Christian Religion.  
4. Every verse in a Poëme; as,  
Vtendum est aetate: cito pede praeterit aetas.  
Nec bona tam sequitur, quàm bona prima fuit.  
Improve the time; time passeth quickly on;  
Nor doth so good succeed as that that's gone.  
Small letters are commonly written in all other places, whereof those are chief to be minded which have a double character, as i u and s; for i and u be vowels, but j and v be consonants, which some call ja and va. Likewise long s is always written in the beginning or middle of a word, but short s in the end of it; as scripsimus.  
When great letters be set alone, or but a few together, they do signify or stand for  
sometimes (Whole words; as, M. T. C. Mark Tully Cicero. S. P. D. Salutem plurimam dicit, sendeth much greeting. A. M. Anno mundi, In the year of the World. A. D. Anno Domini, in the year of our lord R. P. Respublica, the Commonwealth. P. C. Patres Conscripti, the Senators. HS. or LLS. Duae librae & semis, two pound and a half. N. B. nota bene, mark well. A number; as, I one, V five, X ten, L fifty, C an hundred, ∽ or CC two hundred. D or D five hundred. ∞ or M or M a thousand. ↁ five thousand. CCIↃↃ ten thousand. ↇ fifty thousand. ↈ an hundred thousand. {roman} 500000 five hundred thousand. {roman} 1000000 ten hundred thousand.  
The lesser number set before, takes away so much as itself is from the greater; but being set after, it adds to it; as, IV makes four, but VI six: IX nine, but XI eleven.  
A cross line made over a numeral letter implieth it to signify so many thousands, as otherwise it would contain lesser sums; as III three thousand. X ten thousand, and so of the rest.   

Chap. 2. Of Syllables.  
2. Of Syllables. and Of parting and putting them together.  
A Syllable, is a taking letters together, and uttering them with one breath; as, vir-tus.  
And it is Improper, which consisteth of one only vowel or diphthong; as, Aeacus. Proper, which consisteth of one or more consonants taken together with a vowel or diphthong; as, coelestis.  
He that would write rightly must learn, as he writes, to part syllables, and put them together.  
Note therefore that  
1. A Syllable in Latin doth not exceed the number of six letters; as, Stirps, Scrobs.  
2. In words of many syllables a consonant set between two vowels belongs to the later; as Do-mi-nus.  
3. If a consonant be doubled, the first belongs to the foregoing, and the latter to the following syllable; as, Annus.  
4. Consonants, which cannot be joined in the beginning of a word, must be parted in the middle of it; as, Sul-cus: and on the contrary; as, Noster.  
5. In simple words these letters always belong to the following vowel, viz.  
bd as Hebdomas. because we say Bdellium. cn Techna. Cneus. ct Doctus. Ctesipho. gn A-gnus. Gnatus. mn Amnis. Mnemosyne. phth Na-phtha. Phthisis. ps Scri-psi. Psittacus. pt Aptus. Ptolomaeus. sb Le-sbia. Sbesis. sc Piscis. Scamnum. sm Co-smus. Smaragdus. sp A-sper. Spero. sq Tesqua. Squalor. st Pa-stor. Sterto. tl Atlas'. Tleptolemus. tm La-tmius. Tmolus. tn Aetna. Thnesko.  
6. In words compounded every part must be separated from another; às, Abscondo.  
7. In words compounded with a preposition, we must respect the ear and good sound; as, Aufero, not Absfero; and Abstuli, not Autuli: and therefore it is that consonants are oftentimes put in; as, Redamo, for Reamo; and Ambigo for Amigo.  
8. S Is rightly written after X in compound words, whose simples begin with s; as, Exscribo, of ex and scribo, exsul of x and solum: but not in others; as, Exoro of Ex and oro; Exigo of ex and ago.   

Chap. 3. Of Right Utterance.  
Of right Uttering and amending the faults in Pronouncing.  
ORthoëpie, or Right Utterance, is the manner of right speaking out; as, Homo, not omo.  
Boys must neither over-hasten their speech, nor paus between every word, but must be made to avoid the usual faults in pronouncing; such as are  
1. Traulism, when one stutteth or stammereth; as, Cacacanit for canit. Which fault may be amended by quickly pattering over some ribble rabble made hard to pronounce on purpose; as,  
Arx, tridens, rostris, sphinx, praester, torrida, seps, strix.  
Plateasm, when one speaketh too broadly; as, Argò for Ergô. Mounts for Montes. Taibai for tibi.  
Ischnotes, when one speaketh too mincingly; as, Nync for nunc. Eliquis for Aliquis. Or too lispingly; as, Aputh for Apud. Amath for Amat.   

Chap. 4. Of Points in Sentences.  
4: Of Point in Sentences, which are 1. Comma, 2. Colon: 3. Semicolon; 4. Period, 5. Parenthesis () 6. Interrogation? 7. Exclamation! Hyphen-  
A Point or Paus is a note of distinction, signifying the space of breathing, or how long one may stay his breath. There be eight of these especially to be noted.  
1. A comma is an half circle, which stayeth a sentence a little by distinguishing its shorter parts; as,  
Grammaticus, rhetor, geometres, pictor, aliptes,  
Graeculus esuriens, in coelum, jusseris, ibit.  
2. A Colon is two pricks, which suspend a sentence somewhat long, by dividing it in the midst; as,  
Vtendum est aetate: cito pede praeterit aetas.  
3. A Semicolon is a prick with a Comma under it, staying a sentence longer than a Comma, and not so long as a Colon; as, Tu, quid divitiae possint, consideras; quid virtus, non item.  
4. A Period is a full prick after a perfect sentence; as, Deum time. Regem honora.  
5. A Parenthesis is two half Moons including a sentence, which though it be taken away, the speech nevertheless will be whole; as,  
— Princeps (quia bella minantur  
Hosts) militibus urbes praemunit, & armis.  
6. An Interrogation mark's a question with two pricks, whereof the higher hath a tail upward; as, Quomodo vales?  
7. An Exclamation is marked with two pricks, whereof the upper is a line coming down upon a point; as, O tempora! O mores!  
8. Hyphen is a little stroke interposed in a word divided at the end of a line; as, Humanissime: or, in words that are united, but not compounded; as Respublica, a Commonwealth.    

LIB. II. Of Etymology.  
Etymology treateth  
ETYMOLOGY is the second part of Grammar, which teacheth how to know the difference of words, duly considering the properties or things belonging to every one of them.  
Now, a word is a part or piece of a Speech, which itself doth signify something, but cannot be divided into parts that signify; as, Pietas Godliness.  

Chap. 1. Of the eight Parts of Speech, and their general Accidents.  
Of the eight Parts of Speech. which are Declined or Undeclined. To which belong, Two Numbers, Singular, and Plural. Three Persons The First. The Second. The Third.  
THere be eight sorts of Words.  

1. A Noun. Chap. 2.  
2. A Pronoun. Chap. 23.  
3. A Verb. Chap. 24.  
4. A Participle. Chap. 39  
5. An Adverb. Chap. 40.  
6. A Conjunction. Chap. 41.  
7. A Preposition. Chap. 42.  
8. An Interjection. Chap. 43.   
And these be commonly called Parts of Speech, because of them every speech is made.  
The four first of these are Declined, which change's their end. later Vndeclined, which change's not their end.  
There belong to every Part of Speech  
1. Species, or Kind, according to which a word is Primitive, which is not derived of any other word; as, Arbour, Amo. Derivative, which is derived from another word; as, Arbustum, Amicus. 2. Figure, or Form, Simple, or single; as, Amicus, Amo. Compound, or mixed; as, Inimicus, Redamo.  
There belong to words Declined  
1. Analogy, when a word agrees with a Common Rule; as, Musa, Amo.  
2. Anomaly, when a word swerv's from the Common Rule; as, Filia, Fero.  
3. Two Numbers, whereof The Singular speaketh but of one; as, Lapis a Stone. The Plural of more than one; as, Lapides Stones. 4. Three Persons. The first speaketh of himself; as, Ego nugans puer ludo. I trifling boy do play. The second is spoken to; as, Tu nugans puer ludis. Thou trifling boy playest. The third is spoken of; as, Ille nugans puer ludit. He trifling boy playeth.  
Ego and Nos be always of the First Person.  
Tu and vos, and every Vocative case of the Second.  
All other Nouns, Pronouns, and Participles be of the Third, unless these be expressed or understood.   

Chap. 2. Of a Noun, and its proper Accidents.  
A Noun nameth a thing, and is Substantive Or Adjective. Proper Or Common. It hath,  
A Noun is a Part of Speech which nameth a thing, without any difference of Time or Person; as, Manus a Hand, Domus a House.  
And it is either  
Substantive, which may stand by itself in a Speech, and requireth nothing to be added to declare its signification; as, Homo a Man.  
Adjective, which stands in need of a Substantive to declare its signification; as, Bonus good.  
A substantive showeth what a thing is; as, Equus a horse.  
An Adjective showeth what alike the thing is; as, Albus White.  
Both which are  
Proper, which is spoken of some one thing only; as, Carolus Charles, Londinum London. Thamisis Thames. Anglus English. Scotus Scotch.  
Common, which signifieth a thing common to many; as, Homo a Man, Vrbs a City, Fli●vius a River, Regio a Country, Magnus' Great.  
There belong to a Noun, Pronoun, and a Participle Case. Chap. 3. Gender. Chap. 4. Declension. Chap. 11. Comparison. Chap. 17.   

Chap. 3. Of Case.  
Six Cases. The Nominative. Genitive. Dative. Accusative. Vocative. Ablative.  
A Case is the special ending of a Noun, Pronoun, or Participle.  
There be Six cases in both numbers.  
1. The Nominative case is the first word whereby we name any thing; and it goeth before the Verb, and answereth to the question Who, or What? as, Magister docet, The Master teacheth.  
2. The Genitive case signifies whose a thing is; and answereth to this question Whose, or Whereof? as, Doctrina Magistri, The learning of the Master, or The Master's learning.  
3. The Dative attribute's, or give's something to one; and answereth to the question to whom, or to what; as, Do librum Magistro, I give a book to the Master.  
4. The Accusative case follow's the Verb, and signifies whereunto the action of the Verb referreth; and answereth to the question Whom, or What? as, Amo Magistrum, I love the Master.  
5. The Vocative case is used in calling or speaking to; as, O Magister, O Master.  
6. The Ablative case is commonly joined with a Preposition that serveth thereunto; and answereth to the question from whom, or from what? and the like; as, Accepi librum à Magistro, I received a book from the Master.  
The Nominative case is sometimes called the right, or straight case, and the rest obliqne, or thwart cases, because their end swerv from the Nominative.   

Chap. 4. Of Gender.  
even genders Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Common of two. Common of three. Doubtful. Epicoeoe.  
GEnder is the differencing of Sex in respect of Speech. For it makes a difference betwixt Nouns that are used as Hees or she's, thereby to know the agreement of the Substantive or Adjective.  
Genders of Nouns be seven; whereof the three first may not unfitly be termed Simple, and the four last Compound Genders.  
They are known by their Articles (or notes) which are borrowed of the Pronoun and be thus declined.  
Singulariter  Masc. Foem. Neut. Pluraliter Masc. Foem. Neut. Nom. Hic Haec Hoc Hi Hae Haec Gen. Hujus Hujus Hujus Horum Harum Horum Dat. Huic Huic Hui●c His His His Acc. Hunc Hanc Hoc Hos Has Haet Voc.       Abl. Hôc Hac Hôc His His His  
1. The Masculine gender is of Nouns which are given to Hees; and is declined with Hic; as, Hic vir a Man.  
2. The Feminine gender is of Nouns which are given to she's; and is declined with Haec; as, Haec mulier, a Woman.  
3. The Neuter is of Nouns which are given to things that are accounted neither Hees nor she's; and is declined with Hoc; as, Hoc saxum, a Stone.  
4. The Common of two is made of the Masculine and the Feminine joined together; and is declined with Hic and Haec; as Hic & haec Parens a Parent.  
5. The Common of three is made of all three simple Genders joined together; and is declined with Hic, Haec, and Hoc; as, Hic, Haec & Hoc Felix Happy.  
6. The Doubtful may be either the Masculine or the Feminine; and is declined with Hic vel Haec; as, Hic vel Haec Dies a Day.  
7. The Epicene comprehendeth both Sexes under one Article; as, Hic Passer a Sparrow. And in this Gender, to avoid ambiguirie, we use to express the Sex by He, or She; as, Passer mas a He, or Cock-sparrow: Passer foemina a Shee, or Hen-sparrow.   

Propria quae Maribus. OR WILLIAM family's Rules OF THE GENDERS of NOUNS.  

Chap. 5. Of the General Rules of Proper Names.  
Rules of the genders of Nouns are 1. General. 1. Of Substantives proper. 1. Proper names. 1. Of Gods. 2. Of Men. 3. Of Rivers. 4. Of Months. 5. Of Winds, are of the Masculines. Good. 2. Proper Names. 1. Of Goddesses. 2. Of Women. 3. Of Cities. 4. Of Regions. 5. Of Islands. are Feminines.  
1. PRoper Names which are given to Males, or Hees, are Masculine: As 1. of Gods, as Bacchus, chi. Mars, 'tis. Apollo, linnis. 2. Of Men, as Cato, tonnis. Virgilius, lii. 3. Of Rivers, as Tiber, bris. Orontes, 'tis. 4. Of Months, as October, bris. 5. Of Winds, as Lybs, ybis. Notus, ti. Auster, stri, the south-wind.  
II. PRoper Names showing the female kind are Feminines; as, 1. Of Goddesses, as Juno, nonis. Venus, nĕris. 2. Of Women, as Anna, nae. Philótis, lotĭdis. 3. Of Cities, as Elis, lĭdis. Opus, puntis. 4. Of Regions, as Graecia, ae. Persis, ĭdis. 5. Of Islands, as Creta, tae. Británnia, niae. Cyprus, pri.  
But some names of Cities are excepted, as 1. These Masculines, Sulmo, mónis. Agragas, gantis. 2. Some Neuters, as Argos, Tibur, bŭris. Praeneste, stis, and 3. Anxur, xŭris, which is both of the Masculine and Neuter gender.   

Chap. 6. Of the General Rules of Common Names.  
II. General of Common Names. 1. Common names of Trees are Feminines. 2. Common names of Birds Beasts, & Fish be Epicenes. 3. All that end in u●, and that change not their ending, are Neuters. 2. Special rules of common names are three.  
1. COmmon names of Trees are of the Feminine gender, as Alnus, ni, an Alder. Cupressus, si, ● Cypress. Cedrus, dri, a Cedar. But Pinus, ni, a Pine. Oloaster, stri, a wild Olive, are Masculines. Siler, lĕris, an Oster. Suber, bĕris, a Cork tree. Thus, uris, the Frankintens tree. Robur, ŏris, an Oak, and Acer, cĕris, a Maple, are Neuters.  
II. THe names of Birds, as Passer, ĕris a Sparrow. Hirundo, dĭnis, a Swallow. Of Beasts, as Tigris, grĭdis, a Tiger. Vulpes, pis, a Fox. And of Fishes, as Ostrea, ae, an Oyster. Cetus, ti, a whale, are of the Epicene gender.  
III. But here is to be noted, that of all the Nouns aforementioned, every Noun (except proper names of Men, and Women) in 'em is of the Neuter gender. And so are Nouns that change not their ending.  
But now will I speak in order touching all other Common Names, or which are as Common-names; for in these the Gender is always known by the Genitive case: as the Three Special Rules following will show.   

Chap. 7. Of the First Special Rule.  
1. A Noun not increasing, is Feminine. Except Masculines. Neuters. Doubtfuls. Commons of two.  
A Noun not increasing in the Genitive case singular, is of the Feminine Gender; as, Caro, Carnis, Flesh. Capra, Caprae, a she Goat. Nubes, Nubis, a Cloud.  
1. Many Names belonging to Men, ending in a, are of the Masculine gender; as, Scriba, bae, a Scribe: Assecla, clae, a Page. Scúrra, rae, a Scoffer. Rabula, lae, A Brawler. Lixa, xae, a Scullion. Lanista, stae, a Fencer. 2. Such as come from the first Greek Declension and end in as; as Satrap, pae, a Peer. Or in es; as Athletes, tae, a wrestler. And such as are made of them in a; as Satrapa, pae, Athleta, tae. 3. Likewise verres, ris, a boar-pig. Natalis, lis, a birth-date. aqualis, lis, an ewer. 4. Words that are compounded of as (and signify more than as) a pound weight; as centussis, sis, an hundred pound weight. 5. Add to these, Lienis, nis, the milt. orbis, bis, a roundle. calais, lis, a path. caulis, lis, a stalk. follis, lis, a path of bellows. collis, lis, a little hill. mensis, sis, a month. ensis, sis, a sword. fustis, stis a club. funis, nis, a rope. panis, nis, bread. penis, nis, a man's yard. crinis, nis, hair. ignis, nis, fire. cassis, sis, a net. fascis, scis, a faggot. torris, ris, a firebrand. sentis, 'tis, a thorn piscis, scis, a fish. unguis, guis, a nail, or hoof, vermis, mis, a worm. vectis, ctis, a door-bar. postis, stis, a post, and axis, xis, an axle trce. 6. Nouns ending  
in er, as, Venture, tris, a belly; are of the Masculine gender. os, Logos, gi', a word; us, Annus, ni, a year;  
YEt these are Feminines. 1. Mater, tris, a mother. 2. Humus, mi, the ground: domus, mi, mùs, an house, or home: Alvus, vi, a paunch: colus, li, lûs, a distaff: ficus, ci, cûs, a fig: acus, cûs, a needle: porticus cûs, a gallerte: tribus, bûs, a tribe: socrus, cri, a mother in law: nurus, rûs, a daughter in law: manus, nûs a hand: idus iduum, the Ideses of the month: anus, nûs an old woman: vannus ni, a van. 3. To these you may add Greek words which turn os into us, as papyrus, ri, paper: antidotus, ti, an antidote: costus, sti, the herb Marie: diphthongus, gi', a diphthong: byssus, si, fine fl●x: abyssus, si, an abyss: crystallus, li, crystal: Synodus, di, a Synod: sapphirus, ri, a Saphire: eremus, mi, a wilderness: arctus, cti, Charls-wain: with many more, which would be long to set down.  
II. NOuns ending in e, whose Genitive makes is, are of the Neuter gender; as, Mare, ris, the sea: rete, 'tis, a net. And 2. Nouns that end in on; as barbiton, ti, a Lute: or in 'em; as ovum, vi, an egg. 3. Hippomanes, nis, Mare-poison: cacoëthes, this, an evil custom: virus, poison: pelagus, gi', the sea. But 4. Vulgus, gi', the common people, is sometime Masculine, sometime Neuter.  
III. THese Nouns are of the Doubtful gender; Talpa, pae, a mole: dama, mae, a fallow-deer: canalis, lis, a channel: Balanus, ni, mast: finis, nis, an end: clunis, nis, a buttock: restis, stis, a rope: penus, ni, nûs, victuals: amnis, nis, a rivet. Pampinus, ni, a vine-leaf; corbis, bis, a basket; linter, tris, a cockboat; torquis, quis, a gold-chain; specus, cûs, a den; anguis, guis, a snake; ficus, ci, a pile; phaselus, li, a barge; Lecythus, thy, an oil-glass; pharus, ri, a watchtower; and Paradisus, si, Paradise.  
IIII NOuns derived of Verbs, and ending in a are of the Common-of-two-Gender; as, Grajúgena, nae, a Grecian-born, of gigno to beget; Agricola, lae, an husbandman, of colo to till; ádvena, nae, a stranger, of venio to come. 2. To these add Senex, nis, an old man; auriga, gay, a waggoner; verna, nae, a bondslave; sodalis, lis, a companion: vates, 'tis, a Prophet; extorris, ris, a banished man; Patruélis, lis, an Uncle's son; Perduellis, lis, an enemy in war; Affinis, nis, a kinsman; juvenis, nis, a youth; testis, stis, a witness; civis, vis, a citizen; canis, nis, a dog; hostis, stis, a foe, or enemy.   

Chap. 3. Of the second Special Rule, and its Exceptions.  
II. Anoun increasing long is Feminine: Except Masculines, Neuters. Doubtfuls. Commons.  
IF the last syllable but one of the genitive case singular increasing, sound long, a noun is of the feminine gender; as, Pietas, pietátis, godliness; virtus, virtútis, virtue.  
I. CErtain nouns of one syllable are Masculine; as, Sal, salis, salt; sol, solis, the Sun; ren, renis, the kidnie; splen, splenis, the spleen; Car, Caris, a man of Caria; Ser, Seris, a man of Seres; vir, viri, a man; vas, vadis, a surety; as, assis, a pound weight; mas, maris, a male; Bes, bessis, eight ounces; praes, praedis, a surety; pes, pedis; a foot; glis, gliris, a dormous; mos, moris, a manner; flos, floris, a flower; ros, roris, dew; Tros, Trois, a Trojane; muss, muris, a mous; dens, dentis, a tooth; mons, montis, a mountain; pons, pontis, a bridge; fons, fontis, a spring.  
Seps, sepis, a serpent; gryps, gryphis, a griffon; Thrax, Thraces, a Thracian; Rex, Regis, a King; grex, gregis, a flock; and Phryx, Phrygis, a Phrygian. 2. Nouns of many syllables in n; as, Acarnan, nánis, one of Acarnania; lichen, chénis, liverwort; delphin, phinis, a dolphin. 3. Nouns that end in o, and signify a body; as, Leo, ónis, a lion; curculio, ónis, a weezil; so also senio, ónis, size; ternio, ónis, trey; sermo, mónis, speech.  
4. Nouns that end in oer, as crater, téris, a goblet, be masculine. or, conditor, tóris, a builder, os, Heros, róïs, a Nobleman,  
5. So are also torrens, rentis, a brook; nesrens, entis, a pig; Oriens, entis, the East; with many in dens; as, bidens dentis, a two grained fork. 6. Add to these, gigas, gantis, a giant; Elephas, phantis, an Elephant; adamas, mantis, an adamant; Garamas, mantis, one of Garamatia; tapes, pétis, tapestry; lebes, bétis, a cauldron; Cures, rétis, one of Cures; Magnes, nétis, a loadstone; meridies, diêi, noon. 7. Nouns compounded of as, and signify part of as; as, dodrans, antis, nine ounces; semis, issis, half a pound. 8. To these add, Samnis, nitis, a Samnite; hydrops, drôpis, the dropsy; nycticorax, rácis, a night-raven; vervex, uécis, a wether; phoenix, nicis, a Phoenix; bombyx, bycis, a silkworm. Yet of these, Siren, rénis, a meremaid; and also soror, óris, a sister; and uxor, óris, a wife, are feminines.  
TWO, THese nouns of one fyllable, be of the neuter gender, mel, mellis, honey; fell, fellis, gall; lac, lactis, milk; far, farris, breadcorn; ver, veris, the spring; cour, cordis, a heart; vas, vasis, a vessel; os, ossis, a bone; and os, oris, a month; rus, ruris, the country; thus, thuris, frankincens; jus, juris, right; crus, cruris, the leg, pus, puris, corrupt matter. 2. Nouns in all as, capital, talis, a quoif. And in are, as, laquear, aris, a vault, 3. Halec, lecis, an herring, is of the feminine and neuter gender.  
III. THese nouns be of the Doubtful gender, Python, ónis, a spirit of Prophecy; scrobs, bis, a ditch; serpens, pentis, a serpent; bubo, bónis, an owl; rudens, dentis, a cable; grus, gruis, a crane; Perdix, dicins, a partridge; lynx, cis, a spotted beast; limax, ácis, a s●all; stirps, pis, a stock; calx, cis, an heel; dies, dieï, a day, is only masculine in the plural number.  
iv THese nouns be of the Common-of-two-gender; Parens, rentis, a parent; author, tóris, an Author; infans, fantis, a babe; adolescens, scentis, a youth; dux, ducis, a leader; illex, légis, a lawless person; haeres, rédis, an heir; exlex, légis, an outlaw. Words compounded of frons, 'tis. a forehead; as, bifrons, 'tis, one having two foreheads; custos, stódis, a keeper; bos, bovis, a neat; fur, furis, a thief; sus, suis, a swine; sacerdos, dotis, a Priest.   

Chap. 9 Of the third Special Rule, and its Exceptions.  
III. A noun increasing short is of the masculine gender. Except Feminines. Neuter. Doubtfuls. Commons.  
A Noun is of the masculine gender, if the last syllable but one of the genitive case singular increasing, sound short; as, sanguis, sánguinis, blood.  
I. A Noun of more than two syllables, ending in do, which makes dinis; as, dulcédo, dinis, sweetness; and in go which makes giniss; as, compâgo, ginis, a joint, are of the feminine gender. 2. Add Virgo, ginis, a maid; grando, dinis, haste; fides, dei, faith; compes, pedis, fetters; teges, getis, a mat; seges, getis, standing corn; arbour, boris, a tree; hiems, emis, winter; bacchar, charis, the herb Ladie's-globe; sindon, dŏnis, fine linen; Gorgon, gŏnis, the monster Gorgon; icon, cŏnis, animage; Amazon, zŏnis, an Amazon. 3. Greek nouns ending in as as, lampas, pădis, a lamp. Or in is, as jaspis, spĭdis, jasper; cassis, sĭdis, an helmet; cuspis, spĭdis, a spear-point. 4. One word in us, as pecus, cŭdis, small cattle. 5. To these add, forfex, ficis, a pair of shears; pellex, licis an harlot; carex, ricis, sedg; supellex, lectilis, householdstuff; appendix, dicis, an appentice; Histrix, stricis, an hedgehog; coxendix, dicis, an hip; filix, licis, feign. 6. Halcyon, onis, a King's fisher; and mulier, liĭris, a woman, may be put in this rank, or rule.  
II. A Noun, signifying a thing without life, is of the neuter gender, if it end in a; as, probléma, matis, a problem; In en; as, omen, mĭnis, luek; In are; as, iubar, băris, the sunbeam; In ur; as, jecur, cŏris, the liber; In us; as, onus, nĕris, a burden; In put; as, occiput, cipitis, the hinder part of the head. 2. Yet of these, pecten, ctinis, a comb; furfur, furis, bran; are masculines. 3. These are neuters, Cadaver, veris, a carcase; verber, beris, a stripe; iter, tineris, a journey; suber beris, cork; tuber, beris, a toad-stool; uber, beris, a dug; gingiber, beris, guiger; laser, seris, the herb Benjamin; cicer, ceris, a fetch; piper, peris, pepper; papáver, veris, poppy; siser, seris, a parsnip; siler, leris, an oster. 4. Aequor, oris, the sea; marmor, oris, a marble; and ador, doris, wheat, are neuters. 5. And so is pecus, cattle when it makes pecoris.  
III. THese nouns are of the Doubtful gender, cardo, dinis, the hinge of a door; margo, ginis, a margin; cinis, neris, ashes; obex, bicis, a bolt; pulvis, veris, dust; adeps, dipis, fat; forceps, cipis. a pair of tongs; pumex, micis, a pumice-stone; ramex, micis, burstness; anas, natis a duck; imbrex, bricis, a gutter-tile; culex, licis, a gnat; natrix, tricis, a water-snake; onyx, nycis, the nail of one's hand, with its compounds, and silex, licis, a flint; though these be rather used as masculines.  
iv THese nouns be of the Common-two-gender, vigil, gilis, a watchman; pugil, gilis, a champion; exsul, sulis, a banished man; praesul, sulis, a superintendent; Homo, minis, a man; nemo, vows the genitive case, and in the dative makes nemini, no body; martyr, tyris, a martyr; Ligur, guris, one of Liguria; augur, guris, a foothsaier; Arcas, cadis, an Arcadian; Antistes, stitis, a Precedent; miles, litis, a soldier; pedes, ditis, a footman; interpres, pretis, an interpreter; comes, mitis, a companion; hospes, spitis, an host, or guest; ales, litis, a bird of wing; Praeses, sidis, a Precedent; Princeps, cipis, a Prince; auceps, cupis, a fouler; eques, quitis, an horseman; obses, sidis, an hostage. 2. And many other nouns derived of verbs, as conjux, jugis, an husband or a wife; judex, dicis, a judge; vindex, dicis, a revenger; opifex, ficis, a workman; and aruspex, spicis, a foothsaier.   

Chap. 10. Of the genders of Adjectives.  
General Rules of Adjectives. 1. Of one termination. 2. Of two terminations. 3. Of three terminations. 1. Exception of Adjectives like Substantives. 2. Of Adjectives that are declined. by is and er.  
I. ADjectives of one termination are of all three genders; as, hic, haec, & hoc felix, licis, happy; hic, haec, & hoc, audax, dacis, bold.  
II. Adjectives, if they have two terminations, the first is of the Common-of-two-gender; the second, is of the Neuter; as, hic & haec, omnis, & hoc, omne, all.  
III. But if Adjectives do vary three terminations; as, Sacer, sacra, sacrum, holy: the first termination is Masculine, the second is Feminine, and the third is Neuter.  
But some are, by declining, almost Substantives, yet by nature and use, rather Adjectives: such are Pauper, peris, poor; puber, beris, of ripe age; degener, generis, one that goes out of kind; uber, beris, plentiful; dives, vitis, rich; locuples, plétis, wealthy; sospes, spitis, safe; comes, mitis, a companion; superstes, stitis, a survivor, and some others, which due reading will teach.  
2. These Nouns have a certain manner of declinig proper to themselves; Campester, of the plain field; volucer, swift in flight; celeber, famous; celer, swift; saluber, wholesome: To which add Pedester, of a footman; equester, of an horseman; acer, sharp; paluster, of a fen; alacer, cheerful; sylvester, of a wood: And these you shall decline thus: Hic celer, haec celeris, hoc celere, swift; or, Hic & haec celeris, & hoc celere, swift. etc.    

Chap. 11. Of the first Declension.  
There be five Declensions. Nouns of the first be declined like musa;  
DEclension is the variation of a word by Cases.  
There be five declensions of nouns.  
A Noun is known of what Declension it is by the ending of the Genitive case singular; for the Genitive case  
of the 1st 2d 3d 4th 5th end's in ae i is ûs eï  
The Genitive case is form of the Nominative, (which is the first word) by changing the termination; and other cases are form of the Genitive.  
The Vocative, in the singular number, is, for the most part, like the Nominative; and in the plural always.  
Nouns of the neuter gender have the nominative, the accusative, and vocative cases alike in both numbers; which three cases end in a in the pluràl.  
The Dative and Ablative plural are always alike.  
The Genitive plural, in many words admit's a Syncope, i. e. the loss of a middle letter or syllable.  
The first Declension is, of Latin nouns (for the most part Feminines) not increasing, ending in a; which are declined like Musa, a song.  
The terminations of the first Declension are Singularly in the Nominative case a The example, or type thereof is Musa Genitive ae Musae Dative ae Musae Accusative am Musam Vocative a Musa Ablative â Musâ Plurally in the Nominative case ae Musae Genitive arum Musarum Dative is Musis Accusaive as Musas Vocative ae Musae Ablative is Musis  
As is found in that Genitive case singular in imitation of the Greeks; as, Pater-familias, the good man of the house.  
The ancients dissolved ae into any, as aulani for aulae.  
Filia, nata, dea, equa, with some few others, make their Dative and Ablative plural in abus, to distinguish them from their Masculines, Filius, natus, Deus, equus, which follow the form of the second Declension.  
This Declension is also of Greek Nouns, viz. Masculines in as, and es, and Feminines in a and e.  
Nouns in as and as, make their Accusative in am and an; as,  
Nom Gen Dat. Acc. Voc. Ablat Aeneas Aeneae Aeneae Aeneam, an Aenea Aeneâ Maia Maiae Maiae Maiam, an Maia Maiâ  
Greek words in the plural number are declined like Latin.  
Es makes in the Accusatixe case en, in the Vocative and Ablative e, or a.  
Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. Voc. or Ablat. Anchises Anchisae Anchisae Anchisen Anchise vel Anchisa  
E makes the Genitive in es, the Dative in e, the Accusative in en, the Vocative and Ablative in e; as,  
Nom Gen. Dat. Acc. Voc. & Abl. Penelope Penelope's Penelope Penelopen Penelope  
Some add hereunto Hebrew words in am; as, Adam, Adae, which are better reduced to the second Declension by putting to us; as, Adamus, Adami, Adam.   

Chap. 12. Of the second Declension.  
Of the Second like Magister, Dominus, or Regnum.  
THe second Declension is (for the most part) of Masculines  
in ere as Magister, a Master. Or of Neuters in 'em; as, Regnum, a Kingdom. us Dominus, a Lord. The terminations of this Declension are Singularly Nom. r, us, 'em. The Examples or Types of it are Magister Dominus Regnum Gen. i. Magistri Domini Regni Dat. o. Magistro Domino Regno Acc. 'em. Magistrum Dominum Regnum Voc. r, e, 'em. Magister Domine Regnum Abl. o. Magistro Domino Regno Plurally Nom. i, a. Magistri Domini Regna Gen. orum. Magistrorum Dominorum Regnorum Dat. is. Magistris Dominis Regnis Acc. os, a. Magistros Dominos Regna Voc. i, a. Magistri Domini Regna Abl. is. Magistris Dominis Regnis  
When the Nominative endeth in us the vocative endeth in e; but Deus God, maketh o Deus, and Filius a son maketh o fili.  
Proper names of Men in ius make their Vocative in i; as, Nom. Georgius George, voc. Georgi.  
Agnus, a lamb; lucus, a grove; chorus, a choir; fluvius, a river, do make their Vocative case in e and in us.  
We read in the plural number Dii Deorum Diis, Deos, Dii, Diis, gods. Dei Deûm  
Greek nouns of this Declension have three terminations: eus of the Masculine, os of the Masculine and Feminine, and on of the neuter gender.  
Eus makes the genitive case ' n er, or eo!, the dative in ein, the Accusative in ëa, the Vocative in eu, the Ablative in eo.  
Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. Voc. Abl. Orphena pheï, pheos Orpheï Orphea pheu pheo  
Ös makes the Accusative case in on, as, Nom. Delos, Gen. Deli, Dat. Delo, Acc. Delos, Voc. Deal, Ablat. Delo:  
But Attic nouns in os make the Genitive in o; as, Androgeos, Androgeo, etc. And nouns contracted in us make their Vocative in u; as, Oedipus, Oedipu.  
On is declined like other Neuters; as, Nom. Ilium, Gen. Ilii, Dat. Ilio, Acc. Ilium, Voc. Ilium, Abl. Ilio.   

Chap. 13. Of the third Declension.  
Of the Third like Lapis or Caput. What nouns make the Acc. in in. Exit & in. The Abl. in i Nom-plural in jam. Es & eyes. Gen. in ium Unm, Orum & ium. Abl. in ù & bus.  
THe third Declension is very divers, for it contein's all Genders, and (at the least) eleven terminations in the Nominative case singular: in a, c, e, i, l, n, o, r, s, t, x.  
The terminations of this Declension are Singularly Nom. divers The Examples, or Types of it are Lapis Caput Gen. is Lapidis Capitis Dat. i Lapidi Capiti Acc. 'em Lapidem Caput Voc. divers Lapis Caput Abl. e Lapide Capite Plurally Nom. es Lapides Capita Gen. 'em Lapidum Capitum Dat. ibus Lapidibus Capitibus Acc. es Lapides Capita Voc. es Lapides Capita Abl. ibus Lapidibus Capitibus  
The Accusative cases of some words are declined only in in; as, vis. strength; ravis, hoarseness; sitis, thirst; tussis, a cough; maguderis, the stalk of the herh Benjamin; Charybdis, a gulf; and amussis, a Carpenter's line; to which we may add the names of Rivers; as, Araxis, the Soan in France; Tiber, Cybris by Rome.  
Some make their Accusative in 'em and in indifferently; as, Pelvis, a basin; turris, a tower; buris, a plow-stilt; puppis, a poop of a ship; torquis, a chain to wear about one's neck; securis, an axe; restis, a rope; febris, an Agne; clavis, a key; bipennis, a twibil; aqualis, a waterpot; navis,, a ship.  
Their Ablative end's in i only, whose Accusative end's only in in; as, tussim, Abl. tussi.  
Names of Months in is and er, do make their Ablative in i only; as, September, Abl, bri; Aprilis, Abl. li.  
Neuters ending in all, are, and e, for the most part make their Ablative in i;  
as, Vectigal, Abl. li, toll. For Rete in the Ablative, is of Retis, Calcar, Abl. ri, a spur. Rete, Abl. ti, a net:  
Yet these Nouns in are, and e, keep e in their Ablative case; as, Far, breadcorn; hepar, the liber; jubar, the sunbeam; nectar, sweet wine; gausape, a freeze; praesepe, a stall; Soracte, a hill in Italy; Praeneste, the city Palestrina; Reate, the city Reati in Italy.  
Adjectives, having the Nominative common in is, or oer, and the Neuter in e, make their Ablative in i only; as, fortis, ti, strong; Acer, or Acris, cri, sharp.  
Nouns, which take on them the nature of Adjectives, make their Ablative case for the most part in i; as, Sodalis, li.  
Except Proper names; as, Clemens, 'tis, Clement.  
Nouns, whose Accusative cases end in 'em or in, make their Ablative in e and i; as, Puppis, Acc. pem vel pim, Abl. poe vel pi.  
Par also, with its compounds, make both e and i. Also nouns of the Comparative degree; as, melior, better; and the rest of the Adjectives except those abovementioned in er or is: But Pauper, poor; degener, out of kind; uber, plentiful; sospes, safe; and hospes, an host; make their Ablative in e only.  
Some Substantives; as, Ignis, fire; amnis, a river; anguis, a snake; supellex, householdstuff; vectis, a door-bar; unguis, a nail, or hoof: Gentiles; as, Arpinâs, one of Arpinum; and Verbals in trix; as, Victrix, a Conqueress, make their Ablative in e and i.  
Neuters, whose Ablative end's in i, or in e and i, make their Nominative plural in jam; as, Fortis, tia, strong; felix, licia, happy.  
Except Comparatives; as, fortiora, stronger: but Plus makes plura and pluria, more.  
Some Nouns make their Nominative and Accusative plural in es or eye the diphthong; as, Omnes or omneis, all; and eyes is sometimes contracted into is; as, Sardis.  
Of Ablatives in i only, or in e or i, the Genitive case plural end's in ium; as, utili, utilium, profitable; puppi vel pe, puppium. Except Comparatives; as, meliorum.  
And Supplicum of Supplex, a suppliant. Complicum Complex, a partner. Strigilum Strigil, an hors-comb. Artificum Artifex, an artifice. Veterum Vetus, old. Vigilum Vigil, a watchman. Memorum Memor, mindful. Inopum Inops, poor Pagilum Pugil, a champion. But plum makes plurium.  
When the Nominative cases singular end with two Consonants, the Genitive plural end in ium; as, Pars partium.  
Except Hyemum, of Hiems, winter. Principum, Princeps, a Prince. Forcipum, Forceps, a pair of tongs. Municipum, Municeps, a freemen. Inopum, Inops, poor. Coelibum, Coelebs, a single-man. Clientum, Cliens, a Client. Participum, Particeps, a Partner.  
When like syllables are found in the Nominative and Genitive cases singular, the Genitive case plural end's in ium; as, Collis, a hill, makes Collium,  
To which add, Virium, of Vis, strength. Salium, Sal, salt. Ditium, Dis, rich. Manium, of Manes, spirits. Penatium, Penates, household-gods. Litium, Lis, controversy.  
Yet except,  
Vatum, of Vates, a Poet. Juvenum, Juvenis, a youth. Canum, Canis, a dog. Opum, of Opens, wealth. Apum, Apes, a Bee. Panum, Panis, bread.  
As, a pound, makes assium; mas, a male, marium; vas-vadis, a surety, vadium; nox, night, noctium; nix, snow, nivium; os, a bone, ossium; faux, a jaw, faucium; mus, a mous, murium; caro, flesh, carnium; cor, a heart, cordium.  
Alice, a bird. makes alituum; and coelites, the heavenly inhabitants coeli●num; by taking to them u.  
Boum of bos bovis, an ox, is an irregular word, as also bobus and bubus, for bovibus.  
The names of Feasts, which are only plural, make their Genitive case sometimes in orum; as, Agonalia, liorum: sometimes in ium; as, Floralia, lium: and sometimes both in orum, and ium; as, Saturnalia, liorum, and lium.  
Neuters singular in a make the Dative and Ablative plural in is or ibus; as, Problema, 'tis, vel matibus. So also Quinquatria, triis, vel tribus.  
Words derived from the Greek, when they are declined after their own manner, imitate these examples.  
Sing. Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. Voc. Abl. Some of these make the Genitive plural in ων and ium. Titan an in os ani ana an ane Arcas as ados adi adam as ade P●illis is idos idi ida i iae Genesis is is, eos i in, in i i Opus us untos unti unta u unte Tethys is yos it yn y y Dido oh ûs o o o o Achilles es eos eï ea e e   

Chap. 14. Of the fourth Declension.  
THe fourth Declension hath only two terminations in the Nominative case singular,  
us, Masculine and Feminine, as Manus. u, Neuter, Cornu. The terminations of this Declension are Singularly Nom. us, u. The Examples, or Types of it are Manus Cornu Gen. ûs, u, Manûs Cornu Dat. ui, u. Manui Cornu Acc. 'em, u. Manum Cornu Voc. us, u. Manus Cornu Abl. u, u. Manu Cornu Plurally Nom. us, va. Manus Cornua Gen. vum. Manuum Cornuum Dat. ibus. Manibus Cornibus Acc. us, va. Manus Cornua Voc. us, va. Manus Cornua Abl. ibus. Manibus Cornibus  
Anciently the Genitive singular ended in i, and üis, thence the Ancients said fructi for fructûs; and anüis for anûs.  
The most holy name Jesus, makes Jesum in the Accusative, and in other cases Jesus.  
The Dative case hath sometimes u; as, Fructu for fructui.  
These words make their Dative and Ablative plural in ubus; viz. Artus, a joint; arcus, a bow; tribus a stock; acus, a needle; ficus, a fig; specus, a hole; quercus, an oak; lacus, a lake; partus, young; veru, a spit; genu, a knee; All other nouns make ibus.   

Chap. 15. Of the fift Declension.  
Of the Fift like Fancies.  
THe fift Delension hath one only termination in es; as, Fancies, a face.  
All nouns of this Declension are Feminines; except Dies, a day, and Meridies, noon-daie.  
Nom. es Fancies The Genitive singular once ended in es, two, and e, & the Dative sometimes in e. Gen. ei Faciei Dat. ei Faciei Acc. 'em Faciem Some nouns of the third Declension were declined after this; as plebs, plebei. Voc. es Fancies Abl. e Facie Nom. es Fancies No nouns of this Declension have the Gen. Dat. and Ablative plural, except, Res, a thing; species, a kind; fancies, a face; acies, an edge; dies, a day; meridies, mid-date, or noon. Gen. erum Facierum Dat. ebus Faciebus Acc. es Fancies Voc. es Fancies Abl. ebus Faciebus   

Chap. 16. Of the declining of Adjectives.  
Adjectives of three Terminations are declined like Bonus. Of three Articles like Felix, or Tristis.  
ADjectives are declined with three Terminations, or three Articles.  
Adjectives of three Terminations are varied after the first and second Declension; viz. The termination r like Magister; us like Dominus; a like Musa; 'em like Regnum.  
Their example or type is Singulariter Nom. Bonus Bona Bonum Gen. Boni Bonae Boni Dat. Bono Bonae Bono Acc. Bonum Bonam Bonum Voc. Bone Bona Bonum Abl. Bono Bona Bono Pluraliter Nom. Boni Bonae Bona Gen. Bonorum Bonarum Bonorum Dat. Bonis Bonis Bonis Acc. Bonos Bonas Bona Voc. Boni Bonae Bona Abl. Bonis Bonis Bonis  
Vnus, one; totus, whole; solus, alone; ullus, unie; altar, another; uter, whether, and their compounds, make their Genitive in ïus, and the Dative in i  
So also doth alius, alia, aliud, Gen. alius, Dat. alii, etc.  
Ambo both, duo, two, are irregular, and make their neuter gender in o, and be thus declined.  
Pluraliter Nom. Ambo Ambae Ambo Gen. Amborum Ambarum Amborum Dat. Ambobus Ambabus Ambobus Acc. Ambos Ambas Ambo Voc. Ambo Ambae Ambo Abl, Ambobus Ambabus Ambobus  
Adjectives of one or two Terminations follow the rule of the third Declension, and are declined with three Articles.  
Their Examples or Types be Singularly Nom. Hic, haec, & hoc, Felix. Singularly Nom. Hic, & haec Tristis, & hoc, Triste. Gen. Hujus, Felicis. Gen. Hujus, Tristis, Dat. Huic, Felici. Dat. Huic, Tristi. Acc. Hunc, & hanc Felicem, & hoc Felix. Acc. Hunc, & hanc, Tristem, & hoc Triste. Voc. Felix. Voc. T●ristis, & Triste. Abl. Hoc, hac, & hoc Felice vel Felici Abl. Tristi. Plurally Nom. Hi, & hae, Felice's, & haec. Felicia. Plurally Nom. Hi, & hae, Tristes, & baec, Tristia. Gen. Horum, harum, & horum Felicium. Gen. Horum, harum, & horum, Tristium. Dat. His, Felicibus. Dat. His, Tristibus. Acc. Hos, & has, Felice's, & haec, Felicia. Acc. Hos, & has Tristes, & haec, Tristia. Voc. Felice's, & Felicia. Voc. Tristes, Tristia. Abl. His, Felicibus. Abl. Tristibus.  
Nouns compounded of a Substantive and Adjective are declined in both; as, Respublica, Reipublicae: Jusjurandum, jurisjurandi.  
But such as are compounded of two Substantives, are declined only in the former; as, Paterfamiliâs, Patris-familiâs.   

Chap. 17. Of Comparison.  
There be three degrees of Comparison. The Positive. The Comparative. The Superlative. But the comparison of some words is ●●egular. 〈◊〉. Defective Improper.  
NOuns, whose signification may encreas or be diminished, do form Comparison.  
Comparison is the varying of a word by Degree.  
There be three Degrees of Comparison, The Positive. The Comparative. The Superlative.  
The Positive Degree is the first word signifying a thing Simply, and without Excess; as, Tristis, sad; durus, hard.  
The Comparative somewhat exceeds the signification of his Positive by more; as, Tristior, sadder, or more sad; durior, harder, or more hard.  
The Superlative exceedeth far above the Positive by very, or most; as, Tristissimus, very sad; durissimus, most hard.  
The Comparative is form of the first case of the Positive, that endeth in i, by putting thereto or, and us, as of Tristi is made tristior, and tristius; of Duri, durior, and durius. The Superlative ssimus; as, of Tristi is made tristissimus; of Duri, durissimus.  
Positives in r, make their Superlative by putting to rimus; as, Pulcer, fair plucerrimus.  
But dexter, on the right hand, dexterior, more on the right hand, dextimus, most on the right hand; and sinister, on the left hand, sinisterior, more on the left hand, sinistimus, most on the left hand, as the Ancients form them, are excepted.  
These six ending in lis, do make the Superlative by changing lies into limus; viz. Docilis, docillimus, docible; agilis, agillimus, nimble; gracilis, gracillimus, slender; humilis, humillimus, humble; similis, simillimus, like; facilis, facillimus, easy.  
Such as are derived of dico, loquor, volo, facio, are compared as of Positives in en●; as, Maledicus, maledicentior, maledicentissimus, cursing; magniloquus, magniloquentior, magniloquentissimus, brag; benevolus, benevolentior, benevo'entissimus, kind; magnificus, magnificentior, magnificentissimus, stately.  
If a Vowel come before us in the end, the Comparative degree is made by magis, and the Superlative by maximè; as, Pius, godly; magis pius, more godly; maximè pins, most godly.  
These also are excepted from the General Rule aforegoing:  
Bonus, good, melior, better, eptimus, the best. Malus, bad, pejor, worse, pessimus, the worst. Magnus, great, major, greater, maximus, the greatest. Parvus, little, minor, less, minimus, the least. Multus, much, plus, more, plurimus, the most. Vetus, old, veterior, older, veterrimus, oldest; Maturus, ripe maturior, riper, maturimus, & maturissimus, very ripe; Nequam, naught, nequior, naughtier, nequissimus, the noughtiest.  
And many such like, whose Positives are derived of Adverbs, and Prepositions; as,  
Citer, hitherly, citerior, citimus, of citra on this side.  
Exterus, outerlie, exterior extimus, of extra without. extremus  
Inferus netherlie, inferior, infimus, of infra, beneath, Posterus, afterlie; posterior, postremus, of post after.  
Superus, overlie superior, supremus, of: supra above. summus,  
To which are wont to be added, Vltra, beyond, ulterior, further, ultimus, the furthest; Propè, near, propior, nearer, proximus, the next; Pridem, long afore, prior, former, primus, the first; and Diu, long, diutior, longer, diutissimus, very long.  
These words are seldom met withal in reading Autors, and therefore seldom to be used; viz. Assiduior, more daily; Strenuior, more stout; Egregiissimus, very excellent; Mirificissimus, very wonderful; Pientissimus, vel piissimus, very godly; ipsisssmus, the very he; perpetuissimus, most perpetual; tuissimus, most yours; exiguissimus, the least that may be; multissimus, the most; proximior, nearer than the nearest.  
Some want the Positive. Ocyor, swifter; ocyssimus, very swift; potior, better able; potissimus, the best able; deterior, worse; deterrimus, the worst; penitior, innex, penitissimus, most innerlie.  
Some want the Comparative. Novus, new; novissimus, the newest; inclytus, famous; inclytissimus, most famous; invitus, unwilling; invitissimus, most unwilling; meritus, deserved; meritissimus, most deserved; sacer, holy; sacerrimus, most holy; falsus, falls; falsissimus, very falls; fidus, trusty; fidissimus, most trusty; nuper, nuperus, late; nuperrimus, very late; diversus, divers; diversissimus, very divers.  
Some want the Superlative; as, Opimus, wealthy; opimior, more wealthy; juvenis, young; junior, younger; senex, old; signior, older; declivis, downhill; declivior, more downhill; longinquus, afar off; longinquior further off; salutáris, wholesome; salutarior, more wholesome; supinus, careless; supinior, more careless; adolescens, youthful; adolescentior, more youthful; ingens, huge; ingentior, more huge; satur, full; saturior, fuller; antè, before; anterior, more before; infinitus, infinite; infinitior, more infinite; taciturnus, silent; taciturnior, more silent; communis, common; communior, more common.  
Licentior, more licentious, is only the Comparative.  
Sometimes also Comparison is made of Substantives, but abusively; as, Nero, Neronior, more cruel than Nero; Poenus, Poenior, more perfidious than a Carthaginian.   

Quae Genus: OR, ROB. ROBINSON'S Rules of Nouns Heteroclits, or Irregular.  

Chap. 18. Of varying Heteroclits.  
Heteroclits are 1: Variant.  
NOuns which 1. vary or change their Gender or Declining. 2. Those which want of any new fashion. 3. And those which have too much, are Heteroclits.  
These nouns change their gender and declining, which are,  
1. Feminines in the singular number, and neuters in the plural; as,  
1. Pergamus, mi, the town Pergamus, makes Pergamon, morum; Supellex, lectilis, householdstuff, makes supellectilia, unless it want the plural.  
2. Neuters in the singular, and masculines and neuters in the plural; as, Rastrum, stri, a rake, makes rastri, & rastra, strorum; fraenum, ni, a bridle, makes fraeni, & fraena, norum; filum, li, a thread, makes fili, & fila, lorum; Capistrum, stri, an halter, makes capistri, & stra, strorum.  
3. Neuters in the singular, and masculines only in the plutal; Argos, gi', the city Argos, makes Argi, gorum; coelum, li, heaven, makes coeli, lorum.  
4. Neuters in the singular, and feminine in the plural; as, Nundinum, ni, a fair, makes nundinae, narum; epulum, li, a banquet, makes epulae, alarm; balneum, nei, a bath, makes balneae, nearum, though JUVENAL hath balnea in the plural number.  
5. Masculines in the singular, and neuters in the plural; as, Maenalus, li, a hill in Arcadia, makes Maenala, lorum; Dindymus, mi, the top of Ida, makes Dindyma, morum; Ismarus, ri, a hill in Thrace, makes Ismara, rorum; Tartarus, ri, Hell, makes Tartara, rorum; Taygetus, ti, a hill in Lacedemonia, makes Taygeta, torum; Taenarus, ri, a hill in Laconia, makes Taenera, rorum; Massicus, ci, a hill in Italy, makes Massica, corum; Gargarus, ri, a top of Ida, makes Gargara, rorum.  
6. Masculines singular, and masculine and neuters in the plural; Sibilus, li, an hissing, makes sibili, & sibila, lorum; jocus, ci, a jest, makes joci, & joca, corum; locus, ci, a place, makes loci, & loca, corum; Avernus, ni, a lake in Campania, makes Averni, & Averna, norum.   

Chap. 19 Of Heteroclits that want Case.  
2. Defective in Case.  
2. THose Heteroclits which follow are defective in Case, or Number.  
1. Aptotes are such as vary no case; as, Fas; right; nîl, nothing; nihil, nothing; instar, like; such as end in u and i; as, cornu, a horn; genu, a k●●e; gummi, gum; frugi, thirsty; Likewise Tempe, a pleasant field; tot, so many; quot, how many; and all nouns of number from three to an hundred.  
2. A Monoptote is a noun of one only case; as, Noctu, by night; natu, by birth; jussu, by bidding; injussu, without bidding; astu, by craft; promtu, in readiness; permissu, by sufferance; but we read astus in the Accusative case plural, and inficias a venial, which word is only found.  
3. Those are Diptotes which have two cases only, as, Nom. for'rs, Abl. fort, hap; Gen. spontis, Abl. sponte, of one's own accord; Nom. plum, Gen. pluris, more; Gen. repetundarum, of bribery, Abl. repetundis; Gen. jugeris, of an acre; Abl. jugere; Gen. verberis, of a stroke, Abl. verbere; Nom. suppetiae, ard; Acc. suppetias; Nom. tantundem, so much, Gen. tantidem; Gen. impetis, violence, Abl. impete; Acc. vicem, a turn, Abl. vice; whereof verberis, vicem, plus, and jugeris have all their cases in the plural number.  
4. Those are Triptotes which have three cases only; as, Gen. precis, Acc. precem, Abl. prece, prayer; Gen. opis, Acc. opem, Abl. open, help; vis, force, wanteth no case except the Dative. And these have all their cases in the plural number.  
5. Relatives; as, qui, which; Interrogatives; as, ecquis, who; Distributives; as, nullus, none; neuter, neither, and omnis, all.  
Indefinites; as, quilibet, any one; altar, another, want the Vocative case, and all Pronouns, except Noster, ours, nostras, on our side; meus, mine; tu, thou.   

Chap. 20. Of Heteroclits that want Number.  
Defective in the singular number. And Plural.  
1. ALl Proper Names, having a restraining nature, do want the plural number; as, Mars, 'tis, Mars; Cato, tonis, Cato; Gallia, liae, France; Roma, mae, Rome; Ida, dae, an hill near Troie; Tagus, gi', the river Taio in Spain; Laelaps, pis, a dog's name; Parnassus, si, a hill in Phocis; Bucephalus, li, Alexander's horse. Add to these, the names of Corn; as, Triticum, wheat. Things sold by Weight; as, Lana, wool; Of Herbs; as, salvia, sage; Of Liquors; as, Cervisia, beer; Of Metals; as, aurum, gold; wherein observe the opinion of Autors, for sometimes they keep, sometimes they reject the plural number.  
2. Hordeam, dei, barley; far, ris, breadcorn; mel, lis, honey; mulsum, si, wine mingled with honey; defrutum. ti, wine boasted to the half, and thus, thuris, frankincens, have only the three like cases in the plural number.  
3. These Masculines want the plural number; Hesperus, ri, the evening star; vesper, ris, the evening; pontus, ti, the sea; limus, mi, mud; fimus, mi, dung; penus, ni, vel ûs, victuals; sanguis, guinis, blood; aether, ris, the sky; and nemo, no body; but nemo vows the Genitive and Vocative singular, as well as the plural number.  
4. These Feminines have seldom the plural number; Pubes, bis, ripeness of age, salus, lútis, health; talio, ónis, like for like; indoles, lis, towardliness; tussis. sis, the cough;  
pix, cis, pitch; humus, mi, the ground; lues, is, the murrain; sitis, 'tis, thirst; fuga, gay, flight; quies, étis, rest; cholera, rae, choler; fames, mis, hunger; bilis, lis, choler; senecta, ctae, old age; juventus, tútis, youth; But soboles, lis, an offspring; labes, bis, a spot; and all nouns of the fifth Declension will have three like cases in the plural number, except, res, rei, a thing; species, ciéi, a kind; fancies, ciéi; a face; acies, ciéi, an edge; and dies, diëi, a day; which words are whole in the plural number. To these they are wont to add many Feminines; as. Stultitia, tiae, foolishness; invidia, diae, envy; sapientia; tiae, wisdom; desidia, diae, sloth; and a many words of like sort, which reading affords: and these sometimes, but very seldom, have the plural number.  
5. These Neuters have not the plural number; Delicium, cii, one's delight; senium, nii, old age; lethum, thy, death; coenum, ni, dirt; salum, li, the salt sea; barathrum, thri, hell; virus, poison; vitrum, tri, glass; viscum, sci, birdlime; penum, ni, provision; justitium, tii, vacation time; nihilum, li, nothing; ver, veris, the spring; lac, ctis, milk; gluten, tinis, give; halec, lécis, an herring; gelu, frost; solium, lii, a throne; jubar, baris, the sunbeam. Here also you may put many such like, which you shall meet with as you read.  
6, These masculines have only the plural number; Manes, nium. spirits; majores, rum, Ancestors; cancelli, lorum, a lattice; liberi, rorum, children; ants, tium, the first rank of vines; menses, sium, woman's flowers; lemures, rum, hobgoblins; fasti, storum, a Register-book; minores, rum, posterity; natales, lium, one's stock; penates, tium, household gods; and names of places; as, Gabii, biorum; Locri, erorum; and whatsoëver the like you read any where.  
7. These are of the Feminine gender and plural Number;  
Exuviae, arum, an Adder's slough; phalerae, rarum, hors-trappings; Nom. grates, Acc. grates, thanks; manubiae; arum, spoil; Idus, duum, the Ideses of months, antiae, arum, forelocks; induciae, arum, truce; insidiae, arum, lying in wait; minae, arum, threaten; excubiae, arum, watch and ward; Nonae, arum, the Nones of a month; nugae, garum, trifles; tricae, carum, gewgaws; Calendae, arum, the first day of the month; quisquiliae, arum, sweep; thermae, marum, hot baths; cunae, narum, a tradle; dirae, rarum, cursing; exequiae, arum, rites at funerals; inseriae, arum, sacrifices to the infernal spirits; feriae, arum, holidays; primitiae, arum, the first fruits; plagae, arum, hunter's nets; valvae, varum, double, or two-leaved doors; divitiae, arum, riches; nuptiae, arum, a wedding; lactes, ctium, the small guts. To these may be added Thebae, barum, Thebes; Athenae, narum, Athens in Greece; of which sort you may find many names of places.  
8. These Neuters have seldom the singular number; Moenia, ium, iorum, the walls of a Town; tesqua, squorum, rough places; praecordia, orum, the midriff; lustra, strorum, dens of wilde-beasts; arma, morum, weapons; mapalias, liorum, cottages; bellaria, riorum, juneates; munia, niorum, an office; castra, orum, tents, justa, storum, Rites at funerals; sponsalia, liorum, betrothing; rostra, strorum, a pulpit; crepundia, orum, a rattle; cunabula, lorum, a cradle; exta, torum, the entrafls of beasts; effata, torum, a Soothsayer's mutterings. To these may be added the Heathenish Festival names; as, Bacchanalia, liorum, a Feast to Bacchus; and if you shall read more, you may put them under this Rule.   

Chap. 21. Of redundant or abounding Heteroclits.  
3. Redundant.  
1. THese nouns (as it were) have too much, following divers forms; for they vary both their gender, and termination; viz. Tonitrus, & tonitru, thunder; clypeus, pei, & clypeum, pei, a buckler; baculus, li, & baculum, li, & bacillum, li, a staff; sensus, sùs, a sens, & sensum, si, a conceit, or meaning; tignus, ni, & tigmim, ni, a rafter; tapétum, ti, tapéte, 'tis, & tapes, pétis, tapestry; punctus, cti, & punctum, cti, a point; sinápi, & sinápis, pis, mustard; sinus, ni, & sinum, ni a milk-vessel; menda, dae, & mendum, di, a fault; viscus, sci, & viscum, sci, birdlime; cornu, & cornum, ni, an horn, and cornus, nûs, the wing of an Army; (as Lucan saith) eventus, tûs, & eventum, ti, an hap; and a thousand such, which reading will afford thee.  
2. Some Greek words do make a new Latin word in their Accusative case: as, Panther, théris, makes Panthéra, rae, a Panther; crater, téris, makes cratéra, rae, a goblet; cassis, sidis, makes cassida, dae, an helmet; aether, theris, makes aethera, rae, the sky.  
3. In these nouns the Nominative case is divers, but the since and gender are all one; viz. Gibbus, by, & gibber, bĕris, a bunth, or swelling; cucumis, mis, & cucumber, mĕris, a cucumber; stipis, pis, & stips, pis, wages; cinis, nĕris, & ciner, nĕris, ashes; vomis, mĕris, & vomer, mĕris, a plowshare; scobis, bis, & scobs, bis, sawdust; pulvis, uĕris, & pulver, uĕris, dust; pubes, bis, & puber, bĕris, ripeness of age. Add hereunto nouns ending in or, and os; as, Honour, nôris, & honour, nôris, honour; labour, bóris, & labos, bóris, labour; arbour, bŏris, & arbos, bŏris, a tree; odor, dóris, & odos, dóris, savour; Also apes, pis, & apis, pis, a be; plebs, bis, & plebis, bis, the common people. There be also many nouns coming from the Greeks, having this double manner; as, Delphin, phinis, & Delphinus, phini, a Dolphin; Elephas, phantis, & Elephantus, ti, an Elephant; Congrus, gri, & Conger, gri, a Conger Eel; Meleagrus, gri, & Meleager, gri; Teucrus, cri, & Teucer, cri. And hitherto you shall refer all such as these, which your reading affordeth.  
2. These nouns are both of the second and fourth Declension; viz. Laurus, ri, & rûs, a Bay tree; quercus, ci, & cûs, an Oak; pinus, ni, & nûs, a Pine tree; ficus, ci & cûs, a fig, or a figtree; colus, li, & lûs, a disstaff; penus, ni, & nûs, provision; cernus, ni, & nûs, a dog-tree; lacus, ci, & cûs, a lake; and domus, mi, & mûs, an house, or home. Though these be not thus found in every case, you shall read also more than these, which you may well leave to old Autors.  
When you decline Domus, omit the cases ending in me, mu, mi, and mis.  
5. Many Adjectives also do abound, but especially such as come of these Substantives; Arma, morum, Arms; jugum, gi', a yoke; nervus, vi, a s●new; somnus, ni, sleep; clivus, vi, a side of an hill; animus, mi, a mind; limus mi, mud; fraenum, ni, a bridie; cera, rae, wax; bacillum, li, a staff; of which Substantives you may make Adjectives in us and is; as of Arma, is made inermus and inermis, unweaponed; Hilarus, merry, is seldom used, but hilaris is well known to be used.   

Chap. 22. Of the Kinds of Nouns.  
Nouns are, 1. Primitive. 2. Derivative.  
1. THese Nouns which follow, and such like be Primitives; viz.  
1. A noun Collective, which signifieth a multitude in the singular number; as, Turba, a tout; grex, a flock.  
2. Fictitious, which is feigned of the sound; as, Sibilus, an hissing; tintinnabulum, a tinkling.  
3. Interrogatives, which we use in ask; as, Quot, how many? qualis, what an one?  
4. Redditive, which give's answer to the Interrogative; as, Tot, so many; talis, such an one.  
And these two do sometimes turn into Indefinites, which do not define a certain thing. Relatives, which are referred to the word aforegoing; as, Talis erat, qualem nunquam vidi: He was such an one as I never saw.  
5. Numeral, which signifies a number on any fashion, whose kinds are also many, viz.  
1. Cardinal, from which numerals proceed; as, Vnus, one; duo, two.  
2. Ordinal, which denotes an order; as, primus, the first; secundus, the second.  
3. Distributive, which divide's the whole into parts; as, Singuli, several; bini, two and two.  
4. Partitives, which signifieth either many severally; as, Quisque, every one; uterque, both: or one of many; as, Altar, one of the two; aliquis, some one.  
5. Universal, which signifies a thing universally; as, Omnis, all; nullus, none.  
6. Particular, which signifieth part of the universal; as. Quidam, one; aliquis, some body.  
7. Multiplicative, which signifieth the multiplicity of a thing; as, Simplex, single; duplex, double.  
8. Proportional, which signifieth proportion; as, Simplum, a single part; duplum a double part.  
9 Temporal, which signifieth time, as, Binus, two years old; trinus, three years old: and biennis, of two year's standing; triennis, of three years standing, or continuante.  
10. Ponderal, which signifieth the weight of a thing; as, Binarius, of two pound weight; ternarius, three pound weight.  
II. Derivatives are also of many sorts, whereof these be the chief.  
1. Verbal, which is derived of a Verb; as, Lectio, xeading; flexilis, flexible.  
2. Patrial, which signifieth the Country; as, Londinensis, a Londoner.  
3. Gentile, which betokeneth the Nation, Side, or Sect; as, Graecus, a Greek; Ciceroniánus, one of Cicecero's side; Christiánus, a Christian, or a follower of Christ.  
4. Patronymic, which is derived either from the Father, or some other person of the family; as, Aeacides, the son of Aeacus.  
5. Patronymic nouns end in des, as Latoïdes, the son of Latona. Masculines. ion, japetion, the son of japetus. as, as Ilias, the daughter of Ilia. Feminines. is, Meneláis, the wife of Menelaüs. ne, Nerine, the daughter of Nereus.  
6. Diminutive, which lesseneth the signification of its Primitive; as, Stultulus, a little fool; lapillulus, a little stone.  
7. Possessive, which signifieth owing, or Possession; as, Regius, the King's, or, of the King; paternus, the father's, or, of a father.  
8. Denominative, which hath its name from another, which differeth from it in termination only; as, Justitia, justice, of justus, just.  
9 Material, which signifieth matter; as, Aureus, golden.  
10. Local, which denotes a place; as, Hortensis, of the garden; agrestis, of the field.  
11. Participial, which is made of a participle, as, Sapiens, wise.  
12. Adverbial, which is derived of an Adverb; as, Crastinus, of tomorrow: And here we must diligently observe,  
1. All words whose original is unknown or uncertain, may be accounted Primitives in the Latin tongue; yea, though they flow from another Language; as, Ego, musa.  
2. Lest you be be ridiculous in finding the beginnings of words, you may observe diligently the terminations which come to the Primitives; as of Amorett, I love, is made amator, a lover; amicus, a friend; amabilis, lovely, etc.   

Chap. 23. Of a Pronoun.  
A Pron●n is put for a Noun. There be fifteen Pronouns. Whereof some be Primitive. And some Derivative. Pronouns have four Declensions. Of the First are Ego, tu, sui. Of the second Ille, ipse, iste. Hic, i●. OF the third, Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, cujus. Of the Fourth, Nostras, vestras, cujas. Of the Composition of Pronouns.  
A Pronoun is a Part of Speech put for a Noun, and supplying its stead.  
There be fifteen Pronouns; Ego, I, tu, thou, suî, of himself, ille, he, ipse, himself, iste, yond, hic, this is it, meus, mine, tuus, thine, suus, his own, noster, ours, vester, yours, nostras, our countrymen, vostras, yours.  
To which may be added, Qui, which; quis, who; cujus, whose; cujas, whose countryman.  
And some of these be called Pronoun Substantives, viz. Ego, tu, suî, which are referred to three genders, without varying their termination. Pronoun Adjectives, viz. all the rest which be varied by three genders; as, Meus, mea, meum. According to their Species, Pronouns are called 1. Primitives, which are the first words; as, Ego, tu, suî, ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, and qui. and these be called Demonstratives, which are used in showing a thing not spoken of before; as, Ego, tu, suî, ille, ipse; hic, is. Relatives, which we use in rehearsing a thing that was spoken of before; as, ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, and qui. 2. Derivatives, are such as are derived of their Primitives; as, Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, nostras, vestras, cujus, cujas, are derived from the Genitive cases of their Primitives, Meî, tuî, sui, nosirî, vestrî, nostrûm, vestrûm, and quis, from the Nominative qui.  
Of these some are  
Possessives, which signify owing or possession; as, Meus, tuus, suus, noster vester.  
Gentiles, which signify belonging to Countries, or Nations, to Sects or Factions; as, nostras, vestras, and cujas, which were once used as Nouns in átis, and áte.  
Finites, which define, or set out a certain person; as, Ego, tu.  
Indefinites, which do not define a certain person; as, Qui, cujus.  
Reciprocals, which betake themselves to the same third person which went before it; as, Suî, suus.  
Peter intreateth thou wouldst not forsake him.  
Every man spareth his own Errors. Every man is drawn of his own pleasure.  
There be four Declensions of Pronouns.  
The Genitive case singular of the first Declension endeth in i: of the Second in ius, or jus: of the Third in i, ae, i: of the Fourth in atis.  
Ego, tu, suî, be of the first Declension, and are, thus declined.  
Singulariter Nom. Ego, I. Pluraliter Nom. Nos, we. Gen. Meî, of me. Gen. Nostrûm, nostrî, of us. Dat. Mihi, to me. Dat. Nobis, to us. Acc. Me, me. Acc. Nos, us. Voc.  Voc.  Abl. à Me, from me Abl. Nobis, from us. Singulariter Nom. Tu, thou. Pluraliter Nom. Vos, ye. Gen. Tuî, of thee. Gen. Vestrûm, vestrî, of you. Dat. Tibi, to thee. Dat. Vobis, to you. Acc. To, thee. Acc. Vos, you. Voc. , thou. Voc. Vos, ye. Abl. à Te, from thee. Abl Vobis, from you. Sing. & Plur. Gen. Suî, of himself, or But it vows the Nominat. and Vocative cases in both Numbers. Dat. Sibi. themselves. Acc. Se. Abl. Se.  
Ille, ipse, iste, hic is, qui, and quis be of the second Declension and be thus declined.  
Singulariter Nom. Iste, ista, istud. Pluraliter Nom. Isti, istae, ista. Gen. Istius. Gen. Istorum, istarum, istorum. Dat. Isti. Dat. Istis. Acc. Istum, istam, istud. Acc. Istos, istas, istas. Voc.  Voc.  Abl. Isto, istâ, isto. Abl. Istis.  
Ille and ipse are declined like iste, saving that ipse in the Neuter Gender, in the Nominative and the Accusative case singular maketh ipsum.  
Hic is declined as is aforesaid in the Articles, pag. 7.  
Singulariter Nom, Is, ea, id. Pluraliter Nom. Two, eae, ea. Gen. Ejus. Gen. Eorum, earum, eorum Dat. Ei. Dat. jis, vel eyes. Acc. Eum, eam, id. Acc. Eos, eas, ea. Voc.  Voc.  Abl. Eo, eâ eo. Abl. jis, vel eyes. So also is the Compound of is and demum declined. Sing. Nom. Idem, eadem, idem. Gen. Ejusdem. Dat. Eidem. Acc. Eundem, eandem, idem. Singulariter Nom. Qui, quae, quod.  Pluraliter Nom. Qui, quae, quae. Gen. Cujus.  Gen. Quorum, quarum, quorum. Dat. Cui.  Dat. Quibus, vel queis. Acc. Quem, quam, quod.  Acc. Quos, quas, quae. Voc.   Voc.  Abl. Quo, quâ, quo, Abl. Quibus, Quî, Queis.  
After this manner also is declined Quis, quae, quid.  
But its Compound thus: Nom. Quisquis, quicquid. Acc. Quicquid. Abl. Quoquo, quaqua, quoquo.  
Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, & cujus be of the third Declension, and are declined like Adjectives of three Terminations on this manner.  
Nominativo Meus, mea, meum. Genitivo Mei, meae, mei. And so in the other cases. Tuus, tua, tuum. Tui, tuae, tui. Suus, sua, suum. Sui, suae; sui, Noster, nostra, nostrum. Nostri, nostrae, nostri. Vester, vestra, vestrum. Vestri, vestrae, vestri. Cujus, cuja, cujum.   
But Meus hath Mi, mea, meum, in the Vocative case singular.  
Nostras, vestras, and cujas, be of the fourth Declension, and are declined like Adjectives of three Articles.  
As, Nom. Nostras, Gen. Nostratis. etc. Vestras, Vestratis. Cujas, Cujatis.  
Pronouns are Compounded,  
1. Among themselves; as; Ego-ipse, mei-ipsius, mihi-ipsi. istic, & illic.  
Istic and illic be thus declined, Nom. Istic, istaec, istoc, vel istuc. Acc. Istinc, istanc, istoc, vel istuc. Abl. Istoc, istac, istoc.  
Plur. Nom. & Acc. Istaec.  
2. With Nouns; as, Aliquis, bujusmodi.  
3. With Verbs; as, Quivis, quilibet.  
4. With Adverbs; as, Nequis:  
So also Eccum, Eccam, of ecce and is. Ellum, Ellam, Eccos, Eccas, Ellos, Ellas, of ecce and ille.  
5. With a Conjunction; as, Quisnam, siquis.  
6. With a Preposition; as, Mecum, nobiscum.  
7. With Syllabical additions; met, te, pte, ce, cine, of which met is added to the first and second person; as, Egomet, tuimet: also we say sibimet and semet, but we do not say tumet, lest it should seem a Verb of tumeo, to swell.  
Te is added only to tu and te; as, Tute, tete.  
Pte is added to these Ablatives Feminine; Meâ, tuâ, suâ, nostrâ, vestrâ; as, Meâpte, tuâpte, suâpte, nostrâple, vestrâpte; and sometimes to their Masculines and Neuters; as, Meopte labour, suopte jumento.  
Ce is added to all cases of these Pronouns, Hic, ille, iste, as oft as they end in s; as, Hujusce, hosce, hisce; we say also, hicce, huncce, and ejusce, and sometimes hice is read.  
Cine is put to the Nominative and Accusative of Hic; as, Hiccine, haeccine, hoccine; Hunccine, hanccine, hoccine, etc.  
Quis and qui are compounded on this manner;  
Quis in composition is set after these particles, viz.  
En, as Ecquis, whant one. Ne, Nequis, no one. Alius, Aliquis, some one. Num, Nunquis, whether any one. Si, Siquis, if any one.  
And these in the Feminine gender singular, and in the Neuter plural make qua, not quae; as, Siqua mulier, If any woman. Nequa flagitia, Not any villainy. But Ecquis makes ecqua and ecquae in the Feminine gender.  
Quis in composition is set before these particles, viz.  
Name, as Quisnam. And these every where keep quae; as, Quaenam doctrina, what learning. quaecunque negotia, whatsoever business. Piam, Quispiam. Putas, Quisputas. Quam, Quisquam. Que, Quisque.  
Qui in composition is set before these particles, viz.  
Dam. as Quidam, a certain one. Vis, Quivis, who you will. Libet, Quilibet, who that will. Cunque, Quicunque, whosoever.   

Chap. 24. Of a Verb and its Kinds.  
III. A Verb signifieth to be, to do, or to suffer. It is Personal, or, Impersonal. There belong to a Verb five Kinds, Active. Passive. Neuter. Deponent. Commune. Four Moods. Indicative. Imperative. Subjunctive Infinitive, To which belong The Gerunds, Diego, do, dumb. And the Supines, 'Em & u. Five Tenses, Present. Imperfect. Preterperfect. Preterpluperfect. Future. Four Conjugations: whereof the First hath a long. Second e long. Third e long. Fourh hath i long before re and ris.  
AVERB is a part of Speech which signifieth, to be, to do, or to suffer; as, Sum, I am; Amo, I love; Amor, I am loved.  
A Verb is first divided into Personal, which is distinguished by three Persons in both Numbers; as, Singul. Amorett, I love; Amas, than lovest; Amat, he loveth. Plur. Amamus, we love; Amatis, ye love; Amant, they love. Impersonal, which hath no certain signification of Person or Number, unless it be by means of an obliqne case; as, Oportet me, It behooveth me; oportet te, it behooveth thee, statur à me, it is stood of me, or I stand; statur à te, it is stood of thee, or thou standest.  
There belong to a Verb, I. Kind. II. Mood. III. Ten. iv Conjugation.  
I. There be five Kinds of Verbs.  
1. Active, which signifieth to do, and endeth in o, and by taking to it r may make a Passive; as, Amo, I love.  
2. Passive, which signifieth to suffer, and endeth in or, and by taking away r it may be an Active; as Amor, I am loved.  
3. A Neuter endeth in o or m, and cannot take r to make it a Passive; as, Curro, I run; Sum, I am.  
There be three kinds of Neuters, according to their signification.  
Substantive, which signifieth the Being of a thing; as, Sum, I am.  
Absolute, which by itself maketh up the sens; as, dormio, I ●●eep.  
Transitive, whose action passeth into a thing of near signification; as, Curro stadium, I tun a race.  
4. A Deponent endeth in or, and hath either the Active signification, as, Loquor verbum, I speak a word; or the Neuter; as, Glorior, I boast.  
5. A Commune endeth in or, and hath both the Active, and Passive signification; as, Osculor, I kiss, or am kissed.  
II. There be four Moods.  
1. The Indicative simply showeth a thing, or asketh a question; as, Ego amo, I love; Amas tu, lovest thou.  
2. The Imperative biddeth or intreateth; as, Ama tu, do thou love; Da mihi, give me.  
3. The Subjunctive is joined with another Verb in the same sentence; as, Cùm amarem, eram miser, when I loved, I was a wretch.  
And this mood is called the Optative, when it is used in wishing; and the Potential when it is construed by may, can, would, or aught.  
4. The Infinitive doth not define a certain person, or number; as Amare, to love. And to this mood belong three Gerunds, which have their case or ending of a Noun, their signification of a Verb.  
Di, as Amandi, of loving, or being loved. Do, Amando, in loving, or being loved. Dum, Amandum, to love, or to be loved. Two Supines, whereof The first endeth in 'em, and signifieth Actively; as, Amatum, to love. The later endeth in u, and signifieth Passively; as, Amatu, to be loved.  
III. Verbs have five Tenses.  
1. The Present ten which speaketh of the time present, and signifies now to do, or to be done; as, Amo, I love.  
2. The Preterimperfect ten speaketh of the time not yet perfectly passed; and signifieth a thing to be done, but not yet finished; as, Amabam, I loved, or I did love.  
3. The Preterperfect ten speaketh of the time perfectly passed, and signifieth a thing to be now finished; as, Amavi, I have loved.  
4. The Preterpluperfect ten speaketh of the time more than perfectly passed, and signifieth a thing to be long since finished; as, Amaveram, I had loved.  
5. The Future ten speaketh of the time to come, and signifieth something to be done for the future; as, Amabo, I will love.  
The Future ten of the Subjunctive mood is called Exact; because it hath the signification both of the Preter ten, and Future ten together; as, Cùm Amavero, when I shall have loved.  
iv Conjugation is the Varying of a Verb by Moods and Tenses.  
Verbs have four Conjugations, which are known one from another by certain tokens, or characteristical letters.  
1. The first Conjugation hath a long before re and ris; as, Amáre, amáris.  2. The second Conjugation hath e long before re and ris; as, Docére, docéris. * In the Infinitive Mood Present ten of Verbs in o. 3. The third Conjugatjon hath e short before re and ris; as, Légĕre, légĕris. And in the second person singular of the Indicative mood Present ten of Verbs in or. 4. The fourth Conjugation hath i long before re and ris; as Audire, audiris.    

Chap. 27. Of the Form of the first Conjugation.  
Verba in (o) primae Conjugationis variantur sicut Amo.  
Verbs in (o) of the first Conjugation be varied like Amorett, etc.  
Amo, amas, amávi, amáre, amátum.  
Verba in (or) primae Conjugationis variantur sicut Amor.  
Verbs in (or) of the first Conjugation be varied like Amor.  

A●on  
amáris, amáre,  
amátus sum amátus fui,  
amávi   

The Indicative Mood.  Present ten. Sing. 1 AMo I love.  Amor, I am loved. 2 Amas thou lovest.  Amáris, thou art loved. 3 Amat, he loveth.  Amate, he is loved.       Amatur,   Plur. 1 Amamus, We love.     2 Amatis, ye love.  Amámur, We are loved. 3 Amant, they love.  Amamini, ye are loved        Amantur, they are loved. Preterimperf. Sing. 1 Amábam, I did love.  Amabar, I was loved. 2 Amabas, thou didst  Amabáris, thou walt loved. 3 Amabat, he did  Amabare, be was loved.      Amabatur,   Plur. 1 Amabámis We did  Amabámur, We wereloved. 2 Amabatis, ye did  Amabamini, ye were loved. 3 Amabant, they did  Amabantur, they were loved.      loved. Amatus sum, I have been loved. Preterperf. Sing. 1 Amávi, I have fui,    es, thou hast 2 Amavisti, thou hast fuisti,    est, be hath 3 Amavit, he hath fuit,     Amati sumus, We have Plur. 1 Amavimus, We have fuimus,    estis, ye have 2 Amavistis, ye have fuistis,    sunt, they have 3 Amauérŭt they have fuérunt,   Amavere    fuére.  Preterpluperfect. Sing. 1 Amaveram, I had loved. Amatus eram I had been loved.    fueram, 2 Amaveras, thou hadst eras thou hadst    fueras, 3 Amaverat, he had erat he had    fuerat, Plur. 1 Amave●ámtis, We had Ama●i eramus We had    fueramus 2 Amaveratis, ye had eratis ye had    fueratis, 3 Amaverant, they had erant they had    fuerant, Future. Sing. 1 Amábo, I shall love. Amabor, I shall  2 Amabis, thou shalt Amáberis thou shalt be loved.    Amábere, 3 Amabit, he shall Amabitur, he shall Plur. 1 Amabimus, We shall Amabimur, We shall 2 Amabitis, ye shall Amabimini, ye shall 3 Amabunt, they shall Amabuntur. they shall 
The Imperative Mood hath one only Ten, viz. the Present Ten.  Present ten. Sing. 2 Ama, Love thou, Amáre, Be thou loved. Amato, Amator, 3 Amet, let him love. Ametur, let him be loved. Amato. Amator,  1 Amemus, Let us love. Amemur, Let us be loved. Plur. 2 Amate, love ye Amamini, he ye loved. Amatote, Amaminor, 3 Ament, let them love. Amentur, be they loved. Amanto, Amantor, 
The Subjunctive Mood.  Present ten. Plur. 1 Sing. 1 Cùm Amem, when I love. Amer, I am loved. 2 Ames, thou lovest. Améris thou art 3 Amet, he loveth. Amére,    Ametur, he is 1 Amemus, We love. Amemur, We are 2 Ametis, ye love. Amemini, ye are 3 Ament. they love. Amentur. they are Imperfect. Plur. 1 Sing. 1 Cùm Amarem, when I loved. Amarer, I was loved. 2 Amares, thou lovedst Amaréris thou wast 3 Amaret, he loved. Amarerc,    Amaretur, he was 1 Amaremus, We loved. Amarémur, We were 2 Amaretis, ye loved. Amaremint, ye were 3 Amarent. they loved. Amarentur. they were Preterperfect Plur. 1 Sing. 1 Amaverim, I have loved. Amatus sim I have been loved.    fuerim, 2 Amaveris, thou hast this thou hast    fueris 3 Amaverit, he hath sit he hath    fuerit, 1 Amaverimus We have Amati simus We have    fuérimus 2 Amaveritis ye have sitis ye have    fueritis, 3 Amaverint. they have sint they have    fuerint, Preterpluperfect. Plur. Sing. 1 Amavissem, I had loved. Amatus essem I had been loved.    fuissem, 2 Amavisses, thou hadst esses thou hadst    fuisses, 3 Amavisset, he had esset he had    fuisset, 1 Amavissemus We had Ama●i essemus We had    fuissemus 2 Amavissetis ye had essetis ye had    fuissetis, 3 Amavissent. they had essent they had    fuissent, Future. Plur. 1 Sing. 1 Amavero, I shall love. Amatus ero I shall be loved.    fúero, 2 Amaveris, thou shalt eris thou shalt    fueris, 3 Amaverit, he shall erit he shall    fuerit, 1 Amaverimus We shall Amati erimus We shall    furimus 2 Amaveritis, ye shall erius ye shall    fueritis, 3 Amaverint. they shall erint they shall    fuerint 
The Infinitive Mood.  Present and Imperfect ten. Amáre, to love. Amari, to be loved: Preterperf. and Preterplup. Amavisse, to have or had loved. Amatum esse vel fuisse to have or had been loved. The Future ten. Amatu. rum esse to love hereafter Amatum iri vel to be loved hereafter. Amandum esse 
Gerunds.  Amandi, of loving. of being loved. Amando, in loving. in being loved. Amandum, to love. to be loved. 
Supines.  Amatum, to love. Amatu, to be loved. 
Participles.  Of the Present ten. Amans, loving. Of the Preter ten. Amatus, loved. Of the Future in rus. Amaturus, about to love. Of the Future in dus. Amandus, to be loved.   

Chap. 28 Of the form of the Second Conjugation.  
verba in (o) secundae Conjugationis formantur sicut Doceo.  
Verbs in (o) of the second Conjugation be form like Doceo.  
Doceo, doces, docui, docére, doctum.  
Verba in (or) secundae Conjugationis formantur sicut Doceor.  
Verbs in (or) of the second Conjugation be form like Doceor.  

Doceor  
docé●is docé●e  
doctus sum doctus fui  
docéri   

The Indicative Mood.  Present ten. sing. 1 Dóceo, I teach.  Doceor,  I am taught.  2 Doces, thou teachest.  Docéris,  thou art taught.  3 Docet, he teacheth.  Docere,         Docetur,  he is taught.  Plur. 1 Docemus, We teach.  Docemur,  We are taught.  2 Docetis, ye teach.  Docemini  ye are taught.  3 Docent, they teach.  Docentur,  they are taught.  Imperfect. sing 1 Docebam, I did teach. Docebar,  I was taught.  2 Docebas, thou didst Docebáris.  thou wert taught.  3 Docebat, he did Docebare,        Docebatur,  he was taught.  Plur.  Docebamus, We did Docebámur,  We were taught.   Docebatis, ye did, Docehámini,  ye were taught.   Docebant, they did Docebantur.  they were taught.  Preterperf. Sing. 1 Docui, I have taught. Doctus sum, I have been taught.    fui,  2 Docuisti, thou hast es. thou hast    fuisti,  3 Docuit, he hath est, he hath    fuit,  Plur. 1 Docuimus, We have Docti sumus, We have    fuimus  2 Docuistis, ye have estis, ye have    fuistis,     sunt,  3 Docuérunt they have fuerunt they have  Doevere,  fuere,  Preterpluperf. Sing. 1 Docueram, I had taught Doctus eram  been-taught.    fueram, I had 2 Docueras, thou hadst eras     fueras, thou hadst 3 Docuera●, he had erat,     fuerat, he had Plur. 1 Docuerámus We had Docti eramus     fueramus We had 2 Docueratis, ye had eratis     fueratis, ye had 3 Docuerant. they had erant     fuerant, they had Future. Sing. 1 Docého, I will teach. Docebor, I will be taught.   2 Docehis, thou wilt Doceberis    3 Docebit, he will Docebere, thou wilt be taught.       Docebitur, he will be taught.   Plur. 1 Docehimus, We will Docebimur, We will be taught.   2 Docebitis, ye will Docehimini, ye will be taught.   3 Docehunt, they will Docebuntur, they will be taught.   
The Imperative Mood.  Present ten. Sing. 2 Doce Teach thou. Docére Be thou taught.  Doceto,  Docetor,  3 Doceat let him teach. Doceatur let him be  Doceto,  Docetor,   1 Doceamus, let us teach. Doceamur, let us be Plur. 2 Docete  Docemmi   Docetote, teach ye. Doceminor be ye 3 Doceant  Doceantus   Docento. let them teach. Docentor, let them be 
The Subjunctive Mood.  Present ten. Sing. 1 Cum Doceam, when I teach. Docear, I am tauhgt.  2 Doceas, thou teachest. Docearis      Doceare,   3 Doceat, he teacheth. Doceatur, he is  Plur. 1 Doceamus, We teach. Doceamur, We are  2 Doceatis, ye teach. Doceamini, ye are  3 Doceant they teach. Doceantur, they are Imperfect. Plur. Sing. 1 Cùm Docérem, when I did teach. Docérer, I was taught. 2 Doceres, thou didst Docereris thou wert 3 Doceret, he did Docerere    Doceretur, he was 1 Docerémus We did Doceremur We were 2 Doceretis, ye did, Doceremini ye were 3 Docereat. they did Docerentur they were Preterperf. Plur. Sing. 1 Docuerim, I have taught. Doctus sim I have been taught.    fuerim, 2 Docueris thou hast this thou hast    fueris, 3 Docuerit, he hath sit he hath    fuerit, 1 Docuérimus, We have Docti simus, We have    fuérimus, 2 Docueritis, ye have sitis ye have    fuéritis, 3 Docuerint, they have sint they have    fuerint, Preterpluperf Plur. Sing. 1 Docuissem, I had taught Doctus essem I had been taught.    fuissem, 2 Docuisses, thou hadst esses thou hadst    fuisses, 3 Docuisset, he had esset he had    fuisset, 1 Docuissemus We had Docti essemus We had    fuissemus 2 Docuissetis, ye had essetis ye had    fuissetis, 3 Docuissent. they had essent they had    fuissent. Future. Plur. Sing. 1 Docuero, I will teach. Doctus ero I shall be taught.    fuero, 2 Docueris, thou wilt eris thou shalt.    fueris, 3 Docuerit, he will erit he shall    fuerit, 1 Docuérimus We will Docti erimus We will    fuerimus 2 Docueritis, ye will eritis ye shall    fueritis, 3 Docuerint. they will erint they shall    fuerint. 
The Infinitive Mood.  Present and Preterimperf. ten. Docére, to teach. Doceri to be taught. Preterperf. and Preterplup. Docuisse, to have or had taught. Doctum esse vel fuisse. to have or had been taught. Future. Docturum esse to teach hereafter. Doctum iri vel to be taught hereafter.    Docendum esse   

Gerunds.  
Docendi, of teaching, or of being taught.  
Docendo, in teaching, or of being taught.  
Docendum, to teach, or to be taught.   

Supines.  Doctum, to teach. Doctu, to be taught. 
Participles.  Of the Present ten Docens, teaching Of the Preter ten. Doctus, taught. Of the Future in rus. Docturus, about to teach. Of the Future in dus. Docendus, to be taught.   

Chap. 29. Of the form of the third Conjugation.  
Verba in (o) tertiae Conjugation is formantur sicut Lego.  
Verbs in (o) of the third Conjugation be form like Lego.  
Lego, legis, legi, legĕre, lectum.  
Verba in (or) tertiae Conjugationis formantur sicut Lego.  
Verbs in (or) of the third Conjugation be form like Legor.  

Legor,  
legĕris legĕ●e,  
lectas sum lectas fui,  
legi.   

The Indicative Mood.  Present ten. Sing. 1 LEgo, I read.  Legor, I am read.   2 Legis, thou readest.  Legeris thou art read.   3 Legit, he readeth.  Legere,        Legitur he is read.   Plur. 1 Legimus, We read.  Legimur, We are read.   2 Legitis, ye read.  Legitini, ye are read.   3 Legunt. they read.  Leguntu●. they are read.   Imperfect. Sing. 1 Legébam, I did read.  Legebar, I was read.   2 Legèbas, thou readst.  Legeharis, thou wast read.   3 Legebat, he did read.  Legebare,        Legebatur, he was read.   Plur. 1 Legebámus, We did read. Legebamur, We were read.   2 Legebatis, ye did egebanum, ye were read.   3 Legebant. they did Legebantur, they were read.   Preterperfect. Sing.    read. Lectus sum I have been read. 1 Legi, I have fui,    es thou hast 2 Legisti, thou hast fuisti,    e●t he hath 3 Legit, he hath fuit, ●lur.    Lecti sumus, We have 1 Legimus, I have fuimus,    sitis, ye have 2 Legistis, ye have fuistis,    sunt they have 3 Legérunt, they have fuérunt,  Legere.  fuere. Preterplup. Sing. 1 Legeram, I had read. Lectus eram I had been read.    fueram, 2 Legeras', thou hadst eras thou hadst    fueras, 3 Legerat, he had erat he had    fuerat, ●lur. 1 Legerámus, We had Lecti eramus We had    fueramus 2 Legeratis, ye had eratis ye had    fueratis, 4 Legerant. they had erant they had    fuerant. Future. Sing 1 Legam, I will read. Legar,  I shall be read. 2 Leges, thou wilt Legeris  thou shalt 3 Leger, he will Legere,      Legetur,  he shall Plur. 1 Legémus, We will Legemur,  We shall 2 Leget●s, ye will Legemin●,  ye shall 3 Leg●a●. they will Legentur.  they shall 
The Imperative Mood.  Present ten. Sing. 2 Liege Read thou Legere Be thou read. Legito, Legitor, 3 Legate let him read. Legatur let him be Legito, Legitor,  1 Legamus, let us read. Legamur, let us be Plur. 2 Legite read ye. Legimini be ye Leguote, Legiminor, 3 Legant let them read. Legantur, let them be Legunto. Leguntor, 
The Subjunctive Mood.  Present ten. Sing. 1 Cùm Legam, when I read. Legar, I am read.  2 Legas, thou readest. Legaris, thou art  3 Legate, he readeth. Legare,      Legatur, he is  Plur. 1 Legàmus, We read. Legamur, We are  2 Legatis ye read. Legamini, ye are  3 Legant. they read. Legantur. they are Imperfect. Sing. 1 Cùm Legerem, when I did read. Legerer, I was read. 2 Legeres, thou didst Legeréris, thou wast 3 Legeret, he did Legerere, he was     Legeretur,  Plut. 1 Legerémus, We did Legerémur, We were 2 Legeretis, ye did Legeremini, ye were 3 Legerent. they did Legerentur, they were Preterperfect. Sing. 1 Legerim, I have read. Lectus sim I have been read.    fuerim,  2 Legeris, thou hast this thou hast    fueris,  3 Legerit, he hath sit he hath    fuerit,  Plur. 1 Legérimus, We have Lecti. simus We have    fuerimus,  2 Legeritis, ye have sitis ye have    fueritis,  3 Legerint, they have sint they have    fuerint,  Preterplup. Sing. 1 Legissem, I had read. Lectus essem I had been read.    fuissem,  2 Legisses, thou hadst esses thou hadst    fuisse,  3 Legisset, he had esset he had    fuisset.  Plur. 1 Legissemus We had Lectit essemus We had    fuissemus  2 Legissetis ye had essetis ye had    fuissetis,  3 Legissent, they had essent they had    fuissent.  Future ten. Sing. 1 Legero, I shall read. Lectus ero I shall be read.    fuero,  2 Legeris, thou shalt eris thou    fueris,  3 Legerit. he shall erit he    fuerit,  Plur. 1 Legerimus, We shall Lecti erinius We    fuerimus  2 Legeritis, ye shall eritis ye    fueritis,  4 Legerint. they shall erint they    fuerint.  
The Infinitive Mood.  Present and Imperfect ten. Legere, to read. Legi, to be read. Preterperf. and Preterplup. Legiss, to have or had read. Lectum esse vel fuisse, to have or had been read. Future. Lecturum esse to read hereafter. Lectum iri vel legendum esse, to be read hereafter.  

Gerunds.  
Legendi, of reading, or of being read.  
Legendo, in reading, or of heeing read.  
Legendum, to read, or to be read.   

Supines.  Lectum, to read. Lectu, to be read. 
Participles.  Of the Present ten. Legens, reading. Of the Preter ten. Lectus, read. Of the Future in rus. Lecturus, to read. Of the Future in dus Lecturus, to be read.   

Chap. 30. Of the Form of the fourth Conjugation.  
Verba in (o) quartae Conjugationis variantur sicut Audio.  
Verbs in (o) of the fourth Conjugation be varied like Audio.  
Audio, audis, audivi, audi●e, auditum,  
Verba in (or) quartae Conjugationis variantur sicut Audior.  
Verbs in (or) of the fourth Conjugation be varied like Audior.  

Audior  
audi●●s audi●e,  
auditus sum auditus fui,  
audi●i   

The Indicative Mood.  Present ten. Sing. 1 AVdio, I hear. Audior, I am heard.    2 Audis thou hearest. Audiris, thou art heard       Audior,     3 Audit, he heareth. Auditur, he is heard.    Plur. 1 Audimus, We hear. Audimur, We are heard.    2 Auditis, ye hear. Audimini, ye are heard.    3 Audiunt. they hear. Audiuntur. they are heard.    Preterimperf. Sing. 1 Audiebam, I did hear. Audiebar, I was heard.  2 Audiebas, thou didst Audiebaris thou wast     Audiebare,   3 Audiebat, he did Audiebatur, he was  Plur. 1 Audiebamus We did Audiebámur, We were  2 Audiebatis, ye did Audiebamim ye were  3 Audiebant they did Audiebantur they were  Preterperf. Sing. 1 Audivi, I have heard. Auditus. sum, I have been heard.    fui,  2 Audivisti, thou hast es, thou hast    fuisti,  3 Audivit, he hath est, he hath    fuit,  Plur. 1 Audivimus, We have Auditi sumus, We have    fuimus,  2 Audivistis, ye have estis, ye have    fuistis,  3 Audiuérunt they have sunt, they have  Audivere  f●érunt,     fuére.  Preterpluperf. Sing. 1 Audiveram, I had heard Auditus eram I had been heard.    fueram,  2 Audiveras, thou hadst eras thou hadst    fueras,  3 Audiverat, he had erat he had    fuerat,  Plur. 1 Audiveramus We had Auditi eramus We had    fueramus  2 Audiveratis, ye had eratis ye had    fueraits,  3 Audiverant, they had erant they had    fuerant.  Future. Sing. 1 Audiam, I shall hear. Audi●r, I shall be heard.   2 Audies, thou shalt Audieris, thou shalt be heard.      Audiere,    3 Audiet, he shall Audietur, he shall be heard.   Plur. 1 Audiemus We shall Audiemur, We shall be heard.   2 Audietis, ye shall Audiemini, ye shall be heard.   3 Audient. they shall Audientur. they shall be heard.   
The Imperative Mood.  Present ten. Sing. 2 Audi Hear thou. Audire, Be thou heard.  Audito,  Auditor,  3 Audiat let him hear. Audiator let him be heard.  Audito.  Auditor,  Plur. 1 Audiamus, let us hear. Audiamur, let us be heard.  Audite  Audimini  2 Auditote, hear ye. Audiminor be ye heard.  Audiant  Audiantor  3 Audiunte, let them hear. Audiuntor. let them be heard. 
The Subjunctive Mood.  Present ten. Sing. 1 Cùm Audiam, when I hear. Audiar, I am heard. 2 Audias, thou hearest. Audiaris thou art    Audiare,  3 Audiat, he heareth. Audiatur, he is Plur. 1 Audiamus We hear. Audiamur, We are 2 Audiatis, ye hear. Audiamini ye are 3 Audiant. they hear. Audiantur. they are Preterimperf. Sing. 1 Cúm Audiem, when I heard. Audirer, I was heard. 2 Audires, thou heardest. Audireris thou wast 3 Audiret. he heard. Audirere     Audiretur, he was Plur. 1 Audirémus We heard. Audiremur, We were 2 Audiretis, ye heard. Audiremini ye were 3 Audirent. they heard. Audirentur they were Preterperf. Sing. 1 Audiverim, I have heard. Auditus. sim I have been heard. fuerim, 2 Audiveris, thou hast this thou hast fueris, 3 Audiverit, he hath sit he hath fuerit, Plur. 1 Audiuérimus We have Auditi simus We have fuerimus 2 Audiuéritis. ye have sitis ye have fuéritis 3 Audiverint, they have sint they have fuerint. Preterpluperf. Sing. 1 Audivissem, I had heard Auditus. essem I had been heard. fuissem 2 Audivisses, thou hadst esses thou hadst fuisses, 3 Audivisset, he had esset he had fuisset, Plur. 1 Audivissémus We had Auditi essemus We had fuissemus 2 Audivissetis, ye had essetis ye had fuissetis, 3 Audivissent, they had essent they had fuissent. Future. Sing. 1 Audivero, I shall hear. Auditus ero I shall be heard. fuero, 2 Audiveris, thou shalt eris thou shalt fueris, 3 Audiverit, he shall erit he shall fuerit, Plur. 1 Audiverimus We shalt Auditi erimus We shall fuerimus 2 Audiveritis ye shall eritis ye shall fueritis, 3 Audiverint. they shall erint they shall fuerint 
The Infinitive Mood.  Present and Imperfect ten. Audire, to hear. Audiri, to be heard. Preterperf. and Preterplup. Audivisse, to have heard. Auditum esse vel fuisse, to have or had been heard. Future. Auditurum esse to hear Auditum iri vel to be heard hereafter. Audiendum esse, hereafter.  

Gerunds.  
Audiendi, of hearing, or of being heard.  
Audiendo, in hearing, or of being heard.  
Audiendum, to hear, or to be heard.   

Supines.  Auditum, to hear, Auditu, to be heard. 
Participles.  Of the Present ten. Audience, hearing. Future in rus. Auditurus, to hear. Of the Preter ten. Auditus, heard. Future in dus. Audiendus, to be heard.    

As in Praesenti. OR, WILLIAM family's Rules of the Preterperfect tenses and Supines of Verbs.  

Chap. 21. Of the Preterperfect tenses and Supines of Verbs.  
As in praesenti contein's Rules of the Preter tenses of Simple Verbs. 1. In the first Conjugation As, maketh avi. 1. In the second Es makes ui. In the Third, Bo makes by. Co, ci. Do, di. Go, xi. Ho, xi. Lo, ui. more, ui. No, vi. Po, psi. Quo, qui. Ro, vi. So, sivi. Sco, vi. To, ti. Ecto, exi. Vo, vi. Xo, xui. Cio, ci. Dio, di. Gio, gi' Pio, pi. Rio, ri. Tio, ssi. Uo, ui. In the Fourth is makes ui.  
I. AS in the Present ten, makes the Preterperfect ten in avi; as, No, nas, to swim, navi; vocito, vocitas, to call often, vocitavi. Except 1. Lavo; lavi, to wash; juvo, juvi, to help; nexo, nexui, to knit; seco, secui, to cut; neco, necui, to kill; mico, micui, to shine; plico, plicui, to fold; frico, fricui, to rub; domo, domui, to tame; tono, tonui, to thunder; sono, sonui, to sound; crepo, crepui, to crack; veto, vetui, to forbid; cubo, cubui, to lie down; which seldom makes avi. 2. Do; das to give, will make dedi; and sto, stas, to stand, steti.  
ES in the Present ten, makes the Preterperfect ten in ui; as, Nigreo, nigres, nigrui, to wax black; jubeo, jubes, jussi, to bid; sorbeo, sorbui, & sorpsi, to sup; mulceo, mulsi to assuage; luceo, luxi, to shine; sedeo, sedi, to sit; video, vidi, to see; prandeo, prandi, to dine; strideo, stridi, to make a nois; suadeo, suasi, to persuade; rideo, risi, to laugh; and ardeo, arsi, to burn.  
2. The first syllable is doubled in these four following; viz. Pendeo pependi to hang; mordeo, momordi, to by't.  
Spondeo, spospondi, to promise; tondeo, totondi, to clip or shear.  
3. If l or r stand next before geo, geo is turned into si; as, Vrgeo, ursi, to urge; mulgeo, mulsi, & mulxi, to milk; frigeo, frixi, to be cold; lugeo, luxi, to lament; augeo, & auxi, to encreas.  
4. Fleo, fles, to weep, makes flevi; lo, les, to besmear, levi, and its compound delco, makes delevi, to blot out; pleo, bless, to fill, makes plevi. 5. Neo, nes, to spin, nevi; maneo, to tarry, makes mansi. 6. Torqueo, to wrest, torsi, 7. And haereo, to stick, haesi.  
8. Veo is made vi; as, Ferveo, fervi, to be hot; but niveo, to wink, and its compound conniveo to close and open the eyes, makes nivi & nixi; cieo, to trouble, makes civi; and vieo, to bind, vievi.  
III. THe third Conjugation will form the Preterperfect ten, as is plain here. Bornwell is made by; as, Lambo, lambi, to lick. Except 1. Scribo, scripsi, to write; nubo, nupsi, to be married to a man; and cumbo, cubui, to lie down.  
Co is made ci; as Vinco vici to overcome. But 1. Parco makes peperci, & parsi, to spare; dico, dixi, to say; and duco, duxi, to lead.  
Do is made di; as, mando mandi, to eat; but scindo, to cut, makes scidi; findo, fidi, to cleav; fundo, sudi, to power out; tundo, tutudi, to knock; pendo pependi, to weigh; tendo, tetendi, to stretch; pedo pepédi, to fart, cado, cecĭdi, to fall; caedo, cecidi, to beat; cedo, cessi, to give place; vado, to go away; rado, to shave; laedo, to hurt; ludo, to play; divido, to divide; trudo, to thrust; claudo, to shut; plaudo, to clap hands; rodo, to gnaw, change always do into si.  
Go is made xi; as, jungo, to join, junxi; but r before go makes si; as, spargo, sparsi, to sprinkle; lego, to read makes legi; and ago, to do, egi; tango, tetigi, to touch; pungo to prick, makes punxi & pupugi; frango, fregi, to break; pango, pepigi, to make a bargain; pango pegi, to join; pango, panxi, to sing.  
Ho is made xi; as, Traho, traxi, to draw; and veho, vexi, to carry.  
Lo is made ui; as, Colo, colui, to till; but Psallo, to sing, and sallo, to salt, make salli: vello, to pluck up, makes velli and vulsi; fall, to deceiv, makes fefelli; cello to break, ceculi; and pello, to drive away, pepuli.  
more is made ui; as, Vomo, vomui, to vomit: but emo, makes eini, to buy; como, compsi, to comb; promo, prompsi, to draw; demo, dempsi, to take away; sumo, sumpsi, to take; premo, pressi, to press.  
No is made vi; as, sino, sivi, to suffer. Except Temno, tempsi, to despise; sterno, stravi, to strew; sperno, sprevi, to despise; lino, levi, lini, & livi to dawb; cerno, crevi, to discern. Gigno, makes genui, to beget; pono, posui, to put; cano, cecini, to sing.  
Po is made psi; as, scalpo, scalpsi, to scratch; rumpo, rupi, to break; strepo, strepui to make a nois; crepo, crepui, to tract.  
Quo is made qui; as, linquo, liqui, to leave. Except coquo, coxi, to boil.  
Ro is made vi; as, sero, to plant or sow, makes sevi, which changing the signification, rather maketh serui; verro, to brush, verri, & versi; uro ussi, to burn; gero, gessi, to act, or beat; quaero, quaesivi, to seek; tero, trivi, to wet; curro, cucurri, to run.  
So will make sivi; as, accerso, to go to call, arcesso to go to call, incesso, to revile, and lacesso, sivi, to provoke. Except capesso, to offer to take, which makes capessi, & capessivi; facesso, to go about to do, and viso, to visit, makes visi: but pinso, to bake, will have pinsui.  
Sco is made vi; as pasco, pavi to feed; but posco, will have poposci, to require.  
Disco, didici, to learn, and quinisco, quexi, to nod with the head.  
To is made ti; as, verto, verti, to turn; Sisto, stiti, to make to stand; but mitto, makes misi, to send; peto, will form petivi, to ask; sterto, stertui, to snort; meto, messui, to mow.  
Ecto is made exi; as, flecto, flexi, to bend; but pecto, to comb, makes pexi, and pexui; and necto, to knit, nexi, and nexui.  
Vo is made vi; as, volvo, volvi, to roll over; Except vivo, vixi, to live. Nexo, makes nexui to knit; and texo, texui, to weav.  
Cio is made ci; as, facio feci, to make; jacio, jeci, to cast: but lacio, to allure, makes lexi; and specio, to behold, spexi.  
Dio is made di; as, fodio, to dig, makes fodi.  
Gio is made gi'; as, fugio, fugi, to avoid.  
Pio is made pis; as, capio cepi, to take: Except cupio cupivi, to desire; and rapio rapui, to snatch; and sapio sapui, or sapivi, to be wise.  
Rio is made ri; as, pario peperi, to bring forth.  
Tio is made ssi; as, quatio quassi, to shake; which Preterperfect ten is seldom used.  
Vo is made ui; as, statuo statui, to appoint; but pluo, to rain, makes pluvi, and plui; struo struxi, to build; fluo, fluxi, to flow.  
iv THe fourth Conjugation makes is in the present ten, and ivi in the preterperfect ten; as, scio scis scivi, to know. Except venio veni, to come; cambio campsi, to exchange; raucio rausi, to be hoars; farcio farsi, to stuff; sarcio sarsi, to patch; sepio sepsi, to hedge; sentio sensi, to perceiv; fulcio fulsi, to underprop; haurio hausi, to draw; sancio sanxi, to establish; vincio vinxi to bind; saii● salui, to leap, and amicio amicui, to clothe. We seldom use, Cambivi, haurivi, amicivi, etc.   

Chap. 32. Of the Preterperfect tenses of Compound Verbs.  
The Simple and Compound verbs have the same Preterperfect ten. Except, 1. Words that double the first syllabl, 2. Plico. 3. Oleo. 4. Pungo. 5. Do, & Sto. 6. Verbs changing the first vowel into e. 6. Verbs change the first vowel into e. 7. Pasco, 8. Verbs that change the first vowel into a. 9 Placeo. 10. Pango. 11. Maneo. 12 Scalpo. calco, salto, 13. Claudo, quatio, lavo 14. Verbs that change the first vowel of the Present ten into i, but not of the Preter ten. 15. Facio. 16. Lego.  
THe Simple and the Compound Verb have the same Preterperfect ten; as, Docui, I have taught; edocui, I have fully taught. but  
1. The syllable which the Simple verb doubleth, is not always doubled in the Compound, except in these three, praecurro, to run before; excurro, to run out; and repungo to prick again; and in the Compounds of Do to give; disco to learn; sto to stand; and posco to require.  
2. Plico compounded with sub or a Noun, will have plicavi; as, supplico, to supply; multiplico, to multiply; but applico, to apply; complico, to fold up; replico, to reply, will end in ui, or avi.  
3. Though Oleo, to smell, makes olui, yet its compounds make rather olevi: but Redoleo, to smell strong, and suboleo, to smell a little, are form like the simple Verb.  
4. All the compounds of Pungo, to prick, make punxi; but repungo, to prick again, makes repupugi, and repunxi.  
5. The Compounds of Do, when they are of the third Conjugation, make didi; as Credo, to believ; edo, to set forth; dedo, to yield; reddo, to restore; perdo, to destorie; abdo, to hid; obdo, to set against; condo, to bnild; indo, to put in; trado, to deliver; prodo, to betray; vendo, to sell: But Abscondo, to hid, makes Abscondi ..  
The Compounds of Sto, to stand, make stiti.  
6. These Simple Verbs being compounded do change the first vowel of the Present ten, and Preterperfect ten, and so of all other tenses into e, viz. Damno, to condemn; lacto, to give suck; sacro, to dedicate; fallo, to deceiv; arceo, to drive away; tracto, to handle; fatiscor, to be weary; partio, to divide; scando, to climb; spargo, to sprinkle; and pario, to bring forth young, whereof two Compounds, Comperio, to find out by search, and reperio, to find by chance, do make peri, and all the rest pervi; as, aperio to open; operio, to cober.  
7. These two compounds of Pasco, viz. compesco, to pasture together, and dispesco, to drive from pasture, will have pescui, the rest will have pavi; as, epasco, to cat up.  
8. These Verbs being compounded do change the first vowel every where into i, viz. habeo, to have, lateo, to lie hid, salio, to leap; statuo, to appoint; cado, to fall; laedo, to hurt; pango pegi, to join; cano, to sing, quaero, to seek; caedo cecidi, to beat; tango, to touch; egeo, to want; teneo, to hold; taceo, to keep silence; sapio, to be wise; and rapio, to snatch; as, rapio rapui, makes eripio eripui: but the Compounds of Canon, make the Preterperfect ten in ui; as, concino to agree in one tune, concinui.  
9 So of Placeo cometh displiceo to displeas: but complaceo to like well, and perplaceo to pleas throughly; do follow the simple Verb.  
10. These four Compounds of pango to join, do keep a, viz. Depango to fasten down; oppango to fasten to; circumpango to fasten about; and repango, to dis-join.  
11. These four Compounds of Maneo mansi, to tarry, do make minui, viz. Praemineo, to excel others, cmineo, to appear before others; promineo, to hang out in sight, and immineo, to hang over: but the rest follow the simple Verb.  
12. The Compounds of scalpo, to scratch; calco, to tread; salto, to dance, change a into u; as, exsculpo, to carv; inculco, to inculcate, and resulto, to rebound.  
13. The Compounds of Claudo to shut, quatio to shake, lavo to wash, do cast away a; as, occludo to shut fast, excludo to shut out, of claudo. Percutio to smite, and excutio to shake off, of quatio. Proluo, is, lui, to wash much; diluo, is lui, to purge with washing. of lavo.  
14. These Verbs being compounded, change the first vowel of the Present ten (into i) but not of the Preter perfect ten, viz. Ago to do, emo to buy, sedeo to sit, rego to rule, frango to break, capio, to take, jacio to cast, lacio to allute, specio to behold, premo, to press: as of frango is made refringo refregi to break open; of capio, incipio incepi to begin: but perago to finish satago to be busy about a thing, coëmo to unie together, do follow their simple Verb. And of ago, dego to live, makes degi, and cogo to compel, coëgi: as also of rego, pergo to go forward, makes perrexi, and surgo to arise, surrexi, the middle syllable of the Present ten being taken away.  
15. Facio changeth nothing unless it have a Preposition before it; as, Olfacio to smell, calfacio to make hot, and inficio to infect.  
16. The compounds of Lego, with re, se, per, prae, sub, trans, keep the vowel of the Present ten, the rest change it into i; of which Intelligo to understand, diligo to love, negligo to neglect, make lexi, and all the rest make legi.   

Chap. 33. Of the Supines of Simple Verbs.  
The Supine is form of the Preter ten, By makes tum. Ci, ctum. Di, sum. The syllabl is not doubled in the Supines. Gi', ctum. Li, sum.  
Mi, tum. Ni, Pi, Qi,  
Ri, sum. Si, sum. Psi tum. Ti tum. Vi tum. Vi itum, utum. Sum. Xi ctum.  
NOw learn to form the Supine from the Preterperfect ten thus: By, maketh tum; as, Bibi bibitum to drink,  
Ci is made ctum, as vici victum to overcome, ici ictum to smite, feci factum to do, jeci jactum to cast.  
Di is made sum, as vidi visum to see: but some do double ss; as pandi passum to lay open, sedi sessum to sit, scidi scissum to cut, fidi fissum to cleav, fodi fossum to dig.  
And here also you may observe, that the syllable which is doubled in the Preterperfect ten, is not doubled in the Supines, as totondi to clip, makes tonsum; cecidi to beat, caesum; cécidi to fall, casum; tetendi to stretch, tensum, and tentum; tutudi to knock, tunsum; pepédi to fart, peditum: to which add dedi, which maketh datum.  
Gi' is made ctum, as, legi to read, lectum; pegi to join, and pepigi to make a bargain, pactum; fregi to break, fractum; tetigi to touch, tactum; egi to do, actum; pupugi to prick, punctum, and fugi to avoid fugitum.  
Li is made sum, as salli to season with salt, salsum; pepuli to drive away, makes pulsum; ceculi to break, culsum; fefelli to deceiv, falsum; velli to pluck up, vulsum, and tuli to suffer, latum.  
Mi, ni, pi, qui, are made tum, as emi emptum to buy, veni ventum to come, cecini cantum to sing, cepi captum, to take, coepio coeptum to begin, rupi ruptum to break, liqui lictum to leave.  
Ri is made sum, as verri versum to brush: except peperi partum to bring forth.  
Si is made sum, as visi visum to visit; yet misi maketh missum to send, with a double ss: except fulsi fultum to underprop hausi haustum to draw, sarsi sartum to patch, farsi fartum to stuff, ussi ustum to burn, gessi gestum to bear, torsi tortum or torsum to wrest, indulsi indultum or indulsum to pamper.  
Psi is made tum, as scripsi scriptum to write; except campsi campsum, to exchange.  
Ti is made tum, as steti to stand, and stiti to make to stand, make statum; except verti versum to turn.  
Vi is made tum, as flavi flatum to blow; except pavi pastum to feed, lavi lotum lautum or lavatum to wash, potavi potum & potatum to drink, favi fautum to favour, cavi cautum to beware, sevi satum to sow, livi or lini litum to dawb, solvi solutum to loos, volvi volutum to roll, singultivi singultum to sob, venivi venum to be sold, sepelivi sepultum to bury.  
Vi makes itum, as domui domitum to tame: except every verb in uo, because ui will always make utum, as exui exutum to put off; but rui makes ruitum to rush; so secui sectum to cut, necui nectum to kill, fricui frictum to rub, miscui mistum to mingle, amicui amictum to cloth, torrui tostum to roast, docui doctum to teach, tenui tentum to hold, consului consultum to consult, alui altum or alitum to nourish, salui saltum to leap, colui cultum to worship, occului occultum to hid, pinsui pistum to bake, rapui raptum to snatch, serui sertum to put to, texui textum to weav. But these change ui into sum, for censeo to think maketh censum, cellui celsum to break, messui messum to mow, nexui nexum to knit, pexui pexum, to comb, patui passum to lie open, carui cassum & caritum, to want.  
Xi is made sum, as vinxi victum to bind: but five lose n, viz. finxi fictum to feign, minxi mictum to piss, pinxi pictum to paint, strinxi strictum to tie, rinxi rictum to grin.  
And these xi into xum, Flexi flexum to bend, plexi plexum to punish, fixi fixum to fasten, fluxi fluxum to flow.   

Chap. 34. Of the Supines of Compound verbs and of the Preterperfect ten of verbs in Or.  
The Compound supine is formedlike the Simple. Verbs in or make their Preterperf. ten of the latter supine by putting to s and sum vel fui.  
Every Compound Supine is form as the Simple, though there remain not always the same syllable in both.  
The compound of tunsum to kneck, n being taken away, makes tusum, and of ruitum to rush, is made rutum, i being taken away, and so of saltum to leap, is made sultum.  
When sero maketh satum, its compounds make situm.  
These Supines captum to take, factum to do, jactum to cast, raptum to snatch, cantum to sing, partum, to bring forth, sparsum to sprinkle, carptum to crop and fartum to stuff, change a into e.  
The verb edo to eat, when it is compounded maketh not estum, but esum, only comedo to eat up maketh both.  
Of nosco to know, cognitum to know, and agnitum to acknowledge, are only used, the rest of its compounds make notum, for noscitum is of no use.  
II. VErbs in or take their Preterperfect ten from the later Supine, by changing u into us, adding sum vel fui; as of lectu is made lectus sum vel fui. But of these verbs, sometimes a Deponent, sometimes a Commune is to be noted; for labour to slide, makes lapsus sum, patior to suffer, makes passus sum, and its compounds compatior to suffer together, compassus sum, perpetior to suffer thoroughly perpessus sum, fateor to confess, makes fassus sum, and its compounds, as confiteor to confess confessus sum, diffiteor to deny, diffessus sum, gradior to go by steps, makes gressus sum, and so its compounds, as digredior to digress, digressus sum, fatiscor to be weary makes fessus sum, metior to measure mensus sum, utor to use usus sum; ordior or weav makes orditus, ordior to begin orsus, nitor to endeavour nisus or nixus sum, ulciscor to revenge ultus sum, irascor to be angry makes iratus sum, reor to suppose ratus sum, obliviscor to forget oblitus sum, fruor to enjoie fructus or fruitus sum, misereor to pity misertus sum; tuor and tueor to see make not tutus but tuitus sum, though both have tutum and tuitum in the Supine; loquor to speak makes locutus sum, sequor to follow secutus sum, experior to try expertus sum, paciscor to make a bargain pactus sum, nanciscor to get nactus sum, apiscor to get, which is an old verb, makes aptus sum. whence adipiscor to obtain adeptus, queror to complain questus sum, proficiscor to go on a journey profectus sum, expergiscor to awake experrectus sum, comminiscor to feign commentus sum, nascor to be born natus sum, morior to die mortuus sum, orior to arise makes ortus sum.   

Chap. 35. Of certain verbs Irregular, or going out of the common rules of conjugating.  
Verbs irregular are 1. Redundant, having a Preter ten of the Active and of the Passive voice. 2. Variant, as Neuter-passives. and Such as borrow their Preterperfect ten. 3. Defective 1. In the Preter ten. 2. In the Supine.  
THese verbs have a Preterperfect ten both of the Active and Passive voice, as coeno to sup makes coenavi and coenatus sum, juro to swear juravi and juratus, poto to drink potavi and potus, titubo to stumble titubavi or titubatus,.  
So also careo to want makes carui and cassus sum, prandeo to dine, prandi, and pransus, pateo to lie open patui & passus, placeo to pleas placui and placitus, suesco to accustom suevi and suetus, veneo to be sold venivi and venditus sum, nubo to be married to a man nupsi and nupta sum, mereor to deserv merui and meritus sum: to these add, libet it listeth libuit and libitum est vel fuit, licet it is lawful licuit, and licitum est vel fuit, taedet it irketh taeduit, and pertaesum est vel fuit, pudet it ashameth puduit, and puditum est vel fuit, and piget it irketh which makes piguit and pigitum est vel fuit.  
NEuter-passives are thus form: viz. like neuters in the present ten, and passives in the preter ten; Gaudeo to rejoice gavisus sum vel fui, fido to trust fisus sum vel fui, audeo to be bold ausus sum vel fui, fio to be made or done factus sum vel fui, soleo to be wont solitus sum vel fui, moereo to be sad moestus sum vel fui, But PHOCAS taketh moestus for a noun Adjective.  
Some verbs borrow their preterperfect ten from another verb; as a verb Inceptive ending in sco, standing for the primitive verb, will have the preterperfect ten of the primitive verb, thus; tepesco to begin to be warm makes tepui of tepeo to be warm, fervesco to begin to be hot makes fervi of ferveo to be hot, cerno to see will have vidi of video to see, quatio to shake concussi of concutio to shake, ferio to smite percussi of percutio to smite, meio to piss will have minxi of mingo to piss, sido to settle sedi of sedo to sit, tollo to lift up will have Justuli of suffero to bear, sum I am will have fui of fuo to be, fero to bear tuli of tulo to bear, sisto to make to stand steti of sto to stand, furo to be mad insanivi of insanio to be mad.  
So also vescor to eat will have its preterperfect ten from pascor to be fed, medeor to heal from medicor to heal, liquor to be melted from liquefio to be melted, reminiscor to remember from recordor to call to mind.  
THese verbs want the preterperfect ten: vergo to bend or look towards, ambigo to doubt, glisco to grow or encreas, fatisco to chink, polleo to be able, nideo to shine: to these add puerasco to begin to be a child; and passives whose actives want the Supines, as metuor to be feared, timeor to be feared; and all Desideratives except parturio to strive to bring forth, and esurio to begin to be hungry, or to desire to eat (with a few others) which have the preterperfect ten.  
THese verbs seldom or never have the Supine: Lambo to lick, mico to shine, rudo to braie, scabo to claw, parco to spare, dispesco to drive from pasture, posco to require, disco to learn, compesco to pasture together, quinisco to nod, dego to live, ango to vex, sugo to suck, lingo to lick, ningo to snow, satago to be busy about a thing, psallo to sing, volo to will, nolo to be unwilling, malo to be more willing, tremo to tremble, strideo to make a nois, strido to make a nois, flaveo to be yellow, liveo to be black and blue, aveo to cobet, paveo to fear, conniveo to wink, ferveo to be hot. The Compounds of nuo to nod, as renuo to refuse: the compounds of cado to fall, as incido to fall into; Except occido to fall down occasum, and recido recasum to fall back: respuo to refuse, linquo to leave, luo to punish, metuo to fear, cluo to glister, frigeo to be cold, calvo to be baid, sterto to snort, timeo to fear, luceo to shine, arceo to drive away, whose compounds make ercitum: the compounds of gruo to cry like a Crane, as ingruo to invade.  
And all verbs Neuters of the second Conjugation that end in ui; except oleo to smell, doleo to griev, placeo to pleas, taceo to hold one's peace, pareo to obey, careo to want, noceo to hurt, pateo to lie open, lateo to lie bid, va'eo to be able, caleo to be warm, which will have the Supines.   

Chap. 36. Of verbs that want certain Moods and Tenses.  
3. Incertain Moods and tenses, as, Aïo. Ausim. Duim. Saive. Ave. Cedo. Faxo. Forem. Quaeso. Infit. Defit. Confieri. Inquam. Odi. Cepi. Memini. Dor. For. Sci. Eo & queo. Orior. Morior. Volo. Nolo. Malo. Fero. Feror. Edo. Sum.  
THese verbs (more usually) are called Defectives which want certain Moods and Tenses, viz.  
Indicative Mood Present ten, Aïo I say, or quoth I; Aïs' thou sayest; Aït he saith, or quoth he, Plur. Aïunt they say.  
Imperfect. Aïebam I did say, hath all persons in both numbers.  
Imperativus, Aï say thou?  
Subjunct. Present, Aïas thou mayest say, Aïat he may say. Plur. Aïamus we may say, Aïant, they may say.  
Participium Praesens, Aïens saying.  
Subjunct praesens. Ausim I dare, Ausis thou darest, Ausit he dare. Plur. Ausint they dare.  
So also Duim I give, Duis thou givest, Duit he giveth. Plur. Duint they give.  
For the Ancients expressed the Subjunctive Mood in in, hence we read creduim for eredam.  
Indicat. Futur. Salvebis thou shalt greet, or bid God speed.  
Imperat. Salve salveto greet you well. Plur. Salvete salvetote greet ye well.  
Infinitive, Salvere to greet well.  
Imperative, Ave Aveto hall thou. Plur. Avete Avetote hall ye.  
Infinite. Auére, to bid one hall.  
Imperat. Cedo reach me. Plur. Cedite, anciently Cette reach ye.  
Indic. & Subjunct, Futur. Faxo vel Faxim I will bring to pass, Faxis thou wilt make, Faxit he will make. Plur. Faxint, they will make.  
Subiunct. Forem I should, or might be, Foreste thou shouldest, or might be, Foret he should or might be. Plur. Forent they might be.  
Infinite. Futur. Fore to be.  
Indic. Praesens, Quaeso, I pray. Plur. Quaesumus we pray.  
Indic. Praesens, Infit he saith. Plur. Infiunt they say. And Defit it is wanting, Defiet it will be wanting, Defiat let it be wanting, as also defieri to be wanting, Confieri to be done at once.  
Indicat. Praesens, Inquio vel Inquam, I say, Inquis thou sayest, Inquit he saith. Plur. Inquiunt they say.  
Perfectum, Inquisti thou hast said, Inquit, he hath said.  
Futurum, Inquies thou shalt say, Inquiet he shall say. Plur. Inquietis ye shall say, Inquient they shall say.  
Imperat. Inque, Inquito say thou.  
Subjunct. praes. Inquiat he may say.  
Particip. praesens, Inquiens saying.  
Odi I hate, coepi I begin, memini I remember, have only those tenses which are form of the Pretertens, viz. those that end in ram, rim, ssem, ro, and sse, save that memini hath in the Imperative mood singular Memento remember thou, mementote remember ye.  
These simple verbs For, dor, fer, der, are not found in the first person singular of the Present ten, but (almost) in all the rest.  
Dic, duc, fer, fac, are cut off by Apocope.  
Sci of scio to know is not in use, nor solebo of soleo to be wont, nor fuo to be, an old verb.  
Eo I go, and queo I am able, make their Preterimperfect ten ibam and quibam, and their Future ibo and quibo.  
Orior oreris to arise, hath oriri in the Infinitive mood, and morior maketh mori and moriri.  
Volo I will, nolo I will not, malo I had rather, fero I bear, feror I am born. and edo to eat, have commonly a Syncope in many tenses; as Volo, vis, vult. Vultis. Nolo, nonvis, nonvult. Nolumus. Malo, mavis, mavult. Malumus. Fero, fers, fert. Feror, ferris vel far, fertur. Edo, edis vel es, edit vel est, etc. of which volo and malo want the Imperative mood. Nolo makes in the Imperative mood Noli nolito do not thou. plur. Nolite nolitote do not ye.  
Sum with its compounds vows the Gerunds, Supines, and Participles of the Present ten, save that absens, praesens come of absum, praesum; for futurus is of fui, which was once the preter ten of the obsolete verb fuo. Possum vows the Imperative mood.   

Chap. 32. Of Forming the verb Sum.  
The verb Sum hath a manner of declining which belongs only to its self. Verbum Sum peculiarem Conjugandi rationem sibi postulat. Sum, es, fui, esse, futurus. Sum, es, fui, esse, futurus. The Indicative Mood. The Subjunctive Mood. Present ten. Sing 1 Sum, possum, I am  Cùm Sim, Possim, when I am.  2 Es, thou art.  Sis, thou art.  3 Est, he is  Sit, he is.  Plur. 1 Sumus, We are  Simus, We are.  2 Estis, ye are.  Sitis, ye are.  3 Sunt. they are.  Sim they are.  Imperfect. Sing. 1 Eram, poteram, I was.  Cùm Essem, possem when I was.  2 Eras, thou wast.  Esses, thou wert  3 Erat, he was.  Esset, he was.  Plur. 1 Eramus, We were.  Essemus, We were.  2 Eratis. ye were.  Essetis, ye were. 3 Erant. they were.  Essent. they were.  Preter ten. Sing. 1 Fui, Potui, I have been. Cùm Fuerim, potuerum, when I have been. 2 Fuisti, thou hast Fueris, thou hast 3 Fuit, he hath Fuerit, he hath   Fuimus, We have   Plur. 1 Fuistis, Fuerimus, We have 2 Fuérunt, ye have Fueritis, ye have 3 Fuére. they have Fuerint. they have Preterplup. Sing. 1 Fueram. potueram I had been. Cùm Fuissem. potuissem, when I had been. 2 Fueras, thou hadst Fuisses, thou hadst 3 Fuerat, he had Fuisset, he had Plur. 1 Fueramus, We had Fuissemus, We had 2 Fueratis, ye had Fuissetis, ye had 3 Fuerant. they had Fuissent. they had Future. Sing. 1 Ero. Potero, thou shalt be. Cùm Fuero. potuero, when I shall be. 2 Eris, I shall Fueris, thou shalt 3 Erit, he shall Fuerit, he shall Plur. 1 Frimus, We shall Fuerimus, We shall 2 Eritis, ye shall Fueritis, ye shall 3 Erunt. they shall Fuerint. they shall The Imperative Mood. The Infinitive Mood. Present ten. Sing. 2 Sister, es, esto, Be thou Present and Imperfect. Esse, to be. 3 Sat, esto, be he.    1 Simus, Be we. Perfect and Preterplup. Fuisse, to have or had been. Plur. 2 Sitis, este, estote, be ye.    3 Sint, sunto, be they. Future Futurum esse to be hereafter. So likewise are its compounds declined, Absum to be absent, Desum to be wanting Praesum to be before, Obsum to be against; but Prosum to profit, takes d between two vowels, and Possum to be able, (of potis able, and sum to be) sometimes keep's t, and sometimes changeth it into s before s. Sic variantur & ejus come, posita, Absum, desum, praesumobsum; prosum recipit d inter duas vocales, & Possum (à potis & sum) quandoque retinet t, quandoque mutat in s ante s.   

Cap. 38. Of Verbs Impersonals and Derivatives.  
Impersonals be declined in the third person only. And they be of the Active voice. Verbs Derivatives are 1. Inchoatives. 2. Frequentatives. 3. Desideratives. 4. Diminutives. 5. Imitatives. 6. Apparatives. 7. Denominatives.  
IMpersonals be declined throughout all Moods and tenses in the voice of the third person singular only.  
And they be either 1. Of the Active voice which end in t; as Decet it becometh, decebat, decuit, decuerat, decebit. Deceat, deceret, decuerit, decere. 2. Of the passive voice, which end in tur; as, Studetur it is studied, studebatur; studitum est vel fuit., studitum erat vel fuerat, studebitur, studeatur, studeretur, studitum sit vel fuerit, studitum esset vel fuisset, studitum erit vel fuerit, studeri.  
Impersonals want (for the most part) Gerunds, Supines, and Participles.  
The Participles by which we express the preter ten are put Substantively in the Neuter gender.  
Impersonals of the Active voice are these eleven, which (almost) always remain Impersonals; viz. Decet it becometh, Libet it listeth, Licet it is lawful, Liquet it is clear, (whose Preter ten is not exstant) lubet it listeth, miseret it pitieth, oportet it behooveth, poenitet it repenteth, piget it irketh, pudet it ashameth, and taedet it irketh, which are also sometimes found in the third person plural, as decent, oportent, pudent.  
To these are reckoned some personals (which are found absolutely in the third person without a nominative case, having an Infinitive mood presently after them). Such are,  
In the first Conjugation, delectat it delighteth, juvat it helpeth, praestat it is better, restat it remaineth, stat; it is resolved on, constat, it is manifest, vacat I am at leisure.  
In the Second, apparet it appeareth, attinet it belongeth, debet it aught, patet it is evident, place it pleaseth, solet it is wont.  
In the Third, Accidit, it befalleth, coepit it beginneth, conducit it belongeth to, contingit it happeneth, desinit it ceaseth, incipit it beginneth, sufficit it sufficeth.  
In the Fourth, Convenit it agree'th, evenit it falls out, expedit it is expedient.  
Among the irregular verbs, est it is, interest it concerneth, prodest it doth profit, potest it may, fit it is done, refert it concerneth.  
Likewise verbs of an exempt power (i. e. that signify an action not of any humane power) come near the nature of Impersonals, as Fulgurat it lighteneth, pluit it raineth, lucescit it waxeth light.  
2. Impërsonals of the Passive voice have no certain number, because they come of all verbs Actives, and some Neuters, as, Legitur it is read, curritur it is run.  
Lastly no verb (almost) is so far a personal, as that it cannot take upon it the form of an Impersonal, and some Impersonals turn again sometimes into Personals.  
A verb Impersonal may indifferently be taken to be of any person in both numbers, viz. by reason of an obliqne case adjoined; as, me oportet I must, te oportet thou must, illum oportet he must. Oportet nos, we must, oportet vos ye must, oportet illos they must. Statur à me I stand, statur à te thou standest, statur ab illo he standeth. Statur à nobis we stand. statur à vobis ye stand, statur ab illis they stand.  
Derivative verbs are very often used for their Primitives, as Timesco for timeo to fear, hisco for high to gape.  
There be five kinds of Derivatives, verbs.  
1. Inchoätives, or Augmentatives, which signify beginning or augmentation, and end in sco; as, Lucesco to begin to be light, Ardesco to be hotter and hotter.  
2. Frequentatives, which signify a certain assiduity or endeavour; and end in to, so, xo, or tor; as, Visito to visit often, Viso to go to see, nexo to tie often, sector to endeavour to follow.  
3. Desideratives, or Meditatives which signify a certain desire or strife, and end in urio; as, Lecturio to strive to read, coenaturio to desire a supper.  
4. Diminutives, which signify the lessening of its Primitive, and end in lo or sso; as, Sorbillo to sup often, pitisso to sipple or sup a little.  
5. Imitatives, which signify imitation, and end in isso, and in or; as, Patrisso to resemble a father, vulpinor to play the Fox.  
6. Hitherto belong also Apparatives, which signify a preparation to, and end in co; as, Vellico to pluck, fodico to dig.  
7. As also Denominatives, which come from nouns, and have no proper appellation; as, Lignor to purvey wood, rusticor to live in the Country.   

Chap. 39 Of a Participle.  
A Participle taketh part of a Noun and part of a Verb. There be four kinds of Participles. 1. Of the Present ten. 2. Of the Preter ten. 3. Of the Future in rus. 4. Of the Futurr in dus. How Participles are form. Of what verbs they come, Nouns Participials. Participles of the Present ten be declined like Felix. of other tenses like Bonus.  
APARTICIPLE is a part of Speech derived of a Verb, which taketh part of a Noun as well as of Verb; as Amans loving. A Participle hath from a Noun, gender, case, and declension; from a Verb, ten and signification; from both these, number, and figure.  
According to ten there be four kinds of Participles.  
1. A Participle of the Present ten hath the signification of the Present ten, and endeth in ans, ens, and iens; as, Amans, docens, legens, audience.  
But iens of eo is seldom read in the Nominative case, but euntis etc. in the obliqne cases. But its compounds have the Nominative case in iens, and the Genitive in euntis; except Ambiens, ambientis.  
2. A Participle of the Preter ten signifieth the time past, and endeth in tus, sus, xus, as Amatus loved, visus seen, nexus knit; and one in vus, as Mortuus dead.  
3. A Participle of the future in Rus hath the signification of the Future ten of its Infinitive mood Active; as, Amaturus to love, Docturus about to teach.  
4. A Participle of the Future in Dus hath the signification of the Future ten of the Infinitive Passive; as, Amandus to be loved hereafter.  
The Participle of the Present ten is form of the Preterimperfect ten by changing the last syllable into ns; as of Amabam, amans.  
The Participle of the Preter ten is form of the later Supine by putting to s; as of Amatu, amatus.  
The participle of the Future in rus is form of the later Supine by putting to rus; as of Amatu, amaturus.  
The participle of the Future in dus is form of the Genitive case of the participle of the present ten by changing 'tis into dus; as of Amantis, amandus.  
These participles are derived of their verbs besides the common rule; Pariturus about to bring forth, nasciturus to be born, soniturus to sound, arguiturus to reprove, moriturus to die, luiturus that shall pale or suffer punishment, nosciturus to know, osurus to hate, futurus to be, oriturus to arise.  
These be like participles but are derived of Nouns, Tunicatus coated, togatus gowned, personatus personated, larvatus marked, etc.  
From Actives and Neuters which have the Supines come two Participles, one of the present ten, and the other of the Future in rus; as of Amorett, amans amaturus, of Curro, currens cursurus.  
But of some Neuters are found also Participles in dus, as Dubitandus to be doubted, vigilandus to be watched, carendus to be wanted, dolendus to be grieved. And of these which make their preterperfect ten in manner of passives, is made also a participle of the preter ten; as gaudeo gavisus glad, juro juratus sworn: so likewise from Impersonals in tur; as of Aratur aratus ploughed.  
Of Verbs Passives come two participles, one of the preter ten, the other of the Future in dus; as of Amor cometh Amatus, amandus.  
Of Verbs Deponent come three participles, viz. of the present ten, preter ten, and of the Future in rus, as of Auxilior to aid cometh auxilians, auxiliatus, auxiliaturus.  
To many also belongeth a participle in dus, especially to such as govern an Accusative case, as of Loquor to speak, cometh Loquens, locuturus, locutus, loquendus.  
Of Verbs Commune come four participles, as of Largior to bestow or be bestowed, cometh Largiens, largiturus, largitus, largiendus.  
There be no participles exstant from verbs Impersonals, except Poenitens repenting, decens becoming, libens & lubens willing, pertaesus irking, poenitendus to be repent, pudens shaming, pudendus to be ashamed, pigendus to be irked.  
Participles are turned into nouns Participials.  
1. When they govern another case then their verb doth govern; as, Amans pecuniae loving of many.  
2. When they are compounded with words which their verbs will not be compounded withal; as, Infans an infant, Indoctus unskilful.  
3. When they be compared; as, Amans loving. Amantior more loving, Amantissimus very loves.  
4. When they signify no time; as, Sapiens wise, Sponsa a bride.  
Participles of the Present ten very often become Substantives, sometimes of the Masculine gender; as, Oriens the East: sometimes of the Feminine; as, Consonans a Consonant: sometimes of the Neuter; as, Accidens an accident: sometimes of the Common of three; as, Appetens greedy of.  
Participles of the Present ten are declined with three Articles; as, Hic, haec, & hoc Amans, like Felix.  
Participles of other tenses are declined with three terminations; as, Amatus, ta, tum; Amaturus, ra, rum, Amandus, da, dum, like Bonus.   

Chap. 40 Of an Adverb.  
V An Adverb explaineth a Verb. There be 33 kinds of Adverbs.  
AN ADVERB is a part of Speech added to other words (but especially to the Verb) to declare and perfect their sens and signification.  
The Significations of Adverbs are many, whose variety must be gathered out of the Circumstances of the Verbs.  
According to their signification some are called Adverbs of Place, and signify In a Place; as, Hic here, Illic there. To a Place; as, Huc hither, Illuc thither. From a Place; as, Hinc hence, Illinc thence. By a Place; as, Hac this way, Illac that way. Time; as, Nunc now, tunc then, hodie to date; usque until, or as far as, is both of Time and Place. Number; as, Semel once, bis twice, ter thrice, iterum again. Orders; as, Indè after that, denique last, demum lastly. Ask; as, Cur why, quare wherefore, unde whence. Calling; as, Heus ho, o eho so ho. Affirming; as, Certè truly, nae truly, profectò scilicet yes. Denying; as, Non not, haud not, minimè no. Swearing; as, Pol by Apollo, aedipol by Apollo's temple, hercle by Hercules. Exhorting; as, Agè go to, sodes if you dare, sûltis if you will. Granting; as, Licèt it may be so, estò be it so, sit sanè be it indeed so. Forbidding; at, Nè not, non not. Flattering; as, Amabò prithee. Wishing; as utinam would to God, o si O that. Gathering together; as, Simul together, unà in one, pariter alike. Parting; as, Seorsim severally, gregatim by flocks, bifariam two ways. Choosing; as, Potiùs rather, imò yea rather, satiùs better. Excluding; as, Tantùm only, modò only, solùm only. Including or denying only; as, Non modò not only, non solùm not only, nedum much less. Diversity; as, Aliter otherwise, secus otherwise. Propinquity or Nearness; as, Obviàm meeting, praestò at hand. Intending or Increasing; as, Valdè very, nimis too, funditus utterly, omnino altogether. Remitting or diminishing; as, Vix scarce, aegrè hardly, paulatim by little and little, pedetentim foot by foot. Restraining; as, Quatenus as for as, quoad as much concerneth, in-quantum in as much as. Of a thing not finished; as, Penè almost, farm in a manner. Explaining; as Putà suppose, utpote as, nimirum to wit, id est that is, videlicet to wit, quasi dicat as if one should say. Doubting; as, Forsan perhaps, forsitan perhaps so, fortassis if it be so. Chance; as, Fortè as it falls out, fortuitò by chance, fortè-fortunâ by fortune. Showing; as, En lo, ecce behold, sic thus, ità so. Likeness; as, Sic so, sicut as, ceu as, tanquam as, ita as. Quantity; as, Parùm a little, minimè very little, satis enough, abunde in abundance. Quality; as, Been well, malè ill, and such as end in e, and come of Adjectives of three terminations; as, Doctè learnedly, Pulcrè bravely; also such as end in er, and come of Adjectives of three Articles; as, graviter heavily, feliciter happily. Comparing; as, Tam as well, quàm as, minùs less, aequè as well as, magis atque rather then.  
Adverbs derived of Adjectives are compared like Adjectives, and differ only in termination; as, Doctè learnedly, doctiùs more learnedly, doctissimè most learnedly; fortiter strongly, fortiùs more strongly, fortissimè most strongly.  
Likewise Been well, meliùs better, optimè very well; Saepe often, saepius more often, saepissimè very often; nuper lately, nuperrimè very lately with many others.  
Sometimes Adjectives of the Neuter Gender, take upon them the nature of Adverbs, in imitation of the Greeks; as, Recèns for recenter newly, Toruùm for toruè frowningly.   

Chap. 41. Of a Conjunction.  
VI A Conjunction conjoineth words and sentences. Its kinds according to signification are 17. According to its Order four.  
A CONjUNCTION is a part of Speech which fitly joineth words and sentences together.  
According to their signification some be Copulatives, which couple both the sens and the words; as, Et and, que and, nec nor. Suspensives, which stay the speech, or make another thing to be expected; as, Cùm both, tum both, & both, vel either, nec neither. Disjunctives, which sever the sens and couple the words; as, Aut or, sieve or, vel or. Causals, which give the reason of the former sentence; as, Name for, enim for, quia because. Discretives, which make a difference; as, Said but, verò but, at but. Conditionals, which imply a condition; as, Si if, sin but if, nisi except, dumb so that. Exceptives, which except some thing; as, Ni unless, nisi except, quin but, alioquin otherwise. Interrogatives, which ask a question; as, Nè whether, an whether, utrùm whether. Dubitatives, which propound a doubt; as, a whether or no, num whether or no, nunquid what. Rationals, or Illatives, which infer the conclusion from the reason set down; as, Ergò therefore, ideo therefore, itaque therefore. Continuatives, which continue the members of a speech in order; as, Deinde after, porrò furthermore, proinde thereupon, insuper moreover. Concessives, or Adversatives, which grant somewhat which the following sentence may oppose; as Etsi although, quanquam although, licèt though, tametsi although, quamvis although. Redditives to the same, which being referred to their Concessives, make a sentence divers from the former; as Tamen yet, attamen but yet, verùm but, veruntamen yet notwithstanding. Electives, which show the former member of the sentence to be preferred; as, Quàm as, ac as, atque as. Diminutives, which lessen the sens; as, saltem at least, vel even. Expletives, or Completives, which fill up a sentence for ornament's sake; as, Quidem, indeed, autem and, scilicet forsooth, enimvero truly. Conjunctions adverbial, or Adverbs conjunctive, which with a very little difference are discerned from Adverbs; as, Quando when, or seeing that, proinde therefore, or then. According to their Order some be Prepositives, which are set in the beginning of sentences; as, Name for, quare, wherefore, at but. Subjunctives, or Postpositives, which have the second, third, or fourth place in a claus, as, Quidem indeed, quoque also, verò indeed, enim for. Commons, which may indifferently be set before or after; as, Ergò therefore, igitur therefore, itaque therefore, sed but. Encliticals, or Inclinatives, which are annexed to the former word, and incline or turn back their accent into the last syllable of it; as, Que, nè, ve, dum, sis, nam.   

Chap. 42. Of a Preposition.  
VII. A Preposition is set before other words. There be 54 Prepositions, some of which are 1 Separable. 2. Others Inseparable  
A PREPOSITION is a part of Speech which is set before other words,  
either in Apposition; as, Ad scholam to the school. Composition; as, Advenio to come to. Prepositions are either 1. Separable. Or, 2. Inseparable.  
Separable Prepositions are used both in and out of Composition; of whose regiment we shall treat, LIB. 3. CAP. 8.  
For thirty one of these govern an Accusative case, viz.  
Ad to.  Erga towards. Praeter besides. Apud at.  Extra without. Propter because of. Adversùs against. Infra below. Secundùm according to. Adversùm Inter between. Ante before.  Intra within. Secus by. Cis on this side. Juxta by. Supra above. Citra Ob for. Trans beyond. Circum about. Penès in the power. Versùs towards. Circa Per by. Vltra beyond. Circiter Ponè behind.  Contra against.  Post after.   

Which some have comprised in these four Verses. 

Ad, penès, adversùs, cis, citra, circiter, extra,  
Erga, apud, ante, secus, trans, supra, versùs, ob, intra,  
Vltra, post, praeter, propter, prope, ponè, secundùm,  
Per, circum, circa, contra, juxta, inter, & intra,    
And twelv govern an Ablative case, viz. A, ab, abs, from; absque without, coram before, cum with, de, è, ex of, prae before, pro for, sine without.   
Five govern both these cases; viz. Clam privily, in in, sub, & subter under, super above; only tenus up to, will have an Ablative case singular, and Genitive plural.  
Inseparable Prepositions are such as are never found without Composition, viz.  
Am, as Ambio, to go about. Di, Diduco, to go aside. Dis, Distraho, to distract Re, as Recipio to recciv. See, Sepono to set aside. Con, Convivo to live together. We, Vesanus outrageous.  
The signification of Prepositions is not so much to be learned by rules, as by daily use of reading and writing.  
Some Prepositions are wont to be set after their cases; viz. Come, as quibuscum with whom; tenus, as pube tenus up to the thin; versùs, as Londinum versùs towards London; to which usque may be added, as ad Orientem usque as far as the East.  
Prepositions when they be put without a case become Adverbs; as, Coràm laudare, clàm vituperare, to prais one in presence, and disprais privily.  
Some Adverbs, Conjunctions, and Prepositions according to their several signification are judged sometimes Prepositions, sometimes Adverbs, and sometimes Conjunctions.  
Some Prepositions do make Adjectives of the Comparative and Superlative degree, as in Chap. 17. l2.   

Chap. 43. Of an Interjection.  
VIII. An Interjection is put in amongst other words.  
AN Interjection is a part of Speech interposed among others, which signifieth a passion of the mind suddenly breaking forth.  
There be so many Interjections then as there are motions of a troubled mind, viz. of  

Rejoicing; as, Evax hay brave, vah how, io O fine.  
Sorrowing; as, Heu alas, hei, hoi welladay, o, oh ah.  
Dreading; as, Atat out alas.  
marveling; as, Papae O strange!  
Disdaining; as, Him oh, vah away with it.  
Shunning; as, Apage abant, apagite be gone.  
Calling; as, Eho, how, ho, io so ho.  
Praising; as, Euge weldon, eja aha.  
Scorning; as, Hui who.  
Exclaiming; as, Proh O.  
Cursing; as, Malùm a mischief, vae malùm woe with a mischief.  
Disliking; as, Fie out upon it.  
Threatening; as, Vae wo.  
Laughing; as, Ha', ha', he.  
Silence; as, Au ' saint, wished, Pax peace.   
Sometimes Nouns, Verbs, and other words are put into a Speech in manner of Interjections; as, Infandùm not to be spoken, Amabò of all loves, or as thou lovest me, Malùm a mischief, mirabile dictu wonderful to be said. etc.     

LIB. III. OF SYNTAX.  
Syntax teacheth the due joining of words, By rules,  
SYNTAX, or Construction, is the third part of Grammar, which teacheth the due joining of words together.  
And that is the due joining of words which the most approved among the ancients have used both in writing and speaking.  
There be two parts of Syntax, Concordance, & CHAP. 1 Government, CHAP. 2.  

Chap. 1. Of Concordance.  
1. Of Concordance.  
COncordance is the construction of words according to their agreement in some of the things that belong unto them.  
There be three Concord's, The first between the Nominative case and the Verb. §. I. The second between the Substantive and the Adjective. §. II. The third between the Antecedent and the Relative. §. III. To which may be added the Rules Of the case of the Relative. §. iv Of the word that asketh, and the word that answereth to the question. §. V  

§. I. The Rule of the first Concord.  
A Verb Personal agreeth with its Nominative case in Number and Person; as,  

The Master readeth, and ye neglect.  
Whilst the cat sleepeth, the mice dance.   
1. Obs. The Nominative case of the first or second person is very seldom set down; as,  
Without God (we) can do nothing.  
1. Exc. Unless it be for differencing sake, i. e. when we signify several emploinients; as,  
Thou playest, I ply my book.  
2. Exc. Or for Emphasis sake, i. e. when we mean more than we speak expressly; as,  
Thou art our Patron, thou art our Father, if thou forsakest us, we are undone.  
2. Obs. The Verb Substantive is very often understood; as, There (is) no safety in War.  
Such a Master, such a man.  
3. Obs. Oft-times other Verbs (also) are understood; as, (* To prick out) the raven's eyes.  
The sow († will return) to the mire.   

§. II. The Rule of the second Concord.  
THe Adjective agreeth with its Substantive in case, gender, and number; as,  
True faith is a rare bird in the earth, and very like to a black swan.  
An hasty bitch bringeth forth blind whelps.  
1. Obs. An Adjective put like a Substantive doth supply the place of a Substantive; as,  

A learned poor man is better than an unlearned rich man.  
All evil things are to be avoided.  
A good man is a common good.    

§. III. The Rule of the third Concord.  
3. The third.  
THe Relative (qui) agreeth with its Antecedent in gender, number, and person; as,  

The man is wise that speaketh few words.  
The first hour that gave life, took from it.  
The burden is made light, which is well born.   
N. B. The Antecedent (most commonly) is a word that goeth before the Relative, and is rehearsed again of the Relative.  
The Nominative case, the Substantive, and the Antecedent be called Supposites, because in Concordance they be (as it were) put under the Verb, Adjective, and Relative (which also by some are called Apposites) and bear them up. hence  
1. Obs. In speeches which belong only to men, the Supposite is often understood; as,  

Thus (men) say commonly.  
Good (boys) learn diligently.  
A good (woman) come of good parents.  
He) that maketh too much haste, dispatcheth too late.  
(Things) which hurt us teach us.   
2. Obs. Sometimes a whole claus, a member of a sentence, a Verb of the Infinitive mood, an Adverb with a Genitive case, or a word put for itself, do supply the place of Supposites; as,  

To-have-faithfully-learned-the-Liberal-Arts, doth qualify men's manners.  
To-rise-early is very wholesome.  
Part of the ensigns are burnt.  
I-came-in-season, which is the chiefest of all things.  
Farewell being often said, I again spoke many words.   
3. Obs. The Supposite sometimes agreeth with the Verb, or Adjective, or Relative in since rather then words, as;  

A company rush. Both are deluded, or mocked.  
An armed Nation fight.  
Where is that rogue that hath undone me?   
4. Obs. A Verb, Adjective, or Relative set between two Supposites of divers numbers or genders may agree with either of them. as.  

The falling out of lovers is the renewing of love.  
Poverty seemed a great burden.  
A living-creature full of reason, whom we call a man.  
A bird which is called a sparrow.  
The City Lutetia which we call Paris.   
5. Obs. Many Supposites Singular having a Conjunction Copulative between them, will have a Verb, Adjective, or Relative plural, and these will agree with the more worthy supposite: as.  

I and thou, who ply our books diligently are in safety.  
Thou and he, who sit so negligent, take heed you be not whipped.   
N. B. The worthiness of a Supposite is considered according to its 1 Gender; or, 2 Person.  
1 The first Person is more worthy than the Second, or third, & the second more worthy than the third.  
2. The Masculine Gender is more worthy than the Feminine, or Neuter; and the feminine is more worthy than the Neuter.  
Excep. But in things not apparent to have life the Neuter Gender is more worthy, as,  

The Bows and the Arrows are good.  
Thy rod and thy staff, (these) have comforted me.   
6. Obs. When the Verb or Adjective answereth to many supposites it agreeth expressly with that which is nearest to it, and with the rest by supplying it, as,  

Thou liest where I (lie,) thou suppest when we (sup).  
The husband and the wife is angry.   
Exc. Yet when there is a comparison or likeness, the Verb or Adjective agreeth with the Supposite which is further from it; as,  

I writ better than thou (writest).  
God's law is sweet, as honey (is sweet).   
7. Obs. A Pronoun Primitive seems to be included or understood in a Possessive, and therefore the Relative or Adjective do oft agree with such a Primitive; as,  

It concerneth not me, who am the eldest.  
Seeing no body readeth my writings fearing to recite them publicly.    

§. IV The Rule concerning the case of the Relative.  
To which add, 4. The case of the Re-lative.  
WHen there cometh no Nominative case between the Relative and the Verb, the Relative shall be the Nominative case to the verb; as,  
He that bewareth not afore, shall be sorry afterward. That which (is) rare, (is) dear.  
He may easily find a stick, who desire's to beat a dog.  
But if there doth come a Nominative case between the Relative and the Verb, the Relative shall be governed of the Verb, or of some other word in the same sentence; as,  

Oft-times thou mayst conquer by patience, whom thou canst not conquer by force.  
If (thou) canst not do what (thou) wouldst; will that, which (thou) mayest do.  
Whose shadow I reverence.  
Like to whom I have not seen.   
1. Obs. As the Relative may be the Nominative case to the Verb, so it may be the Substantive to an Adjective; as,  

He that rejoiceth at other men's evils is twice wretched.  
Happy is he, whom other men's harms make wary.   
2. Obs. Nouns Interrogatives and Indefinites do follow the rule of the Relative, which evermore go before the Verb, like as the Relative doth; as,  What an one was he? He was such an one as I never saw.  

§. V The rule of the Question and Answer.  
5: Of the Question and Answer.  
WHen a question is asked, the answer must be made by the same case and ten that the question is asked by; as,  
What do ye? We ply our books.  
Who is rich? He that desireth nothing. Who is poor? The covetous man. What is now adoing in England? They consult about Religion.  
1. Obs. This rule faileth when the divers nature of words requireth divers cases; viz.  
1. When a question is made by Cujus, ja, jum; as, Whose cattle are these? Egon's.  
2. Or by a word that may govern divers cases; as,  

Is he accused of theft? or of murder? Of both.  
What cost it? A penny.   
3. When one may answer by a Possessive; as,  

Whose book is this? Mine.  
Whose house is this? My Father's.     

Chap. 2. Of the Government of Nouns.  
2. Of Construction. 1. Of Nouns.  
GOvernment is the Construction of words, according to which every aforegoing word governeth a certain case or mood of the word which followeth it.  
Government is Of Nouns, Chap. 2. Of Pronouns, Chap. 3. Of Verbs, Chap. 4. Of Participles, Chap. 5. Of Adverbs, Chap. 6. Of Conjunctions, Chap. 7. Of Prepositions, Chap. 8. Of Interjections, Chap. 9  
For all parts of Speech govern cases except a Conjunction, which yet will have certain moods and tenses.  
Nouns govern four cases: A Genitive, §. VI A Dative, §. VII. An Accusative, §. VIII. An Ablative, §. IX.  

§. VI The rule of Nouns governing a Genitive case.  
6. With a Genitive case.  
THese are they that govern a Genitive case.  
I Substantives: For when two Substantives come together betokening divers things, the later shall be the Genitive case; as,  

The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom.  
God's word remaineth for ever.   
1. Obs. But if two or more Substantives belong to one thing, they shall be put in the same case; as,  

My father being a man loveth me a child.  
Mark Tully Cicero the Prince of Orators.   
2. Obs. The Genitive case of the owner is often changed into an Adjective Possessive; as,  

My father's house.  
My master's son.   
3. Obs. The former Substantive is sometimes understood by an Ellipsis or defect of a word; as,  

To 
* Church.  St Mary's.  
I saw this man's 
† Servant.  Byrrhia.  
The third 
* Day.  of the Kalends.   
4. An Adiective of the Neuter gender being put for a Substantive will have a Genitive case; as,  

As much money as any man keep's in his chest, so much credit he hath.  
We do not see that (end) of the wallet which is on the back.   
So also will others after the Greek fashion; as,  

Black wool will take no die.  
Sneaking dogs clap the tail under the belly.   
5. Words importing any quality to the prais or disprais of a thing, coming after a Noun or Verb Substantive, shall be put in the Ablative or Genitive case; as,  

A child of an ingenuous look, and ingenuous blush.  
Every basest fellow is of a most lavish tongue.   
6. Opus and Vsus when they be Latin for need, will have an Ablative case; as,  

What need words?  
He hath need of twenty pounds.   
But Opus necessary, admit's of divers cases; as,  

A guide is necessary for us.  
Get such things as are necessary for you.   
II. Adjectives that signify desire, knowledge, remembrance, care, fear, or such like passion of the mind; as, The nature of man is eager of news.  

The mind is foresighted of that which is to come.  
Live mindful of death. Fearful of a storm.  
Ignorant of learning.   
III. Adjectives derived of Verbs that end in axe; as, Virtue is an abandoners of vices.  
Time is a consumer of things.  
IV. Nouns Partitives; as, Some of you.  
Take whether of these thou wilt.  
V Nouns being put partitively; viz. having after them this english of or among; such as are,  
1. Certain Interrogatives; as, Which of the brethren? Is there any among men so miserable as I am.  
2. Certain nouns of Number; viz. Cardinals and Ordinals; as, Four of the Judges.  
It is not yet apparent who was the eighth of the wise men.  
3. Nouns of the Comparative and Superlative degree; as,  
Of the hands the right is the stronger.  
The middle finger is the longest among the fingers.  
1. Obs. Yet these in another sens will have an Ablative case; as,  
The first from Hercules. The third from Aeneas.  
2. And in another since a Dative; as,  
Second to none in godliness.  
3. They are used also with the Prepositions by which their Genitive case is explained; as,  
One of you is a god. One alone of a great many.  
The chief amongst all.  
VI Besides a great company of other Adjectives, (viz. Compos, reus, exsors, particeps, and the like) which may better be learned by frequent reading; as,  
Able to perform his vow. Accused of theft. Exempted from all fault. Partaking of his counsel.  
Touching which see LINACER'S or DISPAUTER'S Grammars.   

§. VII. The rule of Nouns governing a Dative case.  
7. A Dative.  
THese govern a Dative case.  
I. Adjectives that betoken  
1. Profit or Disprofit; as,  

O be good and favourable to thine own.  
Fit for the Country, profitable for the field.  
A rout grievous to the peace, and enemy to gentle rest.   
2. Likeness or Unlikeness; as,  

A Poet is very near to an Orator. Equal to Hector.  
Disagreeing to the truth.   
3. Pleasure; as, Pleasant to all persons.  
4. Submitting; as, Beseeching his father.  
5. Belonging to any thing; as,  

Idleness will be troublesome to thee.  
There is no way unpassable for virtue.   
6. Hitherto are referred nouns compounded with Con; as, Cognatus mihi, a kin to me.  
1. Obs. Yet some of these which signify Likeness may have a Genitive case; as,  

Thou art like thy Master.  
He was equal to this man. Partaker of the roguery.   
2. Obs. Communis, alienus, immunis, proprius, conscius, and superstes will have divers cases; as,  

Common to all living creatures.  
Death is common to all men.  
This is common betwixt me and thee.  
Unmeet for the purpose. Far from ambition.  
Estranged from Scevola's studies.  
Free from this evil. Free to all.  
We are free from those evils.  
It's proper to fools. Proper to me.  
I am guilty to myself of no fault.  
He was privy to the prank.  
He outlived his honour.  
That surviveth other things.   
3. Obs. Natus, commodus, incommodus, utilis, inutilis, vehemens, aptus, ineptus, par, aequalis, will have sometimes an Accusative case with a Preposition; as,  

Born to glory. Shoes fit for the feet.  
A man good of no side.  
Virtues are equal and even amongst themselves.   
II. Nouns Adjectives derived of Verbs, and of the Passive signification in bilis; as,  

He is dead, being to be lamented of all good men.  
And more to be lamented by none then thee.    

§. VIII. The Rule of Nouns that govern an Accusative case.  
ADjectives govern an Accusative which signify the measure of length, breadth, or thickness of any thing; as, A foot high. An hand broad.  
Three fingers thick. Seven foot long.  
But they sometimes also govern A Genitive case; as, Borders ten foot broad. An Ablative; as, A Well three foot wide.   

§. IX. The Rule of Nouns governing an Ablative case.  
I. THese govern an Ablative case.  
1 Nouns, and Adverbs of the Comparative degree having then, by, or in after them; as,  

Silver is base than gold, and gold than virtue.  
No Theatre to truth is greater than Conscience.  
Higher by a foot. To excel in strength.   
1. Obs. Tantò, quantò, multò, paulò, nimiò, eò, quò, hoc, aetate, natu, are joined to both degrees of comparison; as,  

He is far more skilful than the rest, but not much better.  
By how much one is less learned, by so much he is more impudent. The greatest in age, i. e. The eldest.  
The less by birth, i. e. The youngest.   
II. These Adjectives dignus, indignus, praeditus, captus, contentus, extorris, fretus; as,  

Thou art worthy of hatred.  
Vnbefitting the gravity of a wiseman.  
Endued with every virtue. Deprived of eyes.  
Get thee hence, content with thy condition.  
Banished from his own house. Trusting to thy clemency.   
1. Obs. But dignus, and indignus will have sometimes a Genitive case; as, A warfare worth thy labour.  
Not unworthy of his great Ancestors.  
III. Nouns of Diversity will have an Ablative case with a Preposition; as, Another thing from this. Another man from him.  
And sometimes a Dative, as, Different from this thing.  
IV. Adjectives and Verbs that signify plenty or want will have an Ablative, and sometimes a Genitive case; as, Love is very full both of honey and gall.  

Love is a thing full of thoughtsom fear.  
Thou aboundest in love. Thou wantest virtue.  
Rich in white cattle. Rich in grounds.  
Void of guile. Blessed with grace.  
Go on or increase in virtue. Upright in life.   
1: Obs. Some of these will have also an Ablative case with a Preposition; as, Void of anger.  
V Any Adjective or Verb will have an Ablative case,  
1. Of the Instrument; as, Stout at the sword.  
Better at Oars. JESUS vanquished the Devil, not with arms, but with death.  
2. Of the Caus; as, Pale with anger. Worse for too much liberty.  
3. Of the Circumstance or manner of doing of the thing; as,  

An envious man groweth lean at the prosperity of another. By name a Grammarian, but indeed a Barbarian. A Trojane by birth, a Syrian by nation.  
Crooked old age will come by and by with a still pace   
1. Obs: But sometimes the Ablative case of the cause or manner of doing will have a Preposition, as,  

Vnprovided of money.  
He used the man with a great deal of courtesy.   
VI Adjectives and Verbs of buying and selling will have an Ablative case of the price, as,  

Cheap at twenty pounds. Dear at a farthing.  
Not to be sold for pearls, or purple, or gold.  
That victory cost much blood, and many wounds.  
He taught for wages. Wheat is sold at a low rate.  
To hire for a penny. To let for a shilling.  
He lives at ten pounds rend.   
1. Obs. Yet these words, when they are without Substantives, are put after Verbs in the Genitive case; viz. Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, as,  

I sell not for more than others, but for less.  
Things are so much worth as they may be sold for.   
N. B. A Noun or Pronoun Substantive, joined with a Participle, expressed or understood, and having no other word whereof it may be governed, shall be put in the Ablative case absolute; as,  

The King coming the enemies ran away i, e. When  
the King comes. I being Captain.  
And it may be resolved by whilst, when, if, etc.   
VII. Adjectives, and Verbs Passives and Neuters that signify some property or passion, will have an Accusative case, or Ablative, signifying the part or place wherein the property or passion is; as,  

He is diseased in his feet. He is sick in mind rather than in body.  
He hath red hair. Red-haired.   
1. Obs. But the part affected is sometimes put in the Genitive case; as, O thou! that hast an happy wit.  
Thou troublest thyself in mind.  
2. Obs. These be Greek phrases:  
Merry as concerning other things. Like in other things. Like him both in speech and colour.    

Chap. 3. Of the government of Pronouns.  
2. Of Pronouns.  
THese Genitive cases of the Primitives Meî, tuî, suî, nostrî and vestrî be used when suffering or passion is signified, but Meus, tuus, suus, noster and vester bee used when action or possession is signified, as, Part of thee. Thy part. The image of us. Our image. The love of himself. His own love. (i. e.) of me.  
1. Obs. Possessives are sometimes put for Primitives, as, He did it for my sake.  
2. Obs: Nostrûm and vestrûm be used after distributives, Partitives, Comparatives and Superlatives, as, Some of you. The bigger of you. The eldest of us.  
3. Obs: Meus, tuus, suus, noster vester, will have certain genitive cases after them, viz. Ipsius, solius, unius duorum, trium, etc. omnium, plurium, paucorum, and the genitives of participles which are referred to the Primitive understood in the Possessive, as,  

Thou shalt guests out of thine own mind.  
Thou hast seen the eyes of me weeping.   
II. Ipse and idem may be joined to all persons.  

I myself will see. Thou thyself go on to do it.  
Plato himself said. He himself did it.   
Idem governeth sometimes a Dative case, as,  

He that saveth a man against his will, doth the same as he that kill's him.  
But more commonly an Ablative case with a Preposition, as. The same with it.   
III. Ille noteth the eminency or worth of a thing; and Iste the baseness or contempt of it, as, That brave Alexander the great. That mean fellow.  
Hic is for the most part referred to the later Antecedent, and the nearer to its self; ille to the former, and the further from it, as,  

The husbandman's aim is contrary to the shepard's;  
he looks for profit from his land; and he from his stock of cattle.    

Chap. 4. Of the government of Verbs.  
VErbs go vern a Nominative Case, §. X. Genitive §. XI. Dative §. XII. Accusative §. XIII. Ablative §. XIV. To which also belong the Rules Of such as have a divers construction. §. XV. Of the Infinitive mood, of the Gerunds, and Supines. §. XVI. Of time, space and place. §. XVII. Of Verbs Impersonals. §. XVIII.  

§. X. The Rule of Verbs governing a Nominative Case.  
3. Of Verbs with 1. A Nominative.  
VErbs Substantives, certain passives, and Verbs of gesture will have a Nominative case after them as well as before them, as,  

God is the chiefest good.  
Faith is accounted the foundation of our Religion.  
An evil shepherd sleepeth void of care.  
He will become a learned man.   
1. Obs: All manner of Verbs (almost) will have after them a Nominative case of the Noun Adjective, that agreeth with the Nominative case of the Verb, in case, Gender. & Number, as,  

The earth remaineth unmoveable. I writ very seldom.  
Good boys learn diligently. I speak often.    

§. XI. The Rule of Verbs governing a Genitive Case.  
2. A Genitive.  
THese Verbs govern a Genitive case:  
I. Sum, when it betokeneth possession, or, otherwise pertaining to a thing, as a property or duty, as, This house is my father's house.  

It is (the duty) of a young man to reverence his elders.  
It is the property of a good shepherd to shear his sheep, not to pill them.   
1. Obs: But some Adjectives as meum, tuum, humanum, etc. are put in the Nominative case where officium or munus (a duty) seems to be understood, as, by an Ellipsis.  

It is not my duty to speak against the Authority of the Senate.  
It is incident to a man to be angry. It is a beastly part to rage.  
It is a Kingly part to do well.   
II. Verbs that betoken to esteem or regard, as,  

Honesty is reckoned little worth.  
Money is every where much regarded:  
I care not this for thee, who valuest me but an hair.  
I take it in good part.   
1. Obs. But aestimo will have an Ablative case; as,  

Virtue is much to be esteemed.  
He valued it at threepences.   
2. Obs. Valeo will have a Genitive, an Accusative, or an Ablative case; as, It is so much worth.  
It is worth two farthings.  
3. Obs. We say also, I account, or esteem it as nothing.  
III. Verbs of accusing, condemning, warning, or acquitting, will have a Genitive case of the crime or punishment; as, It behooveth him to look to himself, that accuseth another of dishonesty.  
They condemned most innocent Socrates to lose his life.  

He admonished me of a mistake.  
He is acquitted of theft.   
1. Obs. And this Genitive case is turned sometimes into an ablative, either with, or without a preposition; as, I will condemn thee of the same fault.  

Is he accused of theft, or dishonesty? Of both.  
I thought that thou wert to be admonished of that matter.   
iv Satago, misereor, and miseresco; as,  

He is busy about his own matters. Pity the pains.  
Pity thine own stock.   
1. Obs. But misereor and miseresco, are sometimes read with a Dative case; as,  
Pity this man. Have compassion on the bad.  
V Reminiscor, obliviscor, and memini; as,  

He remembreth his promise. It is the property of fools to see other men's faults and forget their own.  
I will make thee to remember me always.   
1. Obs. And these will have also an Accusative case; as, I remember my lesson. I forget the song.  
VI Some also, after the manner of the Greeks, will have a Genitive case; as,  

Ceastheir womanish complaints.  
It is time to give over the fight.  
He is worthy of all mischief, that blusheth at his Fortune.    

§. XII. Of Verbs governing a Dative case.  
3. Dative.  
ALl manner of Verbs put acquisitively, i. e. which are known commonly by these tokens to or for after them will have a Dative case, as,  

I have it for this man and not for thee.  
I sleep not to all men. Neither is there sowing nor mowing for me there.  
And to this rule do also belong Verbs that betoken,   
1. To profit or disprofit, as,  

It cannot profit or disprofit me.  
He hurteth the good, who spareth the bad.   
2. To compare, as,  

To compare great things with small.  
He made himself equal to his Brother.   
1. Obs: But these will have sometimes an Accusative or an Ablative case with a Preposition, as,  

If he be compared to him he is nothing.  
I compare Virgil with Homer.   
3. To give or to restore, as,  

Fortune hath given too much to many, enough to none.  
He is ungrateful that requite's not a favour to him that deserveth it.   
4. To promise or pay, as,  

I promise thee these things.  
He hath paid the debt unto me.   
5. To command or to show, as,  

Money hoarded up commandeth or serveth everieibodie.  
Take heed oftimes, what thou sayest of any body, and to whom.   
6. To trust, as, Beleiv not a woman, no though she seem dead. I commit this to thy trust.  
7. To Obey, or to be against; as,  

A dutiful son always obeyeth his father.  
Fortune resisteth sluggish prayers.   
8. To threaten or to be angry with; as,  

He threatened death to them both.  
I am angry with thee.   
9 Sum, with its Compounds, except possum; as,  

He is a father to the city, and a husband to the city.  
Many things are wanting to them that desire many things.   
1. Obs. Likewise Sum and Suppetit signifying to have; as,  

Every man hath his own liking.  
We have mellow apples.  
He is not poor, who hath the use of things.   
2. Obs. Sum, with many others will have a double Dative case; as,  

The sea is a destruction to greedy seamen.  
A godly King is an ornament to the Commonwealth.  
Thou hopest it will be a prais to thee, which thou imputest as a fault to me.   
13. Verbs compounded with the Adverbs, Satis, bene, malè, and the Prepositions, Prae, ad, con, sub, ante, post, in, and inter; as,  

He hath done good to many, he hath done ill to none.  
I prefer no man before thee.  
A new relator addeth something to things he hath heard.   
1. Obs. A few of these sometimes change their Dative case into another case; as;  

One man excelleth another in wit.  
I forbidden thee fire und water.   
2. Obs. But Praeeo, praecedo, praecurro, with some other Compounds of prae, will have rather an Accusative case; as, Thou shalt go before me.  
3. Obs. There is ofttimes a Pleonasm or redundance of the Dative cases, Mihi, tibi, sibi; as,  
I Slay this man with his own sword.  
N. B. Sometimes a Dative case is put figuratively in stead of an Accusative or Ablative with a Preposition: and of some it is called the eighth case; as,  
The cry goeth unto heaven. Keep the heat from the cattle.   

§. XIII. The rule of Verbs governing an Accusative case.  
4. Accusative.  
VErbs Transitives, are all such as have after them an Accusative case of the doer or sufferer as, Fear God. Honour the King.  

It's a son's duty to reverence his parents.  
The fierce lioness followeth the wolf, and the wolf the kid.   
1. Obs. Verbs absolute may have an Accusative case of their own signification, and sometimes an Ablative; as, I live a life. To live a life long.  
Thou sleepest Endimion's sleep. They rejoiced with exceeding great joy. To go a long way. To go the right way. He died a sudden death.  
2. Obs. Some verbs will have an Accusative case figuratively; as, He smell's like a goat. The voice sound's like a man. He offends in the same thing.  
They sergeant sober men, and live riotously.  
3. Verbs of Ask, teaching, and arraying, will have two Accusative cases, one of the Person, and another of the Thing; as,  

Do thou only ask God leave ..  
Hunger teacheth a man many things.  
He put on his shoes which he had first put off.   
4. But some of these sometimes change the one Accusative case into the Dative or Ablative, with, or without a Preposition; as, I put on thy coat, or,  
I put thy coat on thee. He informeth the Senate of his journey. Let us entreat leave of him.   

§. XIV. The rule of Verbs governing an Ablative case.  
5. Ablative  
THese govern an Ablative case. Concerning which we have spoken afore in the Regiment of Nouns. I. All Verbs, so that the Ablative case be 1. Of the Instrument. 2. Of the Caus. 3. Of the Manner of doing. II. Verbs of Price. III. Verbs that signify some property or passion: IV. Verbs of plenty or scarceness.  
V Some certain Deponents and Neuters, viz.  
Fungor, as They that would get true glory, must discharge the duties of Justice. Fruor, It is the best to make use of another's madness. Vtor, It helpeth in a bad matter, if thou canst use a good courage. Vescor, I eat flesh. Nitor, I trust to my strength. It becometh one to rely on his virtue, not his blood. Dignor, I think not myself worthy of such honour. Prosequor I pursue thee with love, i. e. I love thee. Muto, He changeth square things for round. Munero, He rewarded him with the fellowship of his Kingdom. Supersedeo, We must leave off the multitude of examples. Communico, I will give thee allowance at my table. Afficio, I affect thee with joie, or, I make thee glad, with some few others.  
VI Verbs of Comparing or exceeding; as,  

I prefer this man by many degrees.  
He is beyond him but a little space.  
It is unseemly to be overcome in virtue by those whom thou excellest in eminency of place.   
7. Verbs that betoken Receiving, distance, or taking away, will have an Ablative case with a Preposition; as, I heard it of a many. It is far distant from us. I delivered thee from the evils.  
1. Obs. And this Ablative may be turned into the Dative; as, He took his life from him.  
VIII. Mereor will have an Ablative case with the Preposition De; as, Thou never deservedst well of me.  
Catiline deserved very ill of the Commonwealth.  
IX. Verbs Passives will have after them an Ablative case with a Preposition, and sometimes a Dative; as, Virgil is read of me. A boar is ofttimes held by a little dog. Honest things, not hidden things are desired of good men.  
1. Obs. The other cases remain in the Passives which belonged to their Actives; as,  

Thou are accused by me of theft.  
Thou shalt be made a mocking-stock.   
2. Obs. Vapulo, vaeneo, liceo, exulo, and fio do follow the construction of Passives, i. e. they govern an Ablative case with a Preposition, or a Dative; as,  

Thou shalt be whipped by the master. I had rather be spoiled by a citizen, then sold by an enemy.  
What will become of him? Virtue is cheapened by all at a low rate. Why is Philosophy banished from banquets.    

§. XV. The rule of Verbs having divers Constructions.  
With a divers Construction.  
I. The same verb may have divers cases in a several respect or consideration, as,  
He gave me his garment for a pawn, Thou being present, with his own hand.  
II. These Verbs have a divers construction  

1. In the same signification, a., 

1. I flatter thee.  
2. He bespotted me.  
3. I harken to thee.  
4. I agree with thee.  
5. I descent from thee.  
6. I bestow a book on thee.  
7. I mock thee.  
8. I bestow my means on thee.  
9 I put on thy coat.  
10. He spread his cloak on the horse.  
11. I forbidden thee this thing.  
12. I cure 

my son  
that disease.    
13. I moderate my affection.  
14. I deprave thee.  
15. I tarry for thee.  
16. I forbidden thee the house.  
17. I go into the house.    
2. In different signification, as, 

1. I assent to thee. Icom  
2. I envy thee. I imitate  
3. I obey thee. I hear  
4. 

I see to thee.  
I avoid thee.  
I make a caution, or I am careful for thee.    
5. 

I give place to thee.  
I go out of the City.  
Give me a book.    
6. 

I advise, or look to thee.  
I ask advice of thee.  
I resolve concerning thee.    
7. 

It happeneth to me.  
It toucheth me.    
8. 

I favour thee.  
I desire thee.    
9 

It is wanting to me.  
He faileth me.  
He revolteth from me.    
10. 

I give, or send  
letters to thee 

to carry to  
one. to read.      
11. 

I lend thee on usury.  
I borrow of thee on usury    
12. 

I am sick of a Fever.  
I take pains for the public safety.    
13. 

I am careful for thee.  
I am afraid of thee.    
14. 

I remember thee.  
I spoke of thee.    
15. 

I conquer the city.  
I obtain my desire.    
16. 

I promise you.  
I entertain you.  
I betake myself home.    
17. 

I report it to you.  
I propound it to you.    
18. 

I refuse a gift.  
I declare him Consul.    
19 

I pay thee.  
I free thee.    
20. 

I endeavour this.  
I desire this.    
22. 

I labour about trifles.  
I have leisure for trifles.  
I am void of blame.  
The place is empty.       
Use will teach the rest.   

§. XVI. The Rule of the Infinitive mood.  
Of the Infinitive mood.  
VErbs of the Infinitive mood are put after Verbs or Adjectives, as,  

Ponticus wilt thou be made rich? Thou must desire nothing.  
And he was worthyto be loved.  
Bold to endure all things. Enduring to be called.   
1. Obs. They have an Accusative case before them in stead of a Nominative as, I bid thee to go hence.  
I bid thee be in good health.  
Which may be resolved by that, as; I bid that thou go hence. I am glad that thou art in good health.  
2. Obs. They have like cases before and after them; as, An Hypocrite desireth to seem just.  
Nature hath granted to all men to be happy, If any knew how to use it.  
3. Obs. They are sometimes put absolutely by an Ellipsis, as,  
That these villainies should be committed. i e. It is fit.  
The Lamb trembled. i e. Begun to tremble.   

§. XVII. The Rule of the Gerunds.  
Of the Gerunds. Di. Do. Dum  
GErunds and Supines will have such a case as the Verbs that they come of, as,  
We must use age. To hear a sermon.  
And they are as it were Nouns of both Numbers  
These in Diego of the Genitive Case Dum Accusative Do Ablative as, An occasion of studying. Fit to study. Weary with studying.  
Hence is it that,  
1. The Gerund Diego may be used after certain Substantives and Adjectives; as,  

There is no place for telling.  
The wicked love of having.  
Certain of going. Skilful in darting.  
For the cause of seeing them. Leave of snatching apples.   
1. The Infinitive mood is sometimes put in stead of this Gerund; as, Skilful to heal.  
2. Gerunds in Do be used with one of these Prepopositions; A, ab, abs, de, è, ex, cum, in pro; as,  

Idle boys are quickly frighted from learning.  
The manner of right writing is joined with speaking.   
Obs. Sometimes they are used without a Preposition; as, We learn by teaching.  
3. The Gerund in Dum is used after one of these Prepositions, Inter, ante, ad, ob, propter; as,  

In supper while be merry.  
Christ died to redeem us.   
1. Obs. When you have this English must or ought it may be put in the Gerund in Dum, with the Verb est, and a Dative case expressed or understood; as,  
I must go hence. We ought to pray that there may be a sound mind in a sound body.  
N. B. Gerunds are often turned into Participials in Dus, which agree with their Substantives; as,  

In reading old Autors thou shalt profit.  
It it the next to theft to be drawn on by a reward to accuse men.    

§. XVIII The Rule of Supines.  
Of the Supines.  
Um.  
THe first Supine is put after Verbs, and Participles that betoken moving to a place; as,  
They come to look on. Why goest thou about to undo thyself.  
1 Obs. But these have a motion scarce discernible; I set to sale. I bestow my daughter to be married.  
2. The Poets say, I go to visit. I go to see.  
3. This Supine is put absolutely with the Verb est; It is done.  
II. The later Supine is put after Nouns Adjectives; U. as, Easy to be done. Unhonest to be spoken.   

§. XIX. The Rule of Time.  
Of Time.  
NOuns are commonly used,  
1. In the Ablative case, which betoken part of Time; i. e. with answer to when; as,  

No man is wise at all hours.  
Thou wakest in the night, and sleepest in the day.   
2. In the Accusative case, which signify continual term of Time, without ceasing or intermission; i. e. with answer to the question how long? as,  

Thou sleepest the whole winter.  
Black Pluto's gate lieth open night and day.   
1. Sometimes a Preposition is added; as,  
Three months ago. About three years. In a few days. For a day. About that age. About that time.   

§. XX. The Rule of space or distance of place.  
Of Space.  
NOuns that betoken space between place and place be commonly put in the Accusative case, and sometimes in the Ablative, as,  

Depart not a foot-breadth from a good conscience.  
They are not many paces one from another.    

§. XXI. The Rule of Nouns of place.  
Of Place.  
NOuns of place, when they follow a Verb that signifieth action or motion,  
1. In a place, to a place, from a place, or by a place (if they: be nouns Appellatives or proper names of great places viz. Regions &c.) be put with a Preposition, as, He is in the market.  

I live in England. He went hence to the Church.  
He came through France into Italy.  
He is gone out of the town.   
1. Obs. But sometimes the Preposition is understood; as, He went to Italy.  
2. In a place or at a place (if they be proper names of cities or towns) of the first or second declension and the Singular Number be put in the Genitive case; But of the third Declension or Plural number only in the Ablative; as,  

What should I do at Rome?  
He lived at London. He was born at Athens.  
I being unconstant love Tibur at Rome, and Rome at Tibur.   
3. To a place (if they be proper names) are put in the Accusative case, as,  

I go to London to buy wares.  
I went to Cambridg.   
iv From a place or by a place (if they be proper names) are put in the Ablative case; as,  

He went by London to Cambridge.  
He went from London.   
Ohs. Humus, militia, bellum, domus, and rus do follow the Rules of Proper Names of Cities or Towns as, We live together at home, and in the wars.  

He was brought up in the Country.  
I will go into the country. Go home.  
He is returned out of the Country.  
He is newly gone from home.    

§. XXII. The Rule of the government of Impersonals.  
Of Impersonals. 1 Active. 2. Passives.  
I IMpersonals of the Active voice govern,  
1. A Genitive case, viz. Interest; refert, and est for interest; as, It concerneth all men to do well.  
It much concerneth a Christian Commonwealth, that the Bishops be learned and pious.  
1. Obs. Except these Ablative cases, Meâ, tuâ, suâ, nostrâ, vestrâ, and Cuiâ, as,  

It is expedient to thee to know thyself.  
It little concerneth you.   
II. A Dative, viz. Accidit, certum est, contingit, constat, confert, etc. which be put acquisitively; as,  
It is better for me to die manfully, then to live with disgrace. I am resolved to run all hazards.  
III. An Accusative 1. Only, viz. Juvat, decet, delectat, oportet, as, It becometh not men to scold like women.  
2. With the Preposition Admetus, viz. Attinet, pertinet, spectat, as, It belongeth to thee. It belongeth to all men to live well.  
3. With a Genitive viz. Poenitet, taedet, miseret, miserescit, pudet, piget; as,  

It repenteth every one of his own estate.  
It irketh me of my life.   
II. Impersonals of the Passive voice have such cases as other Verbs Passives have; as,  

Neither is there sowing nor mowing there for me.  
He is gone to Athens. They slept all night.  
The enemies fought stoutly.   
1. Obs. Yet many times the case is not expressed; as, What do they in the School? They ply their books.    

Chap. 5. Of the Government of Participles.  
5. Of Participles.  
PArticiples govern such cases as the Verbs that they come of; as, Like to enjoie his friends.  
Taking order for thee. Called the seven wise men.  
1 Obs. But when they be changed into Nouns they will have a Genitive case; as,  
Greedy of another man's goods. Most desirous of thee.  
2. Participials in Dus will have a Dative case; as,  
He is to be earnestly entreated by me.  
3. Exosus, and perosus having the Active signification will have an Accusative case; as,  
Hating cruelty.  
But having the Passive, a Dative; as,  
Hated of God and good men.  
4. Pertaesus will have a Genitive or an Accusative case; as, Weary of wedlock. Weary of his sluggishness.  
5. Natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creätus, ortus, editus, will have an Ablative case; as,  

O thou that art born of a Goddess!  
A good woman come of good parents.  
Of what blood is he come?    

Chap. 6. Of the Government of Adverbs.  
6. Adverbs. 1. With Case.  

§. I. Of Adverbs which govern cases.  
ADverbs govern,  
1. A Nominative case, viz. En see, and Ecce behold, being adverbs of Showing; as,  
Behold Priam. Lo two Altars.  
1 Obs. But being Adverbs of upbraiding they will have an Accusative; as,  
See his habit or fashion. Look thou the other fellow.  
2. A Genitive, viz. Adverbs of quantity, time, and place, as, In what Country. To what land. At that time. An abundance of tales. Words enough. Part of the men.  
1. Obs. So also Ergò for Caussâ; as, For his sake.  
2 Obs. Pridie the day before, and postridie the day after, will have a Genitive or an Accusative case; as, The day before that day. The day after the Kalends.  
3 Obs. Minimè gentium in no wise, is a proper phrase, or manner of speech.  
3 A Dative, viz. such as be derived of Nouns that govern a Dative case; as, He came to meet him. He singeth like him. He liveth unprofitably to himself.  
1 Obs. These Datives be used Adverbially, Tempori betime, luci by day, vesperi at even; as,  

We must rise betime. We must go to bed at even.  
We must take pains by day.   
4. An Accusative case of the Preposition they be come of; as, Nearer the city. Next to Spain.  
N. B. Plùs, minùs, ampliùs, will have a Nominative, a Genitive, a Dative, and an Ablative case; as,  

Above three hundred wagons. Above 50 men. Above half a mile. More than that.    

§. II. Of Adverbs which govern moods.  
With a Mood.  
UBi when, post quam after that, cùm when, do govern an Indicative; as, When I shall sacrifice an heifer for my fruits, come thou.  
Or Subjunctive; as, When I sung of Kings, and wars, Apollo snatched me by the ear.  
Donec until, govern's an Indicative; as,  
Until he bade to fold the sheep and count them.  
Or Subjunctive; as, Until that water, which thou hast put in, be boiled.  
Donec as long as, an Indicative; as,  
As long as I was safe.  
Dum whilst, or as long as, govern's an Indicative; as, Whilst the maid is making ready.  
As long as thou dost what befitteth thee.  
Dum so that, or until, doth govern a Subjunctive; as, So that I may profit thee. Until the third Summer shall see him reigning in Italy.  
Quoad as long as, govern's an Indicative; as,  
As long as thou exspectest thy Chamber-fellow.  
Or Subjunctive; as, As long as I could.  
Quoad until, doth govern a Subjunctive; as,  
I will keep all things safe till the Army be sent hither.  
Simulac & simulatque as soon as, do govern an Indicative; as, As soon as he was able to abide war.  
Or a Subjunctive; as, As soon as his age waxed ripe.  
Quemadmodum as, ut as, utcunque as, sicut as, do govern an Indicative; as, As thou salutest, so shalt thou be saluted again.  
Or a Subjunctive; as, As thou shalt sow, so shalt thou reap.  
Vt after that, doth govern an Indicative; as, After that they came into the city.  
Quasi as, ceu as, tanquam as, Perinde acsi like as, Haud secus acsi no otherwise, then as, do govern a Subjunctive; as,  
As though we knew not our selus among our selus.  
And these also couple like cases; as,  

I knew the man even as thyself.  
He smileth on me as on a friend.   
Nè not, an Adverb of Forbidding, doth govern an Imperative; as, Be not so wroth.  
Or a Subjunctive; as, This is a great knave, do not fear him.    

Chap. 7. Of the Government of Conjunctions.  
Of Conjunctions which do couple.  

§. I. Of Conjunctions which do couple Words.  
COnjunctions Copulatives & disjunctives, and these four quàm, nisi, praeterquam, an, do couple like cases, and most commonly like moods and tenses; as, The night, and love, and wine do persuade no moderate thing.  

He is younger than thou art.  
He pleaseth no body but himself.  
Peter and John did pray and preach in the Temple.   
1. Obs. But oftentimes some particular reason of words, require divers cases, moods and tenses; as,  

I bought a book for an hundred asses and more.  
I lived at Rome, and at Venice.  
I gave them thanks, and will do so whilst I live.   
2. Obs. Cùm and tum, and tum being doubled, will couple like cases; as,  
He embraceth all learned men, but especially Marcellus. He hateth both learning and virtue.   

§. I. Of Conjunctions which govern moods.  
Govern Moods.  
ETsi although, tametsi although, etiamsi although, quanquam although, in the beginning of a Speech govern an Indicative; as,  
Though no news was brought.  
But in the middle of a Speech a Subjunctive; as, Thou blamestimee though thou hast done it thyself.  
Quamvis although, licèt although, commonly do govern a Subjunctive; as,  
Though thou comest thyself.  
Ni except, nisi unless, si if, siquidem if so be, quòd that, quia because, quàm then, postquam after, posteaquam after that, ubi for postquam, nunquam never, priusquam before that, do  
govern An Indicative, or, as, I am glad that thou Subjunctive, art returned safe.  
Si if, doth govern an Indicative; as,  
If thou be'st well, it is well.  
Or a Subjunctive; as, If thou shalt deny, thou shalt be whipped.  
Si used for quamvis though, a Subjunctive; as,  
No not though she entreat.  
Quando seeing that, quandoquidem seeing that, quoniam because, do govern an Indicative; as,  
Say on, seeing that we sit together on the soft grass.  
Quip because, doth govern an Indicative; as,  
Because he is sick.  
Qüippe qui as he that, doth govern an Indicative, or Subjunctive; as,  
As he hath twice forsworn himself.  
Qui, when quip is understood, signifying a Caus, a Subjunctive; as,  
Thou art a fool to believ this fellow, i. e. because you believ.  
Cùm for quamvis although, quandoquidem seeing that, quoniam because, govern a Subjunctive; as,  
Seeing thou art fit.  
Nè, an, num, whether, of Ask, will have an Indicative; as, Whether is he alive, or no?  
Of Doubting, a Subjunctive; as,  
See whether he be returned?  
Vt to the end that, for nè non jest not, for quanquam although, and utpote because, govern's a Subjunctive; as, To the end that he might be with you.  

I am afraid he cannot withstand it.  
Though all things fall out as I would.  
Because thou hast deceived me so oft.   
Vt for postquam after that, quemadmodum even as, sicut as, or used in ask, will have an Indicative; as, After that I went from the city.  

Go on to do as thou dost.  
Like as is his madness. How doth he?     

Chap. 8. Of the government of Prepositions.  
8. Of Prepositions.  

I. Thirty Prepositions govern an Accusative case viz. 

1. To the Church.  
2. At the market.  
3. Before death.  
4. Against two.  
5. Towards thee.  
6. On this side Thames.  
7. On this side the River.  
8. About the town.  
9 About the hill.  
10. About two thousand.  
11. Against the prick.  
12. Towards the people.  
13. Without the house.  
14. Betwixt the cup and the lip.  
15. Within the house.  
16. Below all men.  
17. By the well.  
18. For a reward.  
19 In his power.  
20. Through the plain fields.  
21. Behind the back.  
22. After death.  
23. Besides the cottage.  
24. For my Neighbour.  
25. According to Aristotle.  
26. By the water courses.  
27. Above his capacity.  
28. Beyond the Alps.  
29. Towards London.  
30. Beyond the Indians.    
II. And twelv govern an Ablative case; 

1. From God.  
2. From an enemy.  
3. Of any body.  
4. Without money.  
5. Before the master.  
6. With loss.  
7. Concerning trifles.  
8. Out of a well.  
9 From an high rock.  
10. Before all things.  
11. Without bread.  
12. For the poor.    
III. Five govern an Accusative and an Ablative case. 

1. Privy to his father.  
2 

Into the house.  
In the house.    
3. 

A little before night.  
In the night.    
4. Upon a stone.  
5. Under the earth.     
To which you may add tenùs, up to, as,  

Up to the privy parts.  
Up to the breast. Up to the ears.   
1. Obs. A Preposition is often understood as,  

I expect to day, or at the furthest (to) morrow.  
He appeared (in) the shape of a man.   
2. Obs. And oftimes it is more than needs; as, Abstain from vices. I will call my friend to this matter.  
3. Obs. A Preposition in composition doth sometimes govern the same case, which it governed being without composition, as,  
I pass by thee unsaluted. I leave my office.  
4. Obs. These seem to be singular expressions, as,  

To go out of the doors.  
To prevent the winds in running.    

Chap. 9 Of the government of Interjections.  
9 Interjections.  
CErtain Interjections govern cases, viz.  
1. O of Exclamation, a Nominative, Accusative, and vocative; as,  
O gladsome day! O happy husbandmen! O pretty boy! But of calling, a Vocative only as,  
Come hither o Galatéa!  
2. Heus, and oh, a Vocative; as, O Syrus! Ho little book!  
3. Pro and proh, ah and vah, an Accusative and Vocative; as, O the faith of God and man!  
O holy Jupiter! Ah me poor man! Ah the inconstancy! Alas unhappy maid! Oh you villain!  
4. Heu, a Nominative, Dative, and Accusative; as,  
Alas the godliness. O the hated stock.  
Alas for me poor man.  
5. Him and apage an Accusative; as, Fie upon craft. See Davus for you. Away with such compliments.  
6. Hei and vae a Dative; as, Woe is me.  
Woe be to thee.  
1. Obs. Interjections are often put without a case; as, Alas, I am afraid. What madness, (with a mischief?  
2. Obs. And they are often understood, as;  
(O) me poor wretch. (O) the base prank.  
I think you wonder, Sirs.   

Chap. 10. Of the Figures of a word.  
OF Figures. 1. Of a Word.  
FIgure is a kind of speaking on some new fashion, or the altering of a word or speech from the usual manner of speaking, and that also by authority of good writers.  
Figure is of two sorts, 1. Of a Word: which belongs to Etymology. 2. Of Construction: Syntaxis.  
A Figure of a Word is that which any way changeth the form of a word, and these be its chief kinds.  
1 Prosthesis, is the putting a letter or syllable to the beginning of a word; as Gnatus for natus, tetuli for tuli.  
2. Aphaeresis, is the taking a letter or syllable from the beginning of a word; as, Ruit for Eruit, temnere for contemnere.  
3. Epenthesis, is the putting of a letter or syllable into the middle of a word; as, Relligio for religio, Induperator for Imperator.  
4. Syncope, is the taking a letter or syllable from the middle of a word, as, Abiît for abivit, dîxti for dixisti.  
5. Paragoge, is the putting of a letter or syllable to the end of a word; as, Possit for dici, emorier for emori.  
6. Apocope, is the taking of a letter or syllable from the end of a word; as, Ingenî for ingenii.  
7. Diaeresis, is the dividing of one syllable into two; as, Auläi for aulae, evolüisse for evolvisse.  
8. Synaeresis, is the contracting of two vowels into one syllable, which belong to two divers syllables; as, Thesei for Thesei. uêmen for vehemens.  
9 Metathesis is the mis-placing of a letter or syllable; as, pistris for priests a long ship.  
10. Antithesis, or Antistoechon is the putting of a letter for a letter; as, Olli for illi.  
11. Tmesis, is the parting of a compound word betwixt the parts whereof another is put; as, Quae mihi cunque placent, What things soever pleas me.  
12. Enallage, is the putting of the Parts of Speech, or their Accidents one for another; as, The people being as King. i. e. ruling all abroad. Agnus trepidare for trepidabat, The Lamb did tremble.  
13. Archaismus, is an old fashion of speaking, which is now out of use; as, Valdè tonit for tonuit, It thundered exceedingly. Tam nulli consilii, So void of counsel. Operam abuti, To bestow his labour to a wrong end.  
14. Metaplasinus, is any change (at all) in a word; as, Agreste for agresti.   

Chap 11. Of the Figures of Construction.  
2. Of Construction.  
A Figure of construction is that which any way changeth the frame of a Speech. Its kinds are  
1. Apposition, is the putting together of two or more Substantives in the same case; as, The river Rhine. The city Athens. M T. C.  
And it is either to 1. Restrain generality; as, A living creature, an horse. 2. Take away Equivocation; as, The dog-star. 3. To attribute a property to one; as, Erasmus a man of most exact judgement.  
2. Syilepsis, is the comprehending of the more unworthy gender or person under the more worthy; as, I and my brother are white. Mars and Venus, both being naked, lie tied fast together in the snares.  
3. Prolepsis, is a brief expression of things; as,  
Two Eagles flew, this from the East, that from the West. The people live, some in want, some in delights.  
Bear ye one another's burdens. Let both of us take an equal share.  
4. Zeugma, is the bringing back of one Verb or Adjective to divers Supposites, to one expressly, and to the other by supplying it; as,  

John was a Fisher, and Peter.  
The husband and the wife is angry.   
5. Synthesis, is a Speech which agreeth in since, though not in words; as, We are both hurt.  
A brood goose. Two thousand slain.  
6. Antiptôsis, is the putting one case for another; as,  
All kind of elegancy. Are ye autors of it.  
7. Synecdoche, is when that which belongs to a part is spoken of the whole; as,  
A Blackmoor having white teeth. Wounded in the forehead. Flowers that have the names of Kings written on them.  
8. Elleipsis, is the want of a word in a Speech; as,  
I (thought) presently with myself. I remember that I saw.  
9 Pleonasmus, is the abounding of a word in a Speech beyond any necessity of it; as,  
I saw it with these eyes. I slaughtered him with his own sword.  
10. Asyndeton, is the want of Conjunctions in a Speech; as, It shall be done will thou, nill thou.  
Eat, drink, play.  
11. Polysyndeten, is an overplus of Conjunctions in a Speech; as,  
Sleep, and wine, and good cheer, and whores, and haths, do weaken men's bodies and minds.  
12. Anastrophe, is when a Preposition is set before its case; as,  
The command is in thy power.  
13. Synchysis, is a confused order of words; as,  
For ¹ it is bad ² for such as have ³ blear'd-eys and ⁴ raw ⁵ stomaches to ⁶ play at ball 7  
14. Hypallage, is a placing of words contrariwise; as,  
To commit the South-windes to the ships.  
15. Hellenifmus, is a going from the Latin use to imitate the Greeks; as,  
Do not fight against two.  
The rest which belong rather to the handsoming then the making of a Speech, are to be sought for among the Rhetoricians.    

LIB. iv OF PROSODIE.  
iv Prosodie, treateth of  
PROSODIE is the fourth part of Grammar, which teacheth the right pronunciation of words.  
A right pronunciation is that which observeth in every word, the Spirit, Tone, and Time of the Syllables.  
Prosodia therefore treateth 1. Of the Spirits. Chap. 1. 2. Of the Tones or Accents. 3. Of the Time or Quantity of Syllables, Chap. 2. 3.   

Chap. 1. Of Spirits and Tones, or Accents.  
1. Spirits. 2. Tones.  
1. A Spirit is the manner of uttering a syllable with a breath.  
And it is Sharp, with which a syllable is sharply uttered; as, Hamus, homo. Gentle, or flat, with which a syllable is gently pronounced; as, Amo, omnis.  
2. A Tone, or Accent is the manner of pronouncing a syllable by lifting it up, or letting it down; as, Probitátem, vituperáre.  
There be three sorts of Accents, 1. An Acute, which sharpeneth or lifteth up a syllable, and is marked with a thwart stroke ascending towards the right hand ('). 2. A Grave, which flattteth or letteth down a syllable, and is marked with a thwart stroke descending towards the right hand (`). 3. A Circumflect, which uttereth a syllable with a longer stay, lifting it up as the Acute, and letting it down as the Grave Accent, and it is marked with a figure made of an acute and grave ().  
There be three Rules of Tones or Accents.  
1. A word of one syllable, being short or long by Position, hath an Acute Accent; as, Mél, párs, but if it be long by Nature, it is Circumflected; as, Spês, flôs.  
2. In a word of two syllables, if the first be long by Nature, and the later short, the first is Circumflected; as, Lûna, mûsa; but otherwise it hath an Acute; as, Bónus, Déus, sólers.  
3. A word of many syllables, having the last syllable save one long, when a long syllable followeth, it hath an acute in the last syllable save one; as, Libértas; but when a short syllable followeth, it hath a Circumflect in the last syllable save one; as, Amâre, Românus.  
But if it have the last syllable save one short, the syllable before the last save one will have an acute accent; as, Dóminus, Póntifex.  
The rest of the syllables in words of many syllables, have grave accents (though not marked) as, Celebérrimus.  
1 Obs. The Compounds of Facio have an acute in the last syllable save one; as, Benefácis, malefácis.  
2 Obs. The Compounds of Fis, fit, have an acute in the last syllable; as, Calefit, benefit.  
3 Obs. Grammarians do often confound a Circumflect with an acute, because it is scarce differenced from it in pronunciation.  
There be five things which altar the rules of the Accents.  
I. Difference, for which sake  
1. Some words are Circumflected in the last syllable, as the Ablative case of the first Declension Musâ, whereby it may differ from the Nominative and Vocative Musa. Thus ergô for caussâ differs from ergò the Conjunction.  
2. Some have an acute accent in the last syllable, as many Adverbs, to difference them from other parts of Speech; viz. Vnà, aliquà, putà, ponè, etc. which in the end of a sentence have an acute accent, but in the beginning or middle thereof a grave accent.  
3. Some have an acute in the syllable before the last syllable save one; as, Déinde, déorsum, quinimo, intereáloci, nihilóminus, quátenus etc. when they are not several words; as are Intérea loci, nihilo minus, púbe ténus, etc.  
N. B. An accent is now seldom marked, except for difference sake, for than it is noted not only in the last syllable, but also in the last syllable save one, and in that which is before the last save one; as, óccido, occido.  
II. Transposition, or mis-placing words. For when Prepositions be set after their cases, they have a grave accent, as, Transtra pèr & remos. Te penès imperium.  
III. Attraction, when the last syllable of the word going before doth draw unto it the accent of the Inclinative Conjunction; as, Lumináque laurúsque Dei.  
But when there is an apparent Composition, the accent is not altered; as, itaque, úndique, hiccine.  
iv Concision, when words are cut off by Syncope, or Apocope, for than they keep the accent of the whole word; as, Virgili for Virgilii, Arpinâs for Arpinâtis. So also hûc, illûc, for hûcce, illûcce, and the Compounds of dic, duc, fac, as, benedic, reduc, benefac.  
V The Idiom, or the propriety of the language: For Greek words, if they come whole to the Latins, (i. e. if they be expressed with the very same letters) they keep their own accent; as, Metamórphosis, Orthographia.  
But if they become altogether Latin, they keep the Latin accent; as, Geórgica, Philosóphia, Idólum.  
N. B. If the proper accent of a strange word be unknown, it will be most safe to pronounce it according to the Latin accent.  
2. Those syllables which are common are pronounced short in Prose, i. e. where a mute and a liquid do follow a short vowel; as, Célebris, Cáthedra; otherwise they are pronounced long; as, Vnius, illius, ubique.  
3. An Interrogation doth alter the accent; as, Siccine aïs Parmenó?   

Chap. 2. Of the Quantity of the First and Middle Syllables.  
3. Time or quantity. Of the first. Middle.  
TIme or Quantity is the measure of pronouncing a Syllable, or the space of tuning a Vowel, whereby we measure how long it is in pronouncing.  
According to time or quantity, a syllable is said to be Short, which hath one time, or which is quickly pronounced; as, pĭŭs, whose time is thus marked (˘). Long, which hath two times, or which hath the space of two short times; as, Aūdinre, whose long time is thus marked (¯). According to the order which they have in words, Syllables are named First, which have the first place in a word. Middle, middle Last, last The quantity of the first syllables is known eight manner of ways: by I. Position. II. A Vowel before a vowel. III. A Diphthong. iv Derivation. V Composition. VI Preposition. VII. Rule. VIII. Example, or Authority.  
But the Middle Syllables have besides these a particular way of being known, which you maysee IX  
I. According to Position,  
1. A Vowel set before two Consonants, or a double consonant in the same word, is long; as, Venntus, anxis, patrinzo. But the Compounds of jugum make i short; as, Bĭjugus.  
2. And if a Consonant doth close the foregoing word, and the word following beginneth with a consonant, the vowel foregoing shall be long; as,  
Majonr sum quamm cui ponssint fonrtuna nocere.  
3. A short vowel in the end of a word, when the word following beginneth with two consonants, sometimes, but seldom is made long; as,  
Occultan spolia, & plures de pace triumphos.  
4. A short vowel before a mute, with a liquid following is common, i. e. long or short; as,  
Et primo volŭcri similis, mox vera voluncris.  
But a long vowel is not changed; as, Arantrum, Simulancrum.  
II. A Vowel before another in the same word is short; as, Dĕus. nĭhil.  
But 1. Genitive cases in ius, make the last syllable save one common; as, Vnius, illius. Except that i in alterĭus is always short, and in alinus' always long.  
2. In the fifth Declension e betwixt a double i is long; as, Facieni.  
3. Fi in Fio is every where long, but where e and r follow it both together; as,  
Omnia jam fient, fĭeri quae posse negabas.  
4. Oh hath the first syllable doubtful; enheu always long.  
5. A Vowel before another in Greek words is long; as, Dicite Pinerides; and in Possessives; as, Aenenia nutrix.  
But the quantity of Greek syllables is better to be found from the Greeks.  
6. In foreign words the quantity is doubtful; as, Michaël, Abraham.  
III. Every Diphthong is long; as, Aunrum, Musae. And syllables that are Contracted; as, Congo, nil.  
But prae before a vowel is often made short; as, Ver pranit aesatem; and but seldom long; as, Domino praēiret Arion. ae in Maeotis is doubtful.  
IV. Derivatives have the same quantity that their Primitives have; as, ămator of ämo. Yet there be excepted,  

1. Some which are long, and are derived from them that be short, viz.  Vox, voncis, of Vŏco. Lex, lengis, Lĕgo. Rex, rengis, Rĕgo. Sends. Sĕdeo. Junior, Jŭvenis. Hummanus, Hŏmo. Juncundus, Jŭvo. Vommer, Vŏmo: Lanterna, Lăteo. Tengula, Tĕgo. Mancero, Măcer. Pennuria, Pĕnus. 
2. Some that are short, and are derived of them that are long, viz.  Dux, dŭcis, of Dunco. Dĭcax, Dinco. Fĭdes, Fino. ărena, ărista, anreo. Pŏsui, Ponno. Gĕnui, Gingno. Frăgor, of Framngo. Frăgilis Nŏto, tas, Nontu. Năto, tas Nantu. Dĭsertus, Dinssero. Sŏpor, Sompio.  
And some others of both sorts.  
V Compound words have the quantity of the Simple; as, Pŏtens, impŏtens. Sonlor, consonlor.  
1. Except Innŭba, of Numbo. Cognĭtum, of Nontum. Pronŭba. Agnĭtum, Dejĕro, of junro. Restĭturus, of Stanturus. Pejĕro, Perstĭturns,  
2. Also the Compounds of Dinco, that end in dĭcus; as, Maledĭcus.  
3. Ambĭtus the Noun hath i short, Ambintus the Participle hath i long.  
4. Idem in the Masculine gender hath i long, in the Neuter i short.  
5. In words that are Compounded  
1. With Verbs, the former part ending in e is short; as, Valedico.  
2. With Particles, by, tri, tre, du, the same are short; as, Bĭceps, trĭceps, trĕcenti, dŭcenti.  
3. With Nouns, the former part ending in i, y, u, is short, as, Tardĭgradus, Polydorus, cornŭpeta. Except quivis and some others.  
6. These words make long the last syllable of their simples, which is common, viz. ubîque, ubinlibet, ibindem, quandonque, quandoncunque, but do in quandŏquidem is short.  
VI Of the Prepositions,  
1. A, de, è, se, prae, and those that end in (a) are long, except a vowel follow; as, Vnda dĕhiscens.  
2. Pro the Latin syllable is long, except in these words, Prŏcella, prŏfugus, prŏtervus, prŏnepos, proneptis, prŏfanus, prŏfiteor, prŏfundus, prŏficiscor, prŏfari, prŏparo, prŏfugio, prŏfectò, prŏpello, prŏpulso. But  
1. Propago, gas, and have pro doubtful. Propago, gĭnis,  
2. Pro the Greek syllable is short; as, Prŏpheta, prŏlogus, Prŏmetheus, etc. but in propino it is doubtful.  
3. Di is long except in Dĭrimo, and dĭsertus.  
4. The rest of the Prepositions be short, if position do not hinder, for re in resert it is good, cometh of res, and is therefore long.  
VII. There be two Rules, 1. Of Preterperfect tenses and Supines of two syllables. 2. Of Preterperfect tenses that double the first syllable.  
1. Every preterperfect ten & supine of two syllabls hath the first syllable long, as, Lengi, emmi, montum, lantum. Except  
1. Six preterperfect tenses; Fĭdi, bĭbi, dĕdi, scĭdi, tŭli, stĕti.  
2. Nine supines; Dătum, sătum, cĭtum, (of cieo) ĭtum, lĭtum, quĭtum, sĭtum, rătum, rŭtum.  
2. Preterperfect tenses that double the first syllable of their Present ten, have their first syllable short; as, Pempendi, mŏmordi, spŏspondi.  
VIII. The quantity of such syllables as come not under the rules aforegoing is to be known by the Example and Authority of Poets; and this is the most certain and most general way,  
1. Because every rule resteth upon the authority of the Antient.  
2. Because the quantity of many syllables is not known but by examples.  
1. These words have their first syllable common, viz. Britannus, Bithynus, Cacus, Cofyra, Crathys, Creticus, Curetes, Fidene, Gradivus, Hinulus, Hymen, Italus, liquor, liquidus, Lycus, Orion, Pachinus, palatium, Pelion, Pyrene, rud●, Sychaeus, etc.  
2. And these their middle; Batavus, connubium, ficedula, malea, Pharsalia, Sidonius, etc.  
IX. Middle syllables are partly known the same way that the first, and partly 1. by the increase of the Genitive case, and 2. the Analogy of the Conjugation.  
1. The increase of the Genitive case is, when a Noun hath more syllables in the Genitive case singular, than it had in the Nominative, and according to it, the last syllable save one of Nouns increasing  
1. Sharp, is long.  
2. Flat, is short.  
2. The Analogy of Conjugation is, when Verbs follow their common Rule of Conjugating, and according to this  
a the character or note of the First Conjugation is long. e Second long. e Third short. i Fourth long.  
But in Do and its Compounds, when they are of this Conjugation, a is short; as in dămus circumdămus, dăbis circundăbis, dăre circundăre.  
The Syllables rimus and ritis in the Preterperfect ten of the Subjunctive mood are short; as, Amaverĭmus, amaverĭtis; but long in the Future ten; as, Amaverimmus, amaverintiss.  
Latin Adjectives in inus make (i) long; as, Clandestinnus, mediastinnus. Except these following, Diutĭnus, crastĭnus, pristĭnus, perendĭnus, hornotĭnus, serotĭnus Oleagĭnus, fagĭnus, cedrĭnus, carbasĭnus, and others that signify matter, or that are made of the mines of metals, and end in inus; as, Chrystallĭnus, myrrhĭnus, etc. which are derived of Greek Nouns?   

Chap. 3. Of the quantity of the last syllables.  
And last Syllables.  
THe last Syllables are reckoned according to the order of the letters with which words do end, thus,  
Words that end in A are long; as, Aman, contran, ergan.  Except,  1. Pută, ită, quiă, ejă.  2. Likewise all cases in a, besides Vocatives in a, of Greek Nouns in as; as, o Aenean, and the Ablative case of the first Declension; as, Musâ.  3. Numerals in ginta, which have a common; as, Triginta, quadraginta. B are short; as, ăb.  Except,  1. Hebrew words; as, Jacomb. C are long; as, anc, since, and hinc the Adverb.  Except,  1. Lăc, nĕc, donĕc, which are short.  2. Fac, and the Pronoun hic are common, as also its Neuter Gender hoc, so that it be not of the Ablative case. D are short; as, ăd.  1. Except Hebrew words; as, Davind. E are short; as, Marĕ, penĕ, legĕ, scribĕ.  Except,  1. Nouns of the Fift Declension in e; as, Fidem, diem, ren, with the Adverbs that come of them; as, Hodien, quaren.  2. Fame, now of the Third Declension, heretofore of the Fifth.  3. The second person singular of the Imperative mood, of the Active voice, of the second Conjugation; as, Docen, moven, manen.  Butler e in Cave, vide, salve, and vale is sometimes short.  4. Monosyllables in e; as, Men, ten, cen, except quĕ, nĕ, uĕ, the Inclinative Conjunctions.  5. Adverbs in e derived of Adjectives; as, Docten, valden, and fermen, ferens: yet benĕ and malĕ are short.  6. Words that in Greek are writ with an Eta, or e long; as, Anchisen, ceten, tempen. I are long; as, Domini, amavin.  Except,  1. Mihi, tibi, sibi, ubi, ibi, uti for ut, and cui a word of two syllables, which are common.  2. Nisĭ, and quasĭ which are short, as are also the Vocative cases of Greek Nouns, whose Genitive singular endeth in os; as, Palladĭ, Daphnĭ. L are short; as, Animăl, mĕl.  Except  1. Sanl and Sonl.  2. Hebrew words which are writ in Greek with a long vowel; as, Michaenl. N are long; as, Paeamn, Hymenn, nonn.  Except  1. Forsăn, forsităn, ăn, tamĕn, attamĕn, veruntamĕn.  2. Words cut off by an Apocope; as, Méns ', vidéns '.  3. In with its Compounds; as, Exĭn, subĭn. etc.  4. Nouns ending in en, whose Genitive case singular hath ĭnis short; as, Garmĕn, pectĕn, tibicĕn.  5. Greek Nouns in on by little o; as, Iliŏn, Peliŏn, Caucasŏn.  6. Greek Nouns in in, yn, and an, whose Nominative case is short; as, Alexĭn, Ity̆n, Maiăn. O are common; as, Amo, porrò, docende.  Except  1. Obliqne cases in o which are always made long; as, Dominon, servon.  2. Adverbs derived of Adjectives; as, Tanton, falson, etc. But Sedulò, crebrè, and mutuò are common, rather to be made long.  3. Monosyllables in o are long; as, do, stŏ, and ergon for caussâ.  4. Ambo, duo, ego, homo, citò, modò with its compounds are seldom read long.  5. Greek words in o are long; as, Sapph, unless they come of Nominative cases in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from which (n) is taken away; as, Leo, Plato, which for the most part are short. R are short; as, Caesăr, torcúlăr, pĕr, diciĕr.  Except  1. Fanr, lanr, nanr, venr, funr, cunr, and panr with its compounds. Cor is once read long in Ovid.  2. Greek words that end in er with e long; as, Aenr, cratenr, except patĕr, matĕr. S have termination answerable to the number of vowels. as are long; as, Amans, musans.  Except  1. Greek nouns, whose Genitive case singular endeth in dos; as, Archăs, Pallăs.  2. The Acusatives plural of Nouns increasing; as, Heroăs, Phillidäs. es are long; as, Anchisens', sedens, docens.  Except  1. Nouns in es of the Third Declension that encreas short; as, Milĕs, diuĕs. But of these, Cerens, abiens, ariens, pariens, and pens, with its Compounds are long.  2. Es of sum, with its Compounds, potĕs, adĕs, prodĕs, obĕs, and penĕs the Preposition are short.  3 Neuters singular, and Nominatives plural of Greek Nouns that end in es not eyes; as, Cacoéthĕs, Cyclopĕs. is are short; as, Parĭs, panĭs, tristins,  Except  1. Obliqne cases plural in is; as Musins, dominins, and quenins for quibus.  2. Words that make long the last syllable save one of the Genitive case increasing; as, Samnins, nitis.  3. Which are made in is of the Diphthong eye; as, Omnins, Simoins.  4. All Monosyllables; as, Vis, lins, besides ĭs, bĭs, and quĭs.  5. Velins with its Compounds, malins, nolins, and ausins faxins.  6. The second persons singular of the Indicative mood present ten of the fourth Conjugation; as, Audins, dormins.  7. The second persons of the Future ten of the Subjunctive mood, which are common; as, dederis, amaveris. os are long; as Herons, honons, dominons.  Except  1. Compŏs, impŏs, and ŏs ossis.  2. Greek Nouns with little o; as, Delŏs, Palladŏs. us are short; as, Famulŭs, tempŭs.  Except  1. The Nominative cases of Nouns that increase long; as, Virtuns, saluns.  2. The Genitive cases singular, the Nominatives, the Vocatives and Accusatives plural of the fourth Declension; as, hujus manuns, hae manuns, has manuns, o manuns.  3. Monosyllables in us; as, puns, cruns.  4. Words which are writ in Greek with 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉; as, Panthuns, Cliuns.  And the name Jesuns to be reverenced of of all good men. u are long; as, Manun, genum. y and ys are short as, Moly̆, Tiphy̆s.  The last syllable in every Verse is common, i. e it may be either long or short.     

A TABLE of the Heads of the Latine-Grammar.  
Chap.   Pag.  OF Grammar and its Parts. 2  LIB. I. Of Orthography. 2 1 Of Letters. 4 2 Of Syllables. 10 3 Of Right Utterance. 12 4 Of Points in Sentences. 14  LIB. II. Of Etymology. 17 1 Of the eight Parts of Speech, and their general Accidents. 16 2 Of a Noun and its propér Accidents. 20 3 Of Case. 22 4 Of Gender. 24 5 Of the general Rules of Proper Names. 26 6 Of the general Rules of Common Names. 28 7 Of the first Special Rule. 30 8 Of the second Special Rule. 34 9 Of the third Special Rule. 38 10 Of the Genders of Adjectives. 42 11 Of the first Declension. 46 12 Of the second Declension. 50 13 Of the third Declension. 52 14 Of the fourth Declension. 60 15 Of the fift Declension. 62 16 Of the Declining of Adjectives. 64 17 Of Comparison. 68 18 Of varying Heteroclits. 74 19 Of Heteroc that want Case. 78 20 Of Heteroclits that want Number. 80 21 Of Redundant Heteroclits. 86 22 Of the Kinds of Nouns. 90 23 Of a Pronoun. 95 24 Of a Verb and its Accidents. 106 27 Of the form of the first Conjugation. 112 28 Of the form of the second Conjugation. 116 29 Of the form of the third Conjugation. 120 30 Of the form of the fourth Conjugation. 124 31 Of the Preterperfect tenses of Verbs Simple. 128 32 Of the Preterperfect tenses of Compound Verbs. 136 33 Of the Supines of Simple Verbs. 142 34 Of the Supines of Compound Verbs, and of the Preterperfect ten of Verbs in or,  35 Of certain Verbs Irregular. 148 36 Of Verbs that want certain Moods and Tenses. 154 37 Of forming the Verb Sum. 160 38 Of Verbs impersonals and Derivatives. 162 39 Of a Participle. 166 40 Of an Adverb. 172 41 Of a Conjunction. 178 42 Of a Preposition. 182 43 Of an Interjection 184  LIB. III. Of Syntax. 188 1 Of Concordance. 188 2 Of the Government of Nouns. 200 3 Pronouns. 214 4 Verbs. 219 5 Participles. 246 6 Adverbs. 248 7 Conjunctions. 252 8 Prepositions. 256 9 Interjections. 260 10 Of the Figures of a word. 262 11 Of the Figures of Construction. 264  LIB. iv Of Prosodie. 270 1 Of Spirits, Tones, or Accents. 270 2 Of the Quantity of the first and middle Syllables. 276 3 Of the Quantity of the last Syllables. 188  Appendix Grammatices. 198 1 De Ordine Vocum Grammatico 298 2 Oratorio. 299 3 Poëtico. 301 4 De Pede & ejus generibus. 302 5 De Versuum variis generibus. 304   

A PRAYER to be used every day, for Child's good proceeding at their BOOKS.  
O Almighty Lord and merciful Father, maker of Heaven and Earth, which of thy free liberality givest wisdom abundantly to all that with faith and full assurance ask it of thee: Beautify by the light of thy heavenly grace the towardness of our wits, the which with all powers of nature thou hast poured into us; that we may not only understand those things which may effectually bring us to the knowledge of thee and the Lord jesus our Saviour, but also with our whole heart and will constantly follow the same, and receiv daslie encreas through thy bountiful goodness towards us, as well in good life as learning; so that thou which workest all things in all creatures, mayest make thy gracious benefits shine in us, to the endless glory and honour of thine immortal Majesty.  
Amen.   

OUr Father which art in heaven, Hallowed be thy Name; Thy Kingdom come, Thy will be done in Earth as it is in Heaven. Give us this day our daily bread: And forgive us our trespasses, as we forgive them that trespass against us: And lead us not into temptation: But deliver us from evil, For thine is the Kingdom, the Power, and the Glory, for ever and ever,  
Amen.  
FINIS.